WO2021044802A1 - Composition, cured product, optical filter, and method for producing cured product - Google Patents

Composition, cured product, optical filter, and method for producing cured product Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021044802A1
WO2021044802A1 PCT/JP2020/030321 JP2020030321W WO2021044802A1 WO 2021044802 A1 WO2021044802 A1 WO 2021044802A1 JP 2020030321 W JP2020030321 W JP 2020030321W WO 2021044802 A1 WO2021044802 A1 WO 2021044802A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
compound
carbon atoms
mass
cured product
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2020/030321
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
一平 渡辺
智美 齋藤
洋介 前田
Original Assignee
株式会社Adeka
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 株式会社Adeka filed Critical 株式会社Adeka
Priority to CN202080048106.2A priority Critical patent/CN114072474B/en
Priority to JP2021543666A priority patent/JPWO2021044802A1/ja
Priority to KR1020217041670A priority patent/KR20220059442A/en
Publication of WO2021044802A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021044802A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09DCOATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
    • C09D163/00Coating compositions based on epoxy resins; Coating compositions based on derivatives of epoxy resins
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08GMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED OTHERWISE THAN BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING UNSATURATED CARBON-TO-CARBON BONDS
    • C08G59/00Polycondensates containing more than one epoxy group per molecule; Macromolecules obtained by polymerising compounds containing more than one epoxy group per molecule using curing agents or catalysts which react with the epoxy groups
    • C08G59/18Macromolecules obtained by polymerising compounds containing more than one epoxy group per molecule using curing agents or catalysts which react with the epoxy groups ; e.g. general methods of curing
    • C08G59/20Macromolecules obtained by polymerising compounds containing more than one epoxy group per molecule using curing agents or catalysts which react with the epoxy groups ; e.g. general methods of curing characterised by the epoxy compounds used
    • C08G59/22Di-epoxy compounds
    • C08G59/24Di-epoxy compounds carbocyclic
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08GMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED OTHERWISE THAN BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING UNSATURATED CARBON-TO-CARBON BONDS
    • C08G59/00Polycondensates containing more than one epoxy group per molecule; Macromolecules obtained by polymerising compounds containing more than one epoxy group per molecule using curing agents or catalysts which react with the epoxy groups
    • C08G59/18Macromolecules obtained by polymerising compounds containing more than one epoxy group per molecule using curing agents or catalysts which react with the epoxy groups ; e.g. general methods of curing
    • C08G59/20Macromolecules obtained by polymerising compounds containing more than one epoxy group per molecule using curing agents or catalysts which react with the epoxy groups ; e.g. general methods of curing characterised by the epoxy compounds used
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08KUse of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K5/00Use of organic ingredients
    • C08K5/0008Organic ingredients according to more than one of the "one dot" groups of C08K5/01 - C08K5/59
    • C08K5/0041Optical brightening agents, organic pigments
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08KUse of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K5/00Use of organic ingredients
    • C08K5/0091Complexes with metal-heteroatom-bonds
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08LCOMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L63/00Compositions of epoxy resins; Compositions of derivatives of epoxy resins
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B23/00Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes
    • C09B23/02Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes the polymethine chain containing an odd number of >CH- or >C[alkyl]- groups
    • C09B23/04Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes the polymethine chain containing an odd number of >CH- or >C[alkyl]- groups one >CH- group, e.g. cyanines, isocyanines, pseudocyanines
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09DCOATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
    • C09D7/00Features of coating compositions, not provided for in group C09D5/00; Processes for incorporating ingredients in coating compositions
    • C09D7/40Additives
    • C09D7/41Organic pigments; Organic dyes
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • G02B5/22Absorbing filters
    • G02B5/223Absorbing filters containing organic substances, e.g. dyes, inks or pigments

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a composition containing a pyrromethene compound having a specific structure, a cationically polymerizable component, and an acid generator.
  • a method for forming an optical filter that absorbs light of a specific wavelength a method of applying a coloring composition containing a colorant and a curable compound by various coating methods such as a photolithography method and an inkjet method to form a coloring pattern is used.
  • a coloring composition for example, a composition in which a radically polymerizable compound and a coloring agent are combined is known.
  • Patent Document 1 describes a composition containing a dye and a radically polymerizable compound.
  • the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a composition capable of forming a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances.
  • the present invention comprises a pyrromethene compound in which a compound represented by the following general formula (I) is coordinated to a metal atom or a metal compound.
  • a compound represented by the following general formula (I) is coordinated to a metal atom or a metal compound.
  • Acid generator and A composition having the above is provided.
  • R 101 , R 102 , R 103 , R 105 , R 106 and R 107 each independently represent a linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent
  • R 104 is , A hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of a linear or branched chain which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.
  • the composition in which the compound represented by the above general formula (I) is coordinated with a metal atom or a metal compound and contains a pyrromethene compound, a cationically polymerizable component and an acid generator is excellent in light absorption and A cured product with few foreign substances can be obtained.
  • the pyrromethene compound is a compound represented by the following general formula (I-1) or a compound represented by the following general formula (I-2), which is excellent in light absorption and contains foreign substances. It is preferable in that a small amount of cured product can be obtained more easily.
  • R 201 , R 202 , R 203 , R 205 , R 206 and R 207 each independently represent a linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent.
  • R 204 represents a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.
  • Each of X 1 and X 2 may independently have a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, a phenyl group which may have a substituent, or a substituent. Represents an alkoxy group. ) (In the formula, R 301 , R 302 , R 303 , R 305 , R 306 and R 307 and R 401 , R 402 , R 403 , R 405 , R 406 and R 407 each independently have a substituent.
  • M 3 represents a metal atom or a metal compound.
  • the pyrromethene compound is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (I-2). This is because, for example, by using the compound as a dye, a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances can be obtained more easily.
  • R 301 , R 303 , R 305 and R 307 , and R 401 , R 403 , R 405 and R 407 each independently have a substituent having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • R 302 and R 306 and R 402 and R 406 are linear or branched alkyl groups which may independently have a substituent having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • R 304 and R 404 are hydrogen atoms and M 3 is Zn, Cu, Ni or Co. This is because by using the dye, a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances can be obtained more easily.
  • the cationically polymerizable component contains at least one of an alicyclic epoxy compound and an aliphatic epoxy compound. This is because by using these epoxy compounds, a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances can be obtained more easily.
  • the content of the cationically polymerizable component is preferably 50 parts by mass or more in 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition, and / or the alicyclic epoxy compound and the fat.
  • the total content of the group epoxy compounds is preferably 50 parts by mass or more in 100 parts by mass of the cationically polymerizable component. This is because when the content is in the above range, it is easier to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances in the composition.
  • the composition contains a solvent and
  • the solvent preferably contains at least one of an alcohol solvent and an ether ester solvent. This is because the organic solvent has good dispersion stability of the pyrromethene compound. Further, the composition containing the organic solvent has less volatilization during storage, and it is easy to form a composition having excellent dispersion stability.
  • the solvent can be easily removed during heat treatment such as a drying step (pre-baking step) and a heat curing step (post-baking step) at the time of forming a cured product. Therefore, the above composition can more easily obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances.
  • the above composition is for forming an optical filter. This is because the above composition can effectively exert the effect of being able to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances.
  • the present invention provides a cured product of the above composition.
  • the cured product can be used as an optical filter or the like having excellent light absorption and less foreign matter.
  • the present invention also provides an optical filter characterized by having a light absorption layer containing a cured product of the above composition.
  • the optical filter has high definition and excellent color reproducibility of an image display device.
  • the present invention provides a method for producing a cured product, which comprises a step of curing the above composition. Since the method for producing the cured product is to cure the composition, for example, a cured product that can be used as an optical filter having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances can be obtained.
  • the present invention has the effect of being able to provide a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances.
  • the present invention relates to a composition, a cured product thereof, an optical filter, and a method for producing the cured product.
  • the present invention will be described in detail.
  • composition of the present invention comprises a pyrromethene compound (hereinafter, may be referred to as a specific pyrromethene compound) in which the compound represented by the general formula (I) is coordinated to a metal atom or a metal compound, and a cationically polymerizable component. , An acid generator, and one of the characteristics of the compound.
  • the causes of such foreign substances include the case where the dye or the like aggregates during storage of the composition, or the case where the dye or the like aggregates in the process of drying and removing the solvent from the composition adhering to the discharge portion of the coating device.
  • the specific pyromethene compound shows compatibility with compounds having a wide solubility parameter (SP value).
  • the solvent is also a ketone solvent such as methyl ethyl ketone, an alcohol solvent such as diacetone alcohol, or propylene glycol. It shows good compatibility with various types of ether ester solvents such as monoethyl ether acetate.
  • the composition has a high degree of freedom in selecting a solvent, and it becomes easy to suppress the generation of foreign substances during storage. Further, the above composition has a high degree of freedom in selecting a solvent for making the composition difficult to dry when it adheres to the discharge portion of the coating / coating device, and suppresses the generation of foreign matter in the discharge portion. It will be easy.
  • the specific pyrromethene compound has excellent dispersion stability and less aggregation, so that the concentration change in the composition is small before and after filtration even when the filtration treatment is performed before the use of the composition. As a result, the above composition facilitates stable formation of a cured product having excellent light absorption.
  • the above composition uses a cationically polymerizable component as a curable component.
  • the cationically polymerizable component such as an epoxy compound has a milder curing reaction than, for example, a radically polymerizable compound such as methacrylate and acrylate, and can suppress the occurrence of modification of the dye containing the specific pyrromethene compound.
  • the composition when the composition is cured, there is little decrease in the content of the dye that effectively functions as a compound capable of absorbing light in a desired wavelength region.
  • the cationically polymerizable component such as an epoxy compound has less curing shrinkage during curing and less problems such as aggregation of the specific pyromethene compound during curing as compared with the radically polymerizable compound and the like.
  • the specific pyrromethene compound is stably dispersed and retained. Therefore, the specific pyrromethene compound in the cured product can efficiently absorb light in a desired wavelength range. From such a thing, it is possible to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption by the above composition.
  • the composition of the present invention has less curing shrinkage during polymerization, so even if it is applied to a member such as a base material and then made into a cured product, curling and peeling are less likely to occur. ..
  • the cationically polymerizable component has high water resistance as compared with a radically polymerizable compound such as acrylate, and for example, the decrease in adhesion in a high humidity environment is small. From the above, by simultaneously containing the specific pyrromethene compound, the cationically polymerizable component and the acid generator, the above composition becomes a composition capable of producing an optical filter having few foreign substances and excellent light absorption.
  • the optical filter manufactured by using the above composition can be preferably used, for example, in an image display device or the like that requires flexibility.
  • the pyrromethene compound used in the present invention is a pyrromethene compound in which a compound represented by the following general formula (I) is coordinated to a metal atom or a metal compound.
  • R 101 , R 102 , R 103 , R 105 , R 106 and R 107 each independently represent a linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent
  • R 104 is , A hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of a linear or branched chain which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.
  • the metal atom or metal compound to which the compound represented by the formula (I) is coordinated may be any one capable of forming a complex.
  • Metal atoms also include metalloids such as boron, silicon, germanium, arsenic, antimony, tellurium, selenium, polonium and astatine.
  • the metal compound includes a metal atom and an atom other than the metal atom. Examples of such metal compounds include metal halides in which metal atoms are bonded to halogen atoms such as chlorine atoms and fluorine atoms, metal hydroxides in which metal atoms are bonded to hydroxyl groups, and oxygen atoms in which metal atoms are oxygen atoms. Examples include bonded metal oxides.
  • Examples of the metal atom or the metal compound include a divalent metal atom, a halide of a trivalent or tetravalent metal, a hydroxide and an oxide, and the metal compound is a divalent metal compound as a whole. be able to.
  • Examples of the metal atom or metal compound include Zn, Mg, Si, Sn, Rh, Pt, Pd, Mo, Mn, Pb, Cu, Ni, Co, Fe, Al, In, Fe, Ti, Sn, Si.
  • a preferred embodiment of the pyrromethene compound in which the structure represented by the formula (I) is coordinated to a metal atom or a metal compound is a complex represented by the following formula (I-1) or (I-2). Examples include compounds. By using such a complex compound, it becomes easier to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances.
  • the specific pyrromethene compound is preferably a pyrromethene complex compound having a dimeric structure from the viewpoint of facilitating the formation of a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances.
  • it is preferably a complex compound represented by the above general formula (I-2).
  • R 201 , R 202 , R 203 , R 205 , R 206 and R 207 each independently represent a linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent.
  • R 204 represents a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.
  • Each of X 1 and X 2 may independently have a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, a phenyl group which may have a substituent, or a substituent. Represents an alkoxy group.
  • R 301 , R 302 , R 303 , R 305 , R 306 and R 307 and R 401 , R 402 , R 403 , R 405 , R 406 and R 407 each independently have a substituent.
  • R 304 and R 404 each independently have a hydrogen atom and a linear or branched alkyl group or a substituent which may have a substituent.
  • M 3 is Zn, Mg, Si, Sn, Rh, Pt, Pd, Mo, Mn, Pb, Cu, Ni, Co, Fe, Al, In, Fe, Ti, Sn, Si, Ge, B, or V. Represents. )
  • R 101 Carbon as a linear or branched alkyl group represented by R 101 to R 107 , R 201 to R 207 , R 301 to R 307 , and R 401 to R 407 (hereinafter, also referred to as “R 101, etc.”).
  • R 101 includes those having 1 or more and 30 or less atoms, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, s-butyl group, t-butyl group, amyl group, isoamyl group, t-.
  • Examples include a group and an icosyl group.
  • Examples of the linear or branched alkyl group having a substituent used in R 101 and the like include a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms in the linear or branched alkyl group are substituted with a substituent. Be done.
  • the alkyl group represented by X 1 and X 2 (hereinafter, also referred to as “X 1 etc.”) has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a linear or branched chain alkyl group, and 3 to 30 carbon atoms. Examples thereof include cycloalkyl groups and cycloalkylalkyl groups having 4 to 30 carbon atoms. Examples of the linear or branched chain alkyl group include the same groups as those exemplified for the linear or branched alkyl group represented by R 101 and the like.
  • a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms means a saturated monocyclic or saturated polycyclic alkyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a cycloalkyl ring such as a monocyclic hydrocarbon ring such as a cyclohexyl ring or a crosslinked hydrocarbon ring such as a norbornan ring, or a hydrogen atom from a cycloalkyl ring.
  • Examples thereof include monocyclic hydrocarbon groups and crosslinked hydrocarbon ring groups, which are groups in which one or more hydrogen atoms in the ring of the group excluding one are substituted with an aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
  • Examples of the monocyclic hydrocarbon group include a cyclopropyl group, a cyclobutyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a cycloheptyl group, a cyclooctyl group, a cyclononyl group, a cyclodecyl group, a methylcyclopentyl group, a methylcyclohexyl group, a dimethylcyclohexyl group and a trimethyl group.
  • Examples thereof include a cyclohexyl group, a tetramethylcyclohexyl group, a pentamethylcyclohexyl group, an ethylcyclohexyl group and a methylcycloheptyl group.
  • Examples of the crosslinked hydrocarbon ring group include a bicyclo [2.1.1] hexyl group, a bicyclo [2.2.1] heptyl group, a bicyclo [2.2.2] octyl group, and a bicyclo [4.3.1].
  • cycloalkylalkyl group having 4 to 30 carbon atoms a group obtained by combining the cycloalkyl group and the linear or branched chain alkyl group can be used.
  • one or more hydrogen atoms in a linear or branched chain alkyl group is one of a group substituted with the cycloalkyl group, or a methylene group in a linear or branched chain alkyl group.
  • a group in which two or more are substituted with a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the cycloalkyl group can be mentioned.
  • examples of the group having 4 to 30 carbon atoms in which the hydrogen atom of the linear or branched chain alkyl group is substituted with the cycloalkyl group include a cyclopropylmethyl group, a cyclobutylmethyl group, and a cyclopentylmethyl.
  • Examples of the alkyl group having a substituent used for X 1 and the like include a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms in the alkyl group are substituted with a substituent.
  • Examples of the aryl group represented by R 104 , R 204 , R 304 , and R 404 include those having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, and for example, a hydrogen atom from an aromatic ring. It can be a group in which one is removed or a group in which a hydrogen atom in an aromatic ring contained in the group is substituted with an aliphatic hydrocarbon group. More specifically, the aryl group is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a monocyclic aromatic ring or a group in which a hydrogen atom in the aromatic ring contained in the group is substituted with an aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
  • a monocyclic aromatic hydrocarbon group a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a condensed aromatic ring in which a monocyclic aromatic ring is condensed, or a group in which a hydrogen atom in the aromatic ring contained in the group is substituted with an aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group substituting the hydrogen atom in the aromatic ring one having 1 to 30 carbon atoms can be used, and a linear or branched chain alkyl having 1 to 30 carbon atoms can be used. Examples thereof include a group, an alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms, and a cycloalkylalkyl group having 4 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the linear or branched chain alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms the cycloalkyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms, and the cycloalkylalkyl group having 4 to 30 carbon atoms used in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
  • X 1 and the like used as an alkyl group.
  • alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms examples include a vinyl group, a 2-propenyl group, a 3-butenyl group, a 2-butenyl group, a 4-pentenyl group, a 3-pentenyl group, a 2-hexenyl group and a 3-.
  • the monocyclic aromatic hydrocarbon group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and specifically, a phenyl group, an o-tolyl group, an m-tolyl group, a p-tolyl group, and a 2,4-xylyl group. , P-cumenyl group, mesityl group and the like.
  • the fused ring aromatic hydrocarbon group preferably has 10 to 20 carbon atoms, and specifically, a 1-naphthyl group, a 2-naphthyl group, a 1-anthryl group, a 2-anthrill group, and a 5-anthryl group.
  • 1-phenanthryl group 9-phenanthryl group, 1-acenaphthyl group, 2-azulenyl group, 1-pyrenyl group, 2-triphenylel group, 1-pyrenyl group, 2-pyrenyl group, 1-perylenyl group, 2-perylenyl group , 3-Perylenyl group, 2-Trefenirenyl group, 2-Indenyl group, 1-Acenaphthylenyl group, 2-Naphthalenyl group, 2-Pentasenyl group and the like.
  • the ring-assembled aromatic hydrocarbon group preferably has 12 to 20 carbon atoms, and specifically, an o-biphenylyl group, an m-biphenylyl group, a p-biphenylyl group, a terphenylyl group, and 7- (2-naphthyl). ) -2-Naphtyl group and the like.
  • Examples of the substituted aryl group represented by R 104 or the like include a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms of the above aryl group are substituted with a substituent.
  • Examples of the phenyl group which may have a substituent represented by X 1 and X 2 include a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms in the phenyl group are substituted with a substituent.
  • Alkoxy groups represented by X 1 and X 2 include -O- at the end of a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group such as a linear or branched chain alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, or cycloalkylalkyl group.
  • a group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms bonded to the group can be used.
  • Straight or branched chain alkyl group constituting the alkoxy group represented by X 1 and X 2 a cycloalkyl group, a cycloalkylalkyl group, as examples of the alkyl group represented by X 1 and X 2
  • linear or branched chain alkyl groups, cycloalkyl groups, and cycloalkylalkyl groups can be mentioned, respectively.
  • alkoxy group represented by X 1 and X 2 include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, an n-propoxy group, an isopropoxy group, and an n-butoxy group.
  • substituted alkoxy group represented by X 1 and X 2 include a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms in the above alkoxy groups are substituted with a substituent.
  • It has a linear or branched alkyl group having a substituent used for R 101 etc., an aryl group having a substituent used for R 104 etc., and a substituent used for X 1 etc.
  • substituent that replaces the hydrogen atom in the group used for the alkyl group and the alkoxy group include a halogen atom, a nitro group, a cyano group, a hydroxyl group, an amino group, a carboxyl group, a methacryloyl group, an acryloyl group, an epoxy group and a vinyl group. , Vinyl ether group, mercapto group or group substituted with isocyanate group.
  • the amino group that replaces the hydrogen atom in the group represented by R 101 and the like and X 1 and the like may be any of a primary amino group, a secondary amino group and a tertiary amino group.
  • the secondary amino group and the tertiary amino group one or two hydrogen atoms of the primary amino group (-NH 2 ) are substituted with a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, respectively. Can be mentioned.
  • the hydrocarbon group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms includes a linear or branched chain alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, and a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • a group and an aliphatic hydrocarbon group such as a cycloalkylalkyl group having 4 to 30 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, an aromatic hydrocarbon group such as an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, and the like. Can be mentioned.
  • Examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms used in the above aliphatic hydrocarbon group, in the aryl group used in R 104 or the like, mentioned as the aliphatic hydrocarbon group substituting for a hydrogen atom in the aromatic ring Can be used.
  • the aryl group used as the aromatic hydrocarbon group can be the same as the aryl group used for R 104 and the like.
  • the arylalkyl group used as the aromatic hydrocarbon group means a group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms in which the hydrogen atom of the alkyl group is substituted with the aryl group.
  • the alkyl group constituting the arylalkyl group can be the same as that used as the alkyl group used for X 1 and the like.
  • the aryl group constituting the arylalkyl group can be the same as the aryl group used for R 104 and the like.
  • arylalkyl group examples include a benzyl group, an ⁇ -methylbenzyl group, an ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylbenzyl group, a phenylethyl group, a naphthylpropyl group and the like.
  • Examples of the secondary amino group include an N-methylamino group, an N-ethylamino group, an Nn-butylamino group and the like.
  • Examples of the tertiary amino group include N, N-dimethylamino group, N, N-diethylamino group, N, N-di-n-butylamino group, N, N-ethylphenyl and the like.
  • the specification of the predetermined number of carbon atoms including the carbon atom of the substituent shall be satisfied.
  • the number of carbon atoms 1 to 30 means the number of carbon atoms after the hydrogen atom has been substituted. It does not refer to the number of carbon atoms in the group before the hydrogen atom is replaced.
  • the specific pyrromethene compound it is preferable to use a complex compound satisfying 1 or 2 or more of the following constitutions as the formula (I), the formula (I-1) or the (I-2), which is excellent in light absorption and foreign matter. It is preferable because a cured product having a small amount of water can be obtained more easily. Any or more of any of the preferred configurations described below can be combined.
  • R 101 , R 103 , R 105 , R 107 , and formula (I-1) of the formula (I) are obtained from the viewpoint of easy availability of the compound and the more easily obtained a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances.
  • R 301 , R 303 , R 305 , R 307 , R 401 , R 403 , R 405, and R 407 have substituents.
  • Alkyl groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms may be preferable, alkyl groups having 1 to 15 carbon atoms may have substituents, and alkyl groups may have substituents.
  • Alkyl groups of 1 to 8 are more preferable, alkyl groups having 1 to 3 carbon atoms which may have a substituent are particularly preferable, and methyl group or ethyl group which may have a substituent is particularly preferable.
  • the methyl group, which may have a substituent, is most preferable.
  • Linear or branched alkyl groups represented as 203 , R 205 , R 207 , and (I-2) R 301 , R 303 , R 305 , R 307 , R 401 , R 403 , R 405 and R 407. Is also preferably unsubstituted.
  • the linear or branched alkyl group represented by R 302 , R 306 , R 402 , and R 406 of the formula (I-2) is preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms. More preferably, the number of carbon atoms is further preferably 2 to 10, the number of carbon atoms is even more preferably 3 to 10, and the number of carbon atoms is particularly preferably 3 to 8.
  • the chain or branched chain alkyl group is preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group. This is because a cured product having excellent availability and light absorption of the compound and few foreign substances can be obtained more easily.
  • the alkyl groups represented by R 102 and R 106 of the formula (I), R 202 and R 206 of the formula (I-1), and R 302 , R 306 , R 402 and R 406 of the formula (I-2) are A branched chain is preferable from the viewpoint of dispersion stability of the composition.
  • the fact that R 102 and R 106 of the formula (I) and R 202 and R 206 of the formula (I-1) are linear means that a cured product having excellent compound availability and light absorption and few foreign substances can be obtained. It is preferable because it can be obtained more easily.
  • R 104 of formula (I), R 204 of formula (I-1), and (I-2) from the viewpoint that a cured product having excellent availability of compounds and light absorption and few foreign substances can be obtained more easily.
  • R 304 and R 404 have a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, or a substituent having 6 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • Aryl groups may be mentioned.
  • the upper limit of the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group and the aryl group is preferably 20 or less, and more preferably 10 or less.
  • R 104 of the formula (I), R 204 of the formula (I-1), and R 304 and R 404 of the formula (I-2) are aryl groups which may have a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Is preferable. This is because a cured product having excellent availability and light absorption of the compound and few foreign substances can be obtained more easily. Further, as the aryl group represented by R 104 of the formula (I), R 204 of the formula (I-1), and R 304 and R 404 of the formula (I-2), the availability of the compound and the light absorption property are improved.
  • a monocyclic aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferable from the viewpoint that an excellent cured product with few foreign substances can be obtained more easily, and the group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the monocyclic aromatic ring or the hydrogen contained in the group thereof.
  • a group in which an atom is substituted with an alkyl group is particularly preferable, and a group in which one hydrogen atom is removed from a monocyclic aromatic ring is particularly preferable.
  • a phenyl group, a tolyl group, a xsilyl group, and an ethylphenyl group are preferable, and a phenyl group is most preferable.
  • R 204 is preferably an aryl group that may have a substituent, and among them, a phenyl group that is unsubstituted or substituted with a substituted amino group. Is preferable.
  • the substituted amino group for substituting the hydrogen atom in the phenyl group used in R 204 is preferably a tertiary amino group, and in particular, two hydrogen atoms of the amino group are used.
  • a group substituted with a linear or branched chain alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or two hydrogen atoms of an amino group are linear or branched chain alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • R 304 and R 404 are hydrogen atoms. This is because the specific pyrromethene compound has excellent dispersion stability in the composition.
  • X 1 and the like are preferably halogen atoms, and particularly preferably fluorine atoms, from the viewpoints of easy availability of the compound and easy availability of a cured product with few foreign substances.
  • M 3 is particularly preferably Zn, Cu, Ni or Co from the viewpoint of easy availability, light absorption and dispersion stability, and Zn or Co is preferable. Especially preferable, Co is the most preferable.
  • the compound represented by the formula (I-2) is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of easy production of a cured product having a small amount of foreign matter and excellent light absorption. ..
  • the compound represented by the formula (I-2) satisfies the following requirements (a), requirement (b), requirement (c) or requirement (d), and the requirement (a) It is preferable that at least 2 or more of the requirements (d) are satisfied, it is more preferable that at least 3 or more of the requirements (a) to (d) are satisfied, and it is most preferable that all of the requirements (a) to (d) are satisfied.
  • R 302 and R 306 and R 402 and R 406 are linear or branched alkyl groups which may independently have a substituent having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • Requirement (c) R 304 and R 404 are hydrogen atoms.
  • Requirement (d) M 3 is Co.
  • Examples of the compound represented by the general formula (I-1) include the following exemplified compounds (1) to (16).
  • Examples of the compound represented by the general formula (I-2) include the following exemplified compounds (17) to (42).
  • the method for producing the specific pyrromethene compound is not particularly limited, but for example, as a method for synthesizing a compound having a pyrromethene structure, the method described in JP-A-2011-174036 can be used, and a dimer of the specific pyrromethene compound can be used. As the synthesis method, the method described in JP-A-2006-189751 can be used.
  • the specific pyrromethene compound preferably has a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more and less than 550 nm. Having a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more and less than 550 nm can mean that the maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 380 nm or more and 780 nm or less is included in 450 nm or more and less than 550 nm.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength of the specific pyrromethene compound is preferably 470 nm or more and 530 nm or less, more preferably 480 nm or more and 510 nm or less, and more preferably 485 nm or more and 500 nm or less. This is because it is easy to make the color purity of blue light and green light excellent, and further, the decrease in color intensity is small. Further, it is possible to more effectively obtain the effect that a cured product having less foreign matter and excellent light absorption can be obtained.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength of a dye such as a specific pyrromethene compound can be measured by the following method. (1) Dissolve the dye in a solvent to prepare a dye solution. (2) The dye solution is filled in a quartz cell (optical path length 10 mm, thickness 1.25 mm), and the transmittance is measured using a spectrophotometer (for example, a visible ultraviolet absorptiometer V-670 manufactured by JASCO Corporation). There is no problem with the concentration of the dye solution as long as the maximum absorption wavelength can be confirmed accurately. For example, the transmittance at the wavelength that becomes the maximum absorption wavelength is about 5% (for example, 3% or more and 7% or less). Can be adjusted to be.
  • the solvent there is no problem as long as the dye can be dissolved, the shift of the maximum absorption wavelength is small, and the transmission spectrum of each dye can be measured accurately.
  • chloroform can be used.
  • another solvent can be used.
  • the transmission spectrum of the dye solution the transmission spectrum of the solvent alone is measured in advance, and the transmission spectrum of the solvent is subtracted from the transmission spectrum of the dye solution to correct the transmission spectrum.
  • the composition of the present invention contains one or more specific pyrromethene compounds.
  • the content of the specific pyrromethene compound is not a problem as long as it contains a small amount of foreign matter and can obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption, and is appropriately set according to the use of the above composition and the like.
  • the solid content of the composition can be 0.01 part by mass or more and 20 parts by mass or less, more preferably 0.01 part by mass or more and 5 parts by mass or less, and particularly 0. .Preferably 1 part by mass or more and 5 parts by mass or less. When the content is in the above range, there are few foreign substances, and the cured product obtained by using the above composition has excellent light absorption.
  • the solid content includes all components other than the solvent.
  • the content of the specific pyrromethene compound means the total content of the specific pyrromethene compound. Unless otherwise specified in the present specification, the content is based on mass.
  • the content of the specific pyrromethene compound is preferably 0.002 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 0.002 parts by mass or more and 4 parts by mass or less in 100 parts by mass of the composition. , 0.02 parts by mass or more and preferably 4 parts by mass or less. This is because the effect of obtaining a cured product having few foreign substances and excellent light absorption can be effectively exhibited, and it becomes easy to obtain an optical filter having excellent light absorption.
  • the content of the specific pyrromethene compound is 0.002% by mass in 100 parts by mass of the composition from the viewpoint that the effect of obtaining a cured product having few foreign substances and excellent light absorption can be effectively exhibited. It is preferably 1 part or more and 1.8 parts by mass or less.
  • the composition of the present invention contains a cationically polymerizable component.
  • the cationically polymerizable component is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound that causes a polymerization reaction or a cross-linking reaction with an acid generated from an acid generator.
  • examples of such cationically polymerizable components include cyclic ether compounds such as epoxy compounds and oxetane compounds, cyclic lactone compounds, cyclic acetal compounds, cyclic thioether compounds, spiroorthoester compounds, and vinyl ether compounds.
  • the cationically polymerizable component one or more selected from these can be used. Even if it has a cationically polymerizable group such as an epoxy group, those corresponding to a dye or an acid generator shall correspond to a dye or an acid generator, respectively, and are not included in the cationically polymerizable component.
  • a cyclic ether compound as the cationically polymerizable component from the viewpoint that a composition capable of producing a cured product having more excellent light absorption can be obtained more easily.
  • the content of the cyclic ether compound is preferably 50 parts by mass or more, more preferably 70 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 90 parts by mass or more in 100 parts by mass of the cationically polymerizable component. It is particularly preferable that the amount is 95 parts by mass or more. This is because it becomes easier to produce a cured product having excellent light absorption.
  • an epoxy compound and an oxetane compound are preferable, and an epoxy compound is particularly preferable. This is because the inclusion of the epoxy compound makes it easier to produce a cured product having excellent light absorption.
  • the epoxy compound shall include all compounds containing an epoxy group.
  • a compound containing both an epoxy group and an oxetane group corresponds to an epoxy compound.
  • examples of such an epoxy compound include aromatic epoxy compounds, alicyclic epoxy compounds, and aliphatic epoxy compounds.
  • the aromatic epoxy compound has an aromatic ring and an epoxy group, and does not have a cycloalkene oxide structure.
  • an aromatic epoxy compound for example, a polyhydric phenol having at least one aromatic ring or a polyglycidyl ether of an alkylene oxide adduct thereof, for example, bisphenol A, bisphenol F, or alkylene oxide is added thereto.
  • examples thereof include glycidyl ether of the compound, epoxy novolac resin (phenol novolac type epoxy compound), and glycidyl ether of an aromatic compound having two or more phenolic hydroxyl groups such as resorcinol, hydroquinone, and catechol.
  • polyglycidyl ether of an aromatic compound having two or more alcoholic hydroxyl groups such as benzenedimethanol, benzenediethanol, and benzenedibutanol; many having two or more carboxylic acids such as phthalic acid, terephthalic acid, and trimellitic acid.
  • Polyglycidyl esters of basic acid aromatic compounds glycidyl esters of benzoic acids such as benzoic acid, toluic acid and naphthoic acid; epoxidized products of styrene oxide or divinylbenzene and the like.
  • polyglycidyl ethers of phenols polyglycidyl ethers of aromatic compounds having two or more alcoholic hydroxyl groups
  • polyglycidyl ethers of polyhydric phenols polyglycidyl esters of benzoic acids and polyglycidyl esters of polybasic acids
  • polyglycidyl ether, which is a polyhydric phenol is preferable, and a compound represented by the following formula (1) is preferable. This is because the inclusion of such a compound makes it easy to obtain a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption.
  • ma in the formula (1) is preferably a number such that the epoxy equivalent of the compound represented by the formula (1) is 1200 or less, and more preferably 1000 or less.
  • the number is more preferably 500 or less, more preferably 300 or less, and may be 200 or less.
  • R 1a and R 1b independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and ma represents an integer of 0 or more
  • the content of the aromatic epoxy compound may be 0 parts by mass in a total of 100 parts by mass of the cationically polymerizable component, but when it is contained, it is 60 parts by mass in a total of 100 parts by mass of the cationically polymerizable component. It is preferably 5 parts by mass or more and 45 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 10 parts by mass or more and 40 parts by mass or less. This is because it becomes easier to produce a cured product having excellent light absorption within this range.
  • the preferable amount of the polyfunctional aromatic epoxy compound is the same as the amount mentioned above as the amount of the above aromatic epoxy compound. The amount can be mentioned.
  • the alicyclic epoxy compound is a compound having a cycloalkene oxide structure.
  • the cycloalkene oxide structure is obtained by epoxidizing a cyclohexene ring-containing compound and a cyclopentene ring-containing compound with an oxidizing agent, respectively.
  • the aliphatic ring and the epoxy ring have a ring structure. It is a structure that shares a part.
  • a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a cycloalkane having such a cycloalkene oxide structure may be referred to as an epoxycycloalkyl group.
  • Examples of the alicyclic epoxy compound include compounds having two or more epoxycycloalkyl groups, such as the compound represented by the following general formula (2). This is because the inclusion of such a compound makes it easy to form a composition with few foreign substances and has excellent curability such that the curing reaction can easily proceed. In addition, it becomes easier to produce a cured product having excellent light absorption.
  • X 5 represents a divalent linking group having a direct bond or one or more atoms.
  • linking group represented by X 5 examples include a divalent hydrocarbon group, an alkenylene group in which part or all of the carbon-carbon double bond is epoxidized, a carbonyl group, an ether bond, an ester bond, and a carbonate group. , Amid group, and a group in which a plurality of these are linked.
  • divalent hydrocarbon group examples include a linear or branched alkylene group having a cycloalkyl ring and having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • linear or branched alkylene group examples include a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms minus one hydrogen atom.
  • a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms a linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent used for R 101 in the above formula (I) may be used. it can. More specifically, the linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms includes a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl.
  • amyl group isoamyl group, t-amyl group, hexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, isooctyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, t-octyl group, nonyl group, isononyl group, decyl group, isodecyl group, undecyl group, Examples thereof include a dodecyl group, a tetradecyl group, a hexadecyl group, an octadecyl group, and an icosyl group.
  • Examples of the linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms as the divalent hydrocarbon group include a methylene group, a methylmethylene group, a dimethylmethylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a trimethylene group and the like. Can be done.
  • Examples of the alkylene group having a cycloalkyl ring having 1 to 30 carbon atoms include a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the alkyl group having a cycloalkyl ring.
  • Examples of the alkyl group having a cycloalkyl ring include a cycloalkyl group and a cycloalkylalkyl group from which one hydrogen atom has been removed.
  • a cycloalkyl group and a cycloalkylalkyl group a group similar to the cycloalkyl group and the cycloalkylalkyl group used for X 1 and the like described in the section of "1. Pyrromethene compound" can be used.
  • the alkenylene group in the alkenylene group in which a part or all of the carbon-carbon double bond is epoxidized (hereinafter, may be referred to as "epoxidized alkenylene group”) is a straight chain having 2 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • epoxidized alkenylene group a straight chain having 2 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the alkylene group the linear or branched alkylene group having a cycloalkyl ring and having 1 to 30 carbon atoms can be used.
  • alkenylene group examples include a linear chain having 2 to 8 carbon atoms such as a vinylene group, a propenylene group, a 1-butenylene group, a 2-butenylene group, a butadienylene group, a pentenylene group, a hexenylene group, a heptenylene group and an octenylene group.
  • a branched alkenylene group and the like can be mentioned.
  • X 5 is preferably a linking group, preferably a divalent hydrocarbon group, an ester bond, or a group in which a plurality of these are linked, and in particular, a divalent hydrocarbon group and an ester bond. Is preferably a linked group. This is because the use of such a compound makes it easier for the composition to produce a cured product having excellent light absorption.
  • the divalent hydrocarbon group used for X 5 is preferably an alkylene group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms.
  • it is an alkylene group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and one hydrogen atom is removed from the linear alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. It is more preferably an alkylene group, and particularly preferably an alkylene group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a linear alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. This is because when the number of carbon atoms is within the above range, a cured product having less foreign substances can be obtained as the composition, and the cured product having excellent light absorption can be more easily produced.
  • 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl-3,4-epoxycyclohexanecarboxylate, 3,4-epoxy-1-methylcyclohexyl-3,4-epoxy-1-methylhexanecarboxylate and the like are preferable.
  • the composition can be obtained as a cured product having less foreign substances, and can be more easily produced as a cured product having excellent light absorption.
  • Examples of commercially available products that can be suitably used as the alicyclic epoxy compound include those described in Japanese Patent No. 6103653.
  • the content of the alicyclic epoxy compound is not limited as long as a cured product having few foreign substances can be obtained and a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption can be obtained. , 20 parts by mass or more, more preferably 30 parts by mass or more and 95 parts by mass or less, and 40 parts by mass or more and 90 parts by mass or less in the total of 100 parts by mass of the cationically polymerizable component. More preferably, it is 50 parts by mass or more and 90 parts by mass or less. This is because a cured product with few foreign substances can be obtained, and it becomes easy to obtain a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption.
  • the composition of the present invention contains a polyfunctional alicyclic epoxy compound
  • the preferable amount of the polyfunctional alicyclic epoxy compound is the same as the amount mentioned above as the amount of the above alicyclic epoxy compound. The amount of.
  • Aliphatic Epoxy Compound The above-mentioned aliphatic epoxy resin has an epoxy group and does not contain a cycloalkene oxide structure and an aromatic ring.
  • examples of such an aliphatic epoxy compound include polyglycidyl ether of an aliphatic polyvalent alcohol or an alkylene oxide adduct thereof; polyglycidyl ester of an aliphatic long-chain polybasic acid; and synthesized by vinyl polymerization of glycidyl acrylate or glycidyl methacrylate.
  • Homopolymers examples thereof include copolymers synthesized by vinyl polymerization of glycidyl acrylate or glycidyl methacrylate and other vinyl monomers.
  • Typical compounds include glycidyl ethers of polyhydric alcohols such as diglycidyl ethers of diols, triglycidyl ethers of glycerin, triglycidyl ethers of trimethylolpropane, tetraglycidyl ethers of sorbitol, and hexaglycidyl ethers of dipentaerythritol, and propylene.
  • polyhydric alcohols such as diglycidyl ethers of diols, triglycidyl ethers of glycerin, triglycidyl ethers of trimethylolpropane, tetraglycidyl ethers of sorbitol, and hexaglycidyl ethers of dipentaerythritol, and propylene.
  • Polyglycidyl ether which is a polyether polyol obtained by adding one or more alkylene oxides to aliphatic polyhydric alcohols such as glycol, trimethylolpropane, and glycerin, and diglycidyl ester of aliphatic long-chain dibasic acid. Can be mentioned. Further, monoglycidyl ether of aliphatic higher alcohol, phenol, cresol, butylphenol, or monoglycidyl ether of polyether alcohol obtained by adding alkylene oxide to these, glycidyl ester of higher fatty acid, epoxidized soybean oil, epoxy steer. Examples thereof include octyl acid, butyl epoxy stearate and epoxidized polybutadiene.
  • aliphatic epoxy compound a hydrogenated additive of an aromatic epoxy compound such as hydrogenated bisphenol A diglycidyl ether can also be used.
  • aromatic epoxy compound such as hydrogenated bisphenol A diglycidyl ether
  • examples of the aliphatic epoxy compound include cycloalkyl derived from an epoxycycloalkyl ring such as 1,2-epoxy-4- (2-oxylanyl) cyclohexane adduct of 2,2-bis (hydroxymethyl) -1-butanol.
  • a compound having a structure in which an oxylanyl group is directly bonded to the ring by a single bond as a constituent unit and a structure in which the epoxy groups of the epoxycycloalkyl ring are polymerized as a main chain structure can also be used.
  • aliphatic epoxy compound a compound represented by the following general formula (4-1) or formula (4-2) can be preferably used. This is because by using the above compound, a cured product having few foreign substances can be easily obtained as the above composition.
  • Y 5 is one or two or more divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group or a methylene group of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is replaced by -O- in the conditions between oxygen atoms not adjacent to each other Indicates a group.
  • R 1 is a group obtained by removing p hydroxyl groups (-OH) from a p-valent alcohol, and p and q each represent an integer of 1 or more. When p is 2 or more, the p structural units q may be the same or different. )
  • Equation (4-1) will be described first.
  • Examples of the divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group represented by Y 5 include a linear or branched alkylene group having a cycloalkyl ring and having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. Further, the group represented by Y 5 is one or two or more methylene groups in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a group together an oxygen atom is replaced by -O- under conditions nonadjacent Good. Accordingly, the groups represented by Y 5 is one or two or more methylene groups of the alkylene group of the 1 to 30 carbon atoms may be a group substituted with a -O-.
  • the linear or branched alkylene group represented by Y 5 or the alkylene group having a cycloalkyl ring having 1 to 30 carbon atoms includes the linear or branched carbon represented by X 5 or a carbon having a cycloalkyl ring.
  • a group similar to the alkylene group having 1 to 30 atoms can be used.
  • Y 5 is preferably a branched group.
  • Y 5 is a linear or branched alkylene group having a cycloalkyl ring and having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, or a group in which the methylene group in the alkylene group is substituted with —O—.
  • Y 5 is a linear or branched alkylene group having a cycloalkyl ring and having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, or a group in which the methylene group in the alkylene group is substituted with —O—.
  • Is preferable and it is more preferable that it is a linear or branched alkylene group having a cycloalkyl ring and having 3 to 28 carbon atoms, or a group in which the methylene group in the alkylene group is substituted with —O—, and particularly preferably.
  • It is preferably a linear or branched alkylene group having a cycloalkyl ring and having 4 to 26 carbon atoms, or a group in which the methylene group in the alkylene group is substituted with —O—.
  • Y 5 is a linear or branched alkylene group and the methylene group is not replaced by —O—, the number of carbon atoms thereof is preferably 4 to 10.
  • Y 5 is a linear or branched group in which the methylene group in the alkylene group is replaced with —O—, Y 5 has 10 to 26 carbon atoms and is both from polyalkylene glycol.
  • the group has a structure excluding the hydroxyl groups at the ends, and among them, the group has a carbon atom number of 10 to 26 and has a structure obtained by removing the hydroxyl groups at both ends from polyethylene glycol or polypropylene glycol.
  • Y 5 is an alkylene group having a cycloalkyl ring
  • Y 5 is preferably an alkylene group having 13 to 20 carbon atoms and having two cycloalkyl rings, and in particular, the following general formula ( It is preferably a group represented by 3).
  • Y 5 When Y 5 has the above-mentioned structure, it becomes easier to obtain a cured product having less foreign matter and to produce a cured product having excellent light absorption, and also to obtain a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption. This is because a cured product having good adhesion to the base material can be obtained.
  • R 5a and R 5b represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and * represents a bond site.
  • diglycidyl ether compound of the aliphatic diol compound represented by the general formula (4-1) include poly such as diethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, dipropylene glycol diglycidyl ether, and tripropylene glycol diglycidyl ether.
  • Diglycidyl ether of alkylene glycol ethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, propylene glycol diglycidyl ether, cyclohexanedimethylol diglycidyl ether, neopentyl glycol diglycidyl ether, 1,4-butanediol diglycidyl ether, 1,6-hexanediol Examples thereof include diglycidyl ether and 1,9-nonanediol diglycidyl ether.
  • Examples of Y 5 having a cycloalkyl ring include diglycidyl etherified product of hydrogenated bisphenol diol, hydrogenated bisphenol A diglycidyl ether, hydrogenated bisphenol AF diglycidyl ether, and hydrogenated bisphenol B diglycidyl ether.
  • Examples thereof include supplemented bisphenol P diglycidyl ether, hydrogenated bisphenol TMC diglycidyl ether, hydrogenated bisphenol Z diglycidyl ether, bis [4- (glycidyloxy) cyclohexyl] ether, 4,4'-bicyclohexanol diglycidyl ether and the like.
  • the group obtained by removing p hydroxyl groups (-OH) from the p-valent alcohol represented by R 1 is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
  • a group obtained by removing p hydroxyl groups (-OH) from a p-valent alcohol represented by R 1 a carbon atom can be obtained from the viewpoint of easy availability and good adhesion to a substrate.
  • An aliphatic hydrocarbon group having a number of 1 to 30 is preferably mentioned.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms the number of carbon atoms listed as the hydrocarbon group used for the amino group substituting the hydrogen atom in the group described in the above section "1. Pyromethene compound".
  • Aliphatic hydrocarbon groups such as 1 to 30 alkyl groups, 2 to 30 carbon atoms alkenyl groups, 3 to 30 carbon atoms cycloalkyl groups or 4 to 30 carbon atoms cycloalkylalkyl groups, or these Examples thereof include a group obtained by removing p-1 hydrogen atoms from each of the groups in which the methylene group of the group is substituted by a divalent group selected from the following group 1 under the condition that the oxygen atoms are not adjacent to each other.
  • a group obtained by removing p hydroxyl groups (-OH) from a p-valent alcohol represented by R 1 has a carbon number of carbons, because a cured product having good availability and adhesion to a base material can be obtained.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group 1 to 10 or the methylene group of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is substituted with a divalent group selected from the following group 1 under the condition that the oxygen atoms are not adjacent to each other. More specifically, an alkyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, a cycloalkylalkyl group having 4 to 10 carbon atoms, or these.
  • the methylene group of the group is a group obtained by removing p-1 hydrogen atoms from a group substituted under the condition that oxygen atoms are not adjacent to each other by a divalent group selected from the following group 1.
  • a divalent group selected from the following group 1 an alkyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms or a methylene group in the alkyl group is selected from the following group 1 from the viewpoint that a cured product having good availability and adhesion to a base material can be obtained.
  • a group substituted with a divalent group under the condition that the oxygen atoms are not adjacent to each other is preferable, an alkyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms is particularly preferable, and a branched alkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms is most preferable.
  • the number of carbon atoms specified for a group in which the methylene group in the group having a predetermined number of carbon atoms is replaced with a divalent group shall be the same as the number of carbon atoms contained in the group before the substitution. Is preferable. Therefore, the specification of the number of carbon atoms of a group in which the methylene group in the hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is replaced with a divalent group is preferably 1 to 20.
  • R 6 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms used in R 6 is a group similar to the linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms used in R 101 in the above general formula (I). Can be mentioned.
  • the compound represented by the formula (4-2) can be obtained as a 1,2-epoxy-4W- (2-oxylanyl) cyclohexane adduct to obtain a cured product having good availability or adhesion to a substrate.
  • the p-valent alcohols that give R 1 include ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, 1,4-butanediol, 1,2-butanediol, neopentyl glycol, 1,6-hexanediol, 1, 2-octanediol, 1,8-octanediol, isoprene glycol, 3-methyl-1,5-pentanediol, 1,4-cyclohexanedimethanol, sorbite, hydrogenated bisphenol A, hydrogenated bisphenol F, dimerdiol, etc.
  • Divalent alcohol glycerin, trioxyisobutane, 1,2,3-butanetriol, 1,2,3-pentantriol, 2-methyl-1,2,3-propanetriol, 2-methyl-2,3,4 -Butantriol, 2-ethyl-1,2,3-butantriol, 2,3,4-pentantriol, 2,3,4-hexanetriol, 4-propyl-3,4,5-heptanetriol, 2, Trihydric alcohols such as 4-dimethyl-2,3,4-pentantriol, pentamethylglycerin, 1,2,4-butantriol, 1,2,4-pentantriol, trimethylolethane, trimethylrolpropane, pentaerythritol , Diglycerin, 1,2,3,4-pentantetrol, 2,3,4,5-hexanetetrol, 1,2,4,5-pentantetrol, 1,3,4,5-hexanete Examples thereof include tetravalent alcohols such as trawl, pentavalent alcohols such as triglycerin, ad
  • p is an integer of 1 or more and 10 or less because it is possible to obtain a cured product having good availability of the compound represented by the formula (4-2) and adhesion to the base material.
  • An integer of 8 or more is more preferable, an integer of 3 or more and 6 or less is more preferable, and an integer of 3 or more and 4 or less is most preferable.
  • q is preferably an integer of 1 or more and 30 or less.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the compound represented by the above formula (4-2) is preferably more than 1000 and 5000 or less, more preferably 1500 or more and 4000 or less, and particularly 2000 or more and 3000 or less. Is preferable.
  • the above composition can easily obtain a cured product having good adhesion to the base material. Further, when the compound of the formula (4-2) is used, a cured product having less foreign matter and excellent light absorption can be easily formed.
  • the molecular weight can be a weight average molecular weight. Further, for such measurement of the weight average molecular weight, the measurement conditions of the weight average molecular weight (Mw) when the compound is a polymer, which will be described later, can be used.
  • the epoxy equivalent of the compound represented by the above formula (4-2) may be one that has few foreign substances and can form a cured product having excellent light absorption, but is 100 or more and 500. It is preferably 150 or more and 200 or less. This is because when the epoxy equivalent is in the above range, the composition has few foreign substances and facilitates the formation of a cured product having excellent light absorption.
  • the compound represented by the formula (4-2) is selected from the viewpoint that a cured product having good availability or adhesion to the substrate can be obtained.
  • An oxylanyl group is directly attached to a cycloalkyl ring derived from an epoxycycloalkyl ring such as 1,2-epoxy-4- (2-oxylanyl) cyclohexane adduct of 2,2-bis (hydroxymethyl) -1-butanol by a single bond.
  • a compound having a bonded structure as a constituent unit and having a structure in which epoxy groups of an epoxycycloalkyl ring are polymerized as a main chain structure can be preferably mentioned.
  • the content of the aliphatic epoxy compound can be, for example, 5 parts by mass or more, preferably 10 parts by mass or more and 70 parts by mass or less, and 15 parts by mass in a total of 100 parts by mass of the cationically polymerizable component. It is more preferably 20 parts by mass or more and 60 parts by mass or less, particularly preferably 20 parts by mass or more and 50 parts by mass or less, and most preferably 20 parts by mass or more and 45 parts by mass or less. This is because a cured product with few foreign substances can be obtained, and it becomes easy to obtain a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption.
  • the preferable amount of the polyfunctional aliphatic epoxy compound is the same as the amount mentioned above as the amount of the above-mentioned aliphatic epoxy compound. Can be mentioned.
  • the cationically polymerizable component preferably contains at least one of an aliphatic epoxy compound and an alicyclic epoxy compound. This is because a cured product with few foreign substances can be obtained, and it becomes easier to obtain a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption.
  • the cationically polymerizable component contains at least one of the aliphatic epoxy compound and the alicyclic epoxy compound
  • the total amount of the aliphatic epoxy compound and the alicyclic epoxy compound is 100 parts by mass in total of the cationically polymerizable component. Among them, 50 parts by mass or more is preferable, 60 parts by mass or more is more preferable, 70 parts by mass or more is particularly preferable, and 80 parts by mass or more is most preferable.
  • the total amount of the aliphatic epoxy compound and the alicyclic epoxy compound may be 100 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of the cationically polymerizable component.
  • aromatic and aliphatic epoxy compounds examples include those described in Japanese Patent No. 6103653.
  • the oxetane compound has an oxetane ring and does not contain an epoxy group.
  • examples of such an oxetane compound include 3-ethyl-3-hydroxymethyloxetane, 3- (meth) allyloxymethyl-3-ethyloxetane, (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethoxy) methylbenzene, and 4-fluoro.
  • the number of oxetane rings contained in the oxetane compound may be 1 or more, preferably 1 or more and 5 or less, and preferably 1 or more and 3 or less. This is because it becomes easy to obtain a composition capable of producing a cured product having more excellent curing sensitivity and excellent light absorption.
  • the content of the oxetane compound is not limited as long as it is easy to form a cured product with few foreign substances and a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption can be obtained. , 60 parts by mass or less, preferably 5 parts by mass or more and 50 parts by mass or less, and 10 parts by mass or more and 40 parts by mass or less in the total of 100 parts by mass of the cationically polymerizable component. preferable. This is because it is easy to form a cured product having better curing sensitivity and less foreign matter, and it is easy to obtain a composition that makes it easier to produce a cured product having excellent light absorption.
  • cationically polymerizable component other compounds such as a thielan compound and a thietan compound can also be used.
  • Other compounds, cyclic lactone compounds, cyclic acetal compounds, cyclic thioether compounds, spiroorthoester compounds, vinyl ether compounds, etc. that can be used as cationically polymerizable components are the same as those described in Japanese Patent No. 6103653 and the like. can do.
  • the cationically polymerizable component may be any as long as it can obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances, and for example, either a low molecular weight compound or a high molecular weight compound can be used.
  • the cationically polymerizable component preferably contains a low molecular weight compound from the viewpoint of obtaining a cured product having few foreign substances and the ease of coating the composition. Further, since the low molecular weight compound is excellent in dispersibility or solubility in the composition, a cured product having excellent transparency can be obtained.
  • the cationically polymerizable component preferably contains a high molecular weight compound from the viewpoint of adhesion of the cured product and the like.
  • the cationically polymerizable component preferably contains at least a low molecular weight compound from the viewpoint of obtaining a cured product with few foreign substances, coatability, etc., but the composition is easy to coat. From the viewpoint of the balance of adhesion and the like of the cured product, both the low molecular weight compound and the high molecular weight compound may be contained.
  • the molecular weight of the low molecular weight compound may be any as long as it has few foreign substances and can obtain desired coatability and the like. For example, it can be 1000 or less, preferably 50 or more and 500 or less, and among them, 50. It is preferably 300 or more and 300 or less.
  • the molecular weight of the high molecular weight compound may be such that there are few foreign substances and desired adhesive ease can be obtained, for example, it can be larger than 1000, preferably more than 1000 and 50,000 or less, and above all. , More than 1000 and preferably 10000 or less.
  • the molecular weight indicates the weight average molecular weight (Mw) when the compound is a polymer.
  • the weight average molecular weight can be determined as a standard polystyrene-equivalent value by gel permeation chromatography (GPC).
  • the weight average molecular weight Mw for example, GPC (LC-2000plus series) manufactured by JASCO Corporation is used, the elution solvent is tetrahydrofuran, and the polystyrene standard for the calibration curve is Mw1110,000, 707000, 397,000, 189000, 98900, 37200, 13700, 9490, 5430, 3120, 1010, 589 (TSKgel standard polystyrene manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), and the measurement columns were measured as KF-804, KF-803, KF-802 (manufactured by Showa Denko Corporation). Obtainable.
  • the measurement temperature can be 40 ° C. and the flow velocity can be 1.0 mL / min.
  • the content of the low molecular weight compound is not limited as long as a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances can be obtained, but for example, a total of 100 masses of cationically polymerizable components.
  • it is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, more preferably 30 parts by mass or more, further preferably 50 parts by mass or more, particularly preferably 70 parts by mass or more, and 80 parts by mass.
  • the above is the most preferable. This is because it becomes easier to obtain a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances.
  • the content of the cationically polymerizable component is not limited as long as a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances can be obtained.
  • the solid content of the composition of the present invention is 100.
  • the parts by mass it is preferably 50 parts by mass or more, more preferably 70 parts by mass or more, further preferably 80 parts by mass or more, and particularly preferably 90 parts by mass or more. This is because it becomes easy to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances.
  • the upper limit of the content of the cationically polymerizable component is not particularly limited, but for example, 99 in 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition of the present invention in that the amount of other components is sufficient. It is preferably less than or equal to parts by mass, and more preferably less than or equal to 97 parts by mass.
  • the content of the cationically polymerizable component can be 25 parts by mass or more, preferably 30 parts by mass or more and 80 parts by mass or less, and particularly 40 parts by mass or more and 70 parts by mass or more in 100 parts by mass of the composition. It is preferably parts by mass or less. This is because it becomes easy to obtain a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances.
  • the acid generator is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound capable of generating an acid under predetermined conditions.
  • an acid generator for example, a photoacid generator capable of generating an acid by light irradiation such as ultraviolet irradiation, and a thermoacid generator capable of generating an acid by heat can be used. ..
  • the acid generator at least one of the photoacid generator and the thermoacid generator can be used, but from the viewpoint of easy curing, the periphery used adjacent to the composition when the composition is cured. From the viewpoint that damage due to heat to the member can be reduced and the degree of freedom in selecting peripheral members is increased, the photoacid generator is preferable.
  • the photoacid generator also has an advantage that the curing rate is high.
  • the acid generator is preferably a thermal acid generator from the viewpoint of facilitating the formation of a cured product even in a place where light is difficult to reach. Further, since the thermal acid generator has a relatively slow curing rate, it can be easily bonded to other members after the curing treatment (heat treatment) by utilizing the curing rate.
  • the content of the acid generator can be 0.01 part by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less in 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition, and among them, 0. . It is preferably 1 part by mass or more and 5 parts by mass or less. This is because the above composition makes it possible to easily obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption.
  • the ratio of the acid generator to the above-mentioned cationically polymerizable component is not particularly limited, and it may be used in a generally normal ratio within a range that does not impair the object of the present invention.
  • 100 parts by mass of the cationically polymerizable component 100 parts by mass of the cationically polymerizable component.
  • the acid generator is preferably 0.05 parts by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less, preferably 0.5 parts by mass or more and 8 parts by mass or less, and 1 part by mass or more and 7 parts by mass or less. Is preferable, and in particular, it is preferably 1.5 parts by mass or more and 6 parts by mass or less.
  • the cationically polymerizable component is sufficiently cured, and the cured product of the composition has good heat resistance, which is preferable. Further, the above composition makes it possible to easily obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption.
  • the photoacid generator may be any compound that can generate an acid by light irradiation such as ultraviolet irradiation, but it is preferable to irradiate with ultraviolet light.
  • a compound salt which is an onium salt that releases Lewis acid, or a derivative thereof. Typical examples of such compounds include salts of cations and anions represented by the following general formula (21).
  • the cation [A] m + is preferably onium, and its structure can be represented by, for example, the following general formula (22).
  • R 13 is an organic group having 1 to 60 carbon atoms and may contain any number of atoms other than carbon atoms.
  • a is an integer from 1 to 5.
  • the a R 13s are independent of each other and may be the same or different. Further, at least one is preferably the organic group having an aromatic ring.
  • anion [B] m- is preferably a halide complex, and its structure can be represented by, for example, the following general formula (23).
  • L is a metal or metalloid that is the central atom of the halide complex, and is B, P, As, Sb, Fe, Sn, Bi, Al, Ca, In, Ti, Zn, Sc, V. , Cr, Mn, Co and the like.
  • X is a halogen atom.
  • anion [LX b ] m- of the above general formula examples include tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate [(C 6 F 5 ) 4 B] - , tetrafluoroborate (BF 4 ) - , and hexafluorophosphate ( PF 6 ) - , Hexafluoroantimonate (SbF 6 ) - , Hexafluoroarsenate (AsF 6 ) - , Hexachloroantimonate (SbCl 6 ) - , Tris (pentafluoromethyl) trifluorophosphate ion (FAP anion), etc. Can be mentioned.
  • anion [B] m- a structure represented by the following general formula (24) can also be preferably used.
  • L, X, and b are the same as described above.
  • Other anions that can be used include perchlorate ion (ClO 4 ) - , trifluoromethyl sulfite ion (CF 3 SO 3 ) - , fluorosulfonic acid ion (FSO 3 ) - , and toluene sulfonic acid anion.
  • Trinitrobenzene sulfonic acid anion camphor sulfonate, nonafluorobutane sulfonate, hexadecafluorooctanesulfonate, tetraarylborate, tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate and the like.
  • onium salts it is particularly effective to use the following aromatic onium salts (a) to (c).
  • aromatic onium salts (a) to (c) one of them can be used alone, or two or more of them can be mixed and used.
  • Aryldiazonium salts such as phenyldiazonium hexafluorophosphate, 4-methoxyphenyldiazonium hexafluoroantimonate, 4-methylphenyldiazonium hexafluorophosphate and the like.
  • Diaryl such as diphenyliodonium hexafluoroantimonate, di (4-methylphenyl) iodonium hexafluorophosphate, di (4-tert-butylphenyl) iodonium hexafluorophosphate, trilucmil iodonium tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate, etc.
  • Iodonium salt such as diphenyliodonium hexafluoroantimonate, di (4-methylphenyl) iodonium hexafluorophosphate, di (4-tert-butylphenyl) iodonium hexafluorophosphate, trilucmil iodonium tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate, etc.
  • the composition can form a cured product having excellent light absorption. Further, the above composition can reduce the damage caused by heat to the peripheral members such as the base material at the time of curing, and the degree of freedom in selecting the peripheral members is increased.
  • R 21 , R 22 , R 23 , R 24 , R 25 , R 26 , R 27 , R 28 , R 29 , R 30 , R 31 , R 32 , R 33 and R 34 are independent of each other.
  • R 35 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or a group in which the methylene group in the alkyl group is replaced by the following group 1, or the following formulas (A) to (C).
  • Represents one of the substituents selected from An1 q1- represents a q1-valent anion, q1 represents an integer of 1 or 2 and represents p1 represents the coefficient for neutralizing the charge.
  • R 6 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • R 121 , R 122 , R 123 , R 124 , R 125 , R 126 , R 127 , R 128 , R 129 , R 130 , R 131 , R 132 , R 133 , R 134 , R 136 , R 137 , R 138 , R 139 , R 140 , R 141 , R 142 , R 143 and R 144 , R 145 , R 146 , R 147 , R 148 and R 149 are independently hydrogen atom, halogen atom and carbon.
  • the above group 1 replaces an alkyl group having 1 to 10 atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an ester group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms or the alkyl group, the alkoxy group or the methylene group in the ester group.
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms represented by (may be referred to as 21 etc.) is used for R 101 in the general formula (I) described in the above section “1. Pyromethene compound”. , A linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent and which satisfies a predetermined number of carbon atoms can be mentioned.
  • R 21 such as an alkyl group used in the alkyl group, the methylene group in the alkoxy group or the ester group or the like group which is replaced by the group 1, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, s-butyl, t-butyl, isobutyl, amyl, isoamyl, t-amyl, hexyl, cyclohexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, ethyloctyl, 2-methoxyethyl, 3-methoxypropyl, 4-methoxybutyl, 2-butoxyethyl , Methoxyethoxyethyl, methoxyethoxyethyl, 3-methoxybutyl, 2-methylthioethyl, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, chloromethyl, dichloromethyl, trichloromethyl, bro
  • Examples of the group include a group in which —O— is bonded to a methylene group at the end on the bonding site side of the alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group constituting the alkoxy group there can be used those exemplified as the alkyl group used in the R 21 or the like.
  • the alkoxy group used in such R 21 or the like specifically, methoxy, ethoxy, Puropiruoki, isopropyloxy, butyloxy, s- butyloxy, t-butyloxy, iso-butyloxy, pentyloxy, iso-amyl oxy, t-amyloxy , Hexyloxy, Cyclohexyloxy, Cyclohexylmethyloxy, Tetrahydrofuranyloxy, Tetrahydropyranyloxy, 2-methoxyethyloxy, 3-methoxypropyloxy, 4-methoxybutyloxy, 2-butoxyethyloxy, methoxyethoxyethyloxy, methoxy Examples thereof include ethoxyethoxyethyloxy, 3-methoxybutyloxy, 2-methylthioethyloxy, trifluoromethyloxy and the like.
  • the group may be a group having an ester bond (-CO-O- or -O-CO-) at the end on the bond site side, and a group having an ester bond bonded to the methylene group at the end on the bond site side of the alkyl group may be used.
  • a group having an ester bond bonded to the methylene group at the end on the bond site side of the alkyl group may be used.
  • the alkyl group constituting the ester group can be used those described as the alkyl group used in the R 21 or the like.
  • ester group used for such R21 and the like include methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, isopropyloxycarbonyl, phenoxycarbonyl, acetoxy, propionyloxy, butyryloxy, chloroacetyloxy, dichloroacetyloxy, and trichloroacetyloxy. , Trifluoroacetyloxy, t-butylcarbonyloxy, methoxyacetyloxy, benzoyloxy and the like.
  • the divalent groups are not adjacent to each other, and the divalent group is not adjacent to each other. Is not adjacent to the oxygen atom at the bond end of the alkoxy group or the ester group at the bond end of the ester group.
  • the above R 35 is preferably selected from the above chemical formulas (A) to (C), and above all, the above R 35 is selected from the above formula (A) or (B). Is preferable. This is because when the R 35 has the above-mentioned structure, the composition can obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption.
  • R 35 selected from the above formula (A) or (C) can also be preferably used. This is because the composition has excellent curing speed and adhesive strength.
  • R 21 , R 22 , R 24 , R 25 , R 26 , R 27 , R 29 , R 30 , R 31 , R 32 , R 33 and R 34 are hydrogen atoms, halogen atoms, and carbon atoms 1 to 10. It is preferably an alkyl group, and particularly preferably a hydrogen atom. This is because the above-mentioned functional group makes it possible to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption.
  • R 23 and R 28 are preferably hydrogen atoms, halogen atoms, and alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably hydrogen atoms or halogen atoms. This is because the above-mentioned functional group makes it possible to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption.
  • R 121 , R 122 , R 124 , R 125 , R 126 , R 127 , R 129 , R 130 , R 131 , R 132 , R 133 , R 134 , R 137 , R 138 , R 139 , R 140 , R 141 , R 142 , R 143 , R 144 , R 145 , R 146 , R 147 , R 148 and R 149 are preferably alkyl groups having a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom and 1 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly hydrogen. It is preferably an atom. This is because the above-mentioned functional group makes it possible to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption.
  • R 123 , R 128 and R 136 are preferably hydrogen atoms, halogen atoms, and alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably hydrogen atoms or halogen atoms. This is because the above-mentioned functional group makes it possible to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption.
  • the q1 monovalent anion represented by An 1 Q1- for example, tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate [(C 6 F 5) 4 B] -, tetra Fluoroborate (BF 4 ) - , Hexafluorophosphate (PF 6 ) - , Hexafluoroantimonate (SbF 6 ) - , Hexafluoroarsenate (AsF 6 ) - , Hexachloroantimonate (SbCl 6 ) - , Tris (pentafluoro) Methyl) trifluorophosphate ion (FAP anion), perchlorate ion (ClO 4 ) - , trifluoromethyl sulfite ion (CF 3 SO 3 ) - , fluorosulfonic acid ion (FSO 3 ) - , toluene s
  • Thermal acid generator is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound capable of generating an acid by heat, and is not particularly limited, but is preferably heat.
  • a compound salt which is an onium salt that releases Lewis acid, or a derivative thereof, is suitable because it has good heat resistance of the cured product obtained by curing the resin composition.
  • salts of cations and anions represented by [A] m + [B] m- described in the above section "(1) Photoacid generator" can be used. ..
  • the thermal acid generator is represented by the sulfonium salt represented by the following general formula (12) or the general formula (13) because the resin has good curability and the cured product has high heat resistance. It is preferably a sulfonium salt.
  • R 221 and R 222 each independently represent an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • One or more hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group, aromatic group and arylalkyl group are independently hydroxyl groups, halogen atoms, alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, aromatic groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, respectively. It may be substituted with a nitro group, a sulfone group or a cyano group, and R 221 and R 222 may form a ring structure with an alkyl chain having 2 to 7 carbon atoms.
  • R 223 and R 224 are independently hydrogen atom, halogen atom, alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, and nitro.
  • a group, a cyano group, or a sulfone group, and one or more hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group, aromatic group, and arylalkyl group are independently hydroxylated, halogen atom, and alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • An q'- represents a q'valent anion q'represents 1 or 2 p'represents a coefficient that keeps the charge neutral.
  • R 225 is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, and a nitro group.
  • a sulfone group and a cyano group, and one or more hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group, aromatic group and arylalkyl group are independently hydroxylated, halogen atom, alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and carbon.
  • R 226 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, and the alkyl group, the aromatic group, and the aryl.
  • One or more hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group are independently hydroxyl groups, halogen atoms, alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, aromatic groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and aryls having 7 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • R 227 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in which the constituent methylene group may be substituted with a group represented by —O— or S ⁇ .
  • An q''- represents a q''valent anion and q'' represents 1 or 2 p'' represents the coefficient that keeps the charge neutral.
  • R 221 R 222, R 223 , R 224, R 225, an aromatic group and R 221 6 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 226, R 222, R 223 , R 224, R 225, R 226
  • the aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may replace one or more of the hydrogen atoms of the represented group may be a group having an aromatic ring, and the above-mentioned "1.
  • Pyromethene compound may be used.
  • the groups listed as the aryl groups which may have a substituent and which are used for R 104 and the like in the general formula (I) described in the above section those satisfying a predetermined number of carbon atoms can be mentioned.
  • aromatic group examples include phenyl, naphthyl, anthranil and the like.
  • the arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms which may substitute one or more of the hydrogen atoms of the represented group is one of the alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms described above. Alternatively, a group in which two or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with the above aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms can be used.
  • Examples of the q'or q''valent anion represented by p'An q'- and p''An q''- in the above general formulas (12) and (13) include methanesulfonic acid anion and dodecylsulfone.
  • hexafluorophosphate ion hexafluoroantimonate ion
  • tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate ion are preferable because of their high heat resistance.
  • the temperature range in which the thermal acid generator can generate an acid by heat and cure the composition is not particularly limited, but a cured product having suitable heat resistance can be obtained and thermal stability during the process is obtained. From the viewpoint of good properties, 50 ° C. or higher and 250 ° C. or lower is preferable, 100 ° C. or higher and 220 ° C. or lower is more preferable, 130 ° C. or higher and 200 ° C. or lower is still more preferable, and 150 ° C. or higher and 180 ° C. or lower is further preferable. This is because it is easy to form a cured product of the above composition.
  • thermoacid generator used in the composition of the present invention examples include Sun Aid SI-B2A, Sun Aid SI-B3A, Sun Aid SI-B3, Sun Aid SI-B4, and Sun Aid SI-60.
  • Sun Aid SI-80 Sun Aid SI-100, Sun Aid SI-110, Sun Aid SI-150 (manufactured by Sanshin Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Adeka Opton CP-66, Adeka Opton CP-77 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), etc. Can be mentioned. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • Solvent The above composition may contain a solvent, if necessary.
  • the solvent is liquid at normal temperature (25 ° C.) and atmospheric pressure, and can disperse or dissolve each component in the composition.
  • the solvent does not polymerize with the cationically polymerizable compound due to the action of the acid generator. Therefore, the cationically polymerizable compound described in the above "2.
  • Cationic polymerizable component is not included in the solvent even if it is liquid at normal temperature (25 ° C.) at atmospheric pressure.
  • the solvent is used for dispersing or dissolving each component of the composition, the pyrromethene compound described in "1. Pyrromethene compound” and "3. Acid generator” described above. Acid generators and the like are not included in the above solvents even if they are liquid at room temperature and atmospheric pressure.
  • a solvent either water or an organic solvent can be used, but an organic solvent can be preferably used.
  • the organic solvent a solvent that is usually liquid at 25 ° C. and at least a part of which can be removed by drying when forming a cured product using the above composition is used.
  • the organic solvent include ketone solvents, ether solvents, ester solvents, alcohol solvents, ether ester solvents, aromatic solvents, aliphatic hydrocarbon solvents, paraffin solvents, halogenated aliphatic hydrocarbons.
  • Solvents halogenated aromatic hydrocarbon solvents, carbitol solvents, aniline, triethylamine, pyridine, acetic acid, acetonitrile, carbon disulfide, N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, N-methylpyrrolidone, dimethyl Examples include sulfoxide and the like. These solvents can be used as one kind or a mixed solvent of two or more kinds. As the solvent, those described in International Publication No. 2017/098996 can also be used.
  • ketone solvent a solvent having a ketone structure and not having an ester structure and an alcoholic hydroxyl group can be used, and methyl ethyl ketone, methyl amyl ketone, diethyl ketone, acetone, methyl isopropyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone, 2 -Heptanone and the like can be mentioned.
  • ether solvent examples include ethyl ether, dioxane, tetrahydrofuran, 1,2-dimethoxyethane, 1,2-diethoxyethane, dipropylene glycol dimethyl ether and the like.
  • ester solvent examples include methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, n-propyl acetate, isopropyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, cyclohexyl acetate, ethyl lactate, dimethyl succinate, texanol and the like.
  • cellosolve solvent examples include ethylene glycol monomethyl ether and ethylene glycol monoethyl ether.
  • the alcohol solvent may be any solvent which does not contain an ester structure and has an alcoholic hydroxyl group, and examples thereof include methanol, ethanol, iso- or n-propanol, iso- or n-butanol, amyl alcohol, and diacetone alcohol. Be done.
  • ether ester solvent a solvent having an ether structure other than the ester structure and the portion constituting the ester structure can be used. Further, those having two or more ester structures can also be used as the ether ester solvent.
  • ether ester solvent a solvent having no alcoholic hydroxyl group can be used, and ethylene glycol monomethyl acetate, ethylene glycol monoethyl acetate, propylene glycol-1-monomethyl ether-2-acetate (PGMEA), and dipropylene glycol can be used.
  • Examples thereof include monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol diacetate, 3-methoxybutyl acetate, ethoxyethyl propionate, 3-methoxybutyl acetate, cyclohexanol acetate and the like.
  • Examples of aromatic solvents include benzene, toluene, xylene and the like.
  • Examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon solvent include hexane, heptane, octane, cyclohexane and the like.
  • Examples of the terpene-based hydrocarbon oil include turpentine oil, D-limonene, pinene and the like.
  • Examples of the paraffin-based solvent include mineral spirit, Swazole # 310 (Cosmo Matsuyama Petroleum Co., Ltd.), Solbesso # 100 (Exxon Chemical Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • halogenated aliphatic hydrocarbon solvent examples include carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, trichlorethylene, methylene chloride, 1,2-dichloroethane and the like.
  • halogenated aromatic hydrocarbon solvent examples include chlorobenzene and the like.
  • the boiling point of the organic solvent is preferably, for example, 60 ° C. or higher and 250 ° C. or lower, more preferably 80 ° C. or higher and 200 ° C. or lower, and 100 ° C. or higher and 180 ° C.
  • the temperature is preferably 120 ° C. or higher and 170 ° C. or lower.
  • the organic solvent can be easily removed during the heat treatment such as the drying step (pre-baking step) and the heat curing step (post-baking step) at the time of forming the cured product, and the cured product having excellent light absorption can be obtained more easily. Because it can be done.
  • ketones, alcohol solvents, ether ester solvents, aromatic solvents and the like are common, and among them, it is preferable to contain at least one of an alcohol solvent and an ether ester solvent, in particular. It preferably contains at least one selected from diacetone alcohol, propylene glycol-1-monomethyl ether-2-acetate (PGMEA) and dipropylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol diacetate.
  • PGMEA propylene glycol-1-monomethyl ether-2-acetate
  • dipropylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate propylene glycol diacetate.
  • the composition containing the organic solvent has less volatilization during storage, and it is easy to form a composition having excellent dispersion stability. Further, it can be easily removed during heat treatment of 100 ° C.
  • pre-baking step a drying step
  • post-baking step a heat curing step
  • the content of the organic solvent is preferably 50 parts by mass or more, particularly preferably 70 parts by mass or more, and particularly preferably 90 parts by mass or more in 100 parts by mass of the solvent. .. This is because when the content is in the above range, the composition is excellent in the dispersion stability of the dye. Therefore, the above composition facilitates the formation of a cured product having few foreign substances.
  • the SP value of the solvent may be any as long as it can obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption, but it is preferably 7 or more and 12 or less, and particularly preferably 8 or more and 11 or less. , 8.5 or more and 10.5 or less is preferable.
  • the SP value is in the above range, the dispersion stability of the specific pyrromethene compound is excellent. As a result, it becomes easy to form a composition having excellent dispersion stability, it becomes easy to form a cured product having few foreign substances, and a cured product having excellent light absorption can be obtained.
  • the SP value is calculated by the Fedors method.
  • the SP value of the solvent is, for example, as follows.
  • Diacetone alcohol SP value 10.1 PGMEA: SP value 8.7 Methyl ethyl ketone: SP value 9 Dipropylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate: SP value 8.7 Propylene glycol diacetate: SP value 9.6
  • the content of the solvent may be 1 part by mass or more and 99 parts by mass or less in 100 parts by mass of the composition as long as it can produce a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances. It is preferably 10 parts by mass or more and 80 parts by mass or less, more preferably 15 parts by mass or more and 60 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 20 parts by mass or more and 55 parts by mass or less. This is because when the content is in the above range, the composition facilitates the formation of a cured product having few foreign substances and further facilitates the production of a cured product having excellent light absorption.
  • the solvent contains at least one of an alcohol solvent and an ether ester solvent
  • the total content of the alcohol solvent and the ether ester solvent in the solvent enhances the effect of using those solvents.
  • 100 parts by mass of the solvent it is preferably 50 parts by mass or more, more preferably 60 parts by mass or more, further preferably 70 parts by mass or more, particularly preferably 80 parts by mass or more, and 90 parts by mass. It is most preferably parts by mass or more, and may be 100 parts by mass. This is because the above composition facilitates the formation of a cured product having few foreign substances and further facilitates the production of a cured product having excellent light absorption.
  • Sensitizer A sensitizer can be used in the composition of the present invention.
  • the sensitizer for example, anthracene-based compounds, naphthalene-based compounds, carbazole derivatives, and benzocarbazole derivatives can be preferably used, and among them, carbazole derivatives and benzocarbazole derivatives can be preferably used, and in particular, benzocarbazole derivatives.
  • the above composition is also more excellent in moisture permeation resistance and the like.
  • the anthracene-based compound may be any compound having an anthracene structure, and examples thereof include those represented by the following formula (IIIa).
  • R 201a and R 202a independently represent an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms or an alkoxyalkyl group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, and R 203a is a hydrogen atom or 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Represents the alkyl group of.
  • the alkyl groups having 1 to 6 carbon atoms represented by R 201a , R 202a and R 203a are among the alkyl groups having 1 to 30 carbon atoms used in R 101 and the like in the above general formula (I). Those satisfying a predetermined number of carbon atoms can be used.
  • the alkoxyalkyl group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms represented by R 201a and R 202a is hydrogen due to the alkoxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms used in X 1 or the like in the above general formula (I-1).
  • those having a predetermined number of carbon atoms can be used.
  • the naphthalene-based compound may be any compound having a naphthalene structure, and examples thereof include those represented by the following formula (IIIb).
  • R 204a and R 205a each independently represent an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms represented by R 204a and R 205a has a predetermined number of carbon atoms among the groups exemplified as the alkyl group represented by R 101 or the like in the above general formula (I). Anything that satisfies the above can be used.
  • the carbazole derivative may be any compound having a carbazole structure, and examples thereof include those represented by the following general formula (VI).
  • R 226a represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a vinyl group or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms
  • R 227a , R 228a , R 229a , R 230a , R 231a , R 232a , R 233a and R 234a independently contain a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms.
  • alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms and the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 226a , R 227a , R 228a , R 229a , R 230a , R 231a , R 232a , R 233a and R 234a As an example, among those exemplified for the alkyl group represented by R 101 and the like and the aryl group represented by R 104 and the like in the above general formula (I), those satisfying a predetermined number of carbon atoms can be used. ..
  • the alkoxy group represented by R 227a , R 228a , R 229a , R 230a , R 231a , R 232a , R 233a and R 234a is the same as the alkoxy group represented by R 21 or the like in the formula (5). Can be used.
  • the halogen atoms represented by R 227a , R 228a , R 229a , R 230a , R 231a , R 232a , R 233a and R 234a are halogens exemplified as substituents such as R 101 in the above general formula (I). The same thing as an atom can be mentioned.
  • R 226a is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably a hydrogen atom. This is because the above composition has excellent curability.
  • R 227a , R 228a , R 229a , R 230a , R 231a , R 232a , R 233a and R 234a are hydrogen atoms, alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • R 228a , R 229a , R 230a , and R 231a is an alkoxy group, and at least one of R 227a , R 232a , R 233a, and R 234a.
  • the above are preferably alkoxy groups, and in particular, one or more of R 228a , R 229a , R 230a , and R 231a are alkoxy groups, and at least one or more of R 227a , R 232a , R 233a, and R 234a are alkoxy groups.
  • the group is a group and the remaining group is a hydrogen atom. This is because the above composition has excellent curability.
  • the benzocarbazole derivative may be any derivative having a benzocarbazole structure, and examples thereof include those represented by the following general formulas (VII-1) to (VII-3).
  • the benzocarbazole derivative is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (VII-1). This is because the above composition has excellent curability.
  • R 235 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a vinyl group or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms
  • R 236 , R 237 , R 238 , R 239 , R 240 , R 241 and R 242 , R 243 , R 244 and R 245 independently have a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, a cyano group and a hydroxyl group.
  • R 246 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a vinyl group or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms
  • R 247 , R 248 , R 249 , R 250 , R 251 and R 252 , R 253 , R 254 , R 255 and R 256 independently have a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, a cyano group and a hydroxyl group, respectively.
  • R 257 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a vinyl group or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms
  • R 258 , R 259 , R 260 , R 261 and R 262 , R 263 , R 264 , R 265 , R 266 and R 267 independently have a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, a cyano group and a hydroxyl group.
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms and the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms are alkyl represented by R 101 or the like in the above general formula (I).
  • halogen atom represented by R 235 and the like include the same halogen atoms exemplified as substituents such as R 101 in the above general formula (I).
  • R 235 , R 246 and R 257 which are groups bonded to the nitrogen atom of the benzocarbazole ring, are carbons. It is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 atoms, and more preferably a branched alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms. This is because the above composition has excellent curability.
  • the above R 236 , R 237 , R 238 , R 239 , R 240 , R 241 , R 242 , R 243 , R 244 , R 245 , R 247 , R 248 , R 249 , R 250 , R 251 , R 252 , R 253 , R 254 , R 255 , R 256 , R 258 , R 259 , R 260 , R 261 , R 262 , R 263 , R 264 , R 265 , R 266 and R 267 are hydrogen atoms, It is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably a hydrogen atom. This is because when the above-mentioned group is the above-mentioned group or atom, the above-mentioned composition has excellent curability.
  • the content of the sensitizer may be any as long as it can promote the polymerization of cationically polymerizable components.
  • 0 in 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition either alone or in total of a plurality of types. It can be 0.01 part by mass or more and 6 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 0.1 part by mass or more and 3 parts by mass or less, and particularly 0.5 parts by mass or more and 2 parts by mass or less. preferable. This is because the above composition has excellent curability.
  • the ratio of the sensitizer to the cationically polymerizable component is not particularly limited, and the sensitizer may be used at a generally normal ratio within a range that does not impair the object of the present invention.
  • the content of the sensitizer is, for example, preferably 1 part by mass or more and 200 parts by mass or less, and preferably 5 parts by mass or more and 100 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass of the acid generator. It is preferably 5 parts by mass or more and 50 parts by mass or less, and preferably 15 parts by mass or more and 35 parts by mass or less. This is because when the usage ratio is within the above range, the curability is excellent.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain other dyes in addition to the above-mentioned specific pyrromethene compound.
  • dyes include pigments and dyes, and dyes are preferable in terms of hardness and dispersion stability of the composition.
  • dyes in addition to pyrromethene dyes that do not correspond to the above formula (I) from the viewpoint of dispersibility, cyanine dyes, merocyanine dyes, azo dyes, tetraazaporphyrin dyes, xanthene dyes, and triarylmethane dyes. Dyes and the like can be preferably mentioned.
  • the composition of the present invention preferably contains, in addition to the above-mentioned specific pyrromethene compound, a dye having a maximum absorption wavelength of 550 nm or more and 610 nm or less.
  • a dye having a maximum absorption wavelength of 550 nm or more and 610 nm or less it is preferable to include a tetraazaporphyrin dye as a dye having a maximum absorption wavelength of 550 nm or more and 610 nm or less.
  • the tetraazaporphyrin dye may have a porphyrin structure and can absorb light in a desired wavelength range.
  • a tetraazaporphyrin dye for example, a metal-containing porphyrin compound described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-081218, an azaporphyrin dye described in International Publication No. 2017/010076, and the like can be used.
  • the tetraazaporphyrin dye is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (II). This is because when the tetraazaporphyrin dye is a compound represented by the general formula (II), the effect of being able to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption can be more effectively exhibited. ..
  • R 301a , R 302a , R 303a , R 304a , R 305a , R 306a , R 307a and R 308a each independently have a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an amino group and a substituent.
  • R 301a and R 302a , R 303a and R 304a , R 305a and R 306a, and R 307a and R 308a may be linked to each other to form an alicyclic structure containing a carbon atom of a pyrrole ring.
  • R 301a , R 302a , R 303a , R 304a , R 305a , R 306a , R 307a and R 308a do not become hydrogen atoms at the same time.
  • M represents two hydrogen atoms, two monovalent metal atoms, a divalent metal atom, or a compound of a trivalent or tetravalent metal.
  • R 301a to R 308 a may be the same or different.
  • R 301a and R 302a , R 303a and R 304a , R 305a and R 306a, and R 307a and R 308a may be the same group or different types of groups.
  • halogen atom and amino group used in R 301a , R 302a , R 303a , R 304a , R 305a , R 306a , R 307a and R 308a are the formula (I) described in the above section "1. Pyromethene compound”.
  • a group similar to the halogen atom and amino group mentioned as the substituent for substituting the hydrogen atom of R 101 in the group can be used.
  • R 301a to R 308 a a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms can be used.
  • the above R 301a to R 308 a are groups in which a hydrogen atom in an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms is substituted with a substituent, that is, an alkyl group having a substituent and having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms represented by R 301a to R 308 a that is, the alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms having no substituent include the above “1.
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms used in R 301a to R 308 a is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and in particular, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Is preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms is particularly preferable, and an alkyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms is particularly preferable, and an alkyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms is particularly preferable. It is preferably an alkyl group of 5.
  • Examples of the substituent that replaces the hydrogen atom in the alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms having the substituent represented by R 301a to R 308 a include an ethylenically unsaturated group, a halogen atom, an acyl group and an acyloxy group.
  • the substituent may be an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryl group or the like, which will be described later.
  • examples of the alkyl group having a substituent and having 1 to 30 carbon atoms represented by R 301a to R 308a include an aralkyl group, a linear, branched or cyclic halogenoalkyl group, a linear, branched or Cyclic alkoxyalkyl groups, linear, branched or cyclic alkoxyalkylalkyl groups, aryloxyalkyl groups, aralkyloxyalkyl groups, linear, branched or cyclic halogenoalkylalkyl groups and the like can also be mentioned.
  • aralkyl group examples include benzyl group, ⁇ -methylbenzyl group, ⁇ -ethylbenzyl group, ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylbenzyl group, ⁇ -phenylbenzyl group, ⁇ , ⁇ -diphenylbenzyl group, phenethyl group and ⁇ -methyl.
  • a phenyl group and the like can be mentioned.
  • Examples of the above-mentioned linear, branched or cyclic halogenoalkyl group include a fluoromethyl group, a 3-fluoropropyl group, a 6-fluorohexyl group and the like.
  • Examples of the above-mentioned linear, branched or cyclic alkoxyalkyl group include a methoxymethyl group, an ethoxymethyl group, and an n-butoxymethyl group.
  • Examples of the above-mentioned linear, branched or cyclic alkoxyalkoxyalkyl group include a (2-methoxyethoxy) methyl group and a (2-ethoxyethoxy) methyl group.
  • aryloxyalkyl group examples include a phenyloxymethyl group, a 4-methylphenyloxymethyl group, and a 3-methylphenyloxymethyl group.
  • aralkyloxyalkyl group examples include a benzyloxymethyl group and a phenethyloxymethyl group.
  • Examples of the above-mentioned linear, branched or cyclic halogenoalkoxyalkyl group include a linear, branched or cyclic halogenoalkoxyalkyl group such as a fluoromethyloxymethyl group.
  • the alkoxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms used in the above R 301a to R 308 a the number of carbon atoms 1 in which —O— is bonded to the end of the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, and the cycloalkylalkyl group on the bonding site side. Up to 30 groups can be used.
  • Such an alkoxy group can be the same as that used for X 1 in the above general formula (I-1).
  • Specific examples of the alkoxy group include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, an n-propoxy group, an isopropoxy group, an n-butoxy group and the like.
  • alkoxy group having a substituent and having 1 to 30 carbon atoms represented by R 301a to R 308 a one or two or more hydrogen atoms in the alkoxy group are substituted with the substituent.
  • substituent substituting the hydrogen atom include those listed as the substituent substituting the hydrogen atom in the alkyl groups represented by R 301a to R 308 a.
  • More specific examples of the alkoxy group having a substituent and having 1 to 30 carbon atoms include an aralkyloxy group, a linear, branched or cyclic halogenoalkoxy group.
  • aralkyloxy group examples include a benzyloxy group, an ⁇ -methylbenzyloxy group, an ⁇ -ethylbenzyloxy group and the like.
  • linear, branched or cyclic halogenoalkoxy group examples include a fluoromethyloxy group and a 3-fluoropropyloxy group.
  • the aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms used in R 301a , R 302a , R 303a , R 304a , R 305a , R 306a , R 307a and R 308a is described in the above section "1. Pyrromethene compound”.
  • a group similar to the aryl group represented by R 104 in the formula (I) can be used.
  • the aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms represented by R 301a to R 308 a is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and particularly an aryl group having 6 to 16 carbon atoms.
  • aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. This is because a cured product having a steeper absorption peak can be obtained in a desired wavelength range.
  • the aryl group having a substituent and having 6 to 30 carbon atoms include those in which one or two or more hydrogen atoms in the aryl group are substituted with a substituent.
  • substituent substituting the hydrogen atom include those listed as the substituent substituting the hydrogen atom of the alkyl group represented by R 301a to R 308 a.
  • Examples of the aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms that is, the aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms having no substituent and the aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms having the substituent include, for example, a phenyl group. , 2-Methylphenyl group, 3-Methylphenyl group, 4-Methylphenyl group, 3-Ethylphenyl group, 2-Fluorophenyl group, 3-Fluorophenyl group and the like.
  • the aryloxy groups of R 301a ⁇ R 308 6 to 30 carbon atoms represented by a include groups replaced with an aryl group Be done.
  • Examples of the aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms represented by R 301a to R 308 a include a phenoxy group and a 2-methylphenyloxy group.
  • the aryloxy group represented by R 301a to R 308 a is preferably an aryloxy group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and preferably an aryloxy group having 6 to 16 carbon atoms.
  • a cured product having a steeper absorption peak can be obtained in a desired wavelength range.
  • the aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms having a substituent represented by R 301a to R 308a one or two or more hydrogen atoms in the aryloxy group are substituted with the substituent.
  • the substituent substituting the hydrogen atom include those listed as the substituent substituting the hydrogen atom of the alkyl group represented by R 301a to R 308 a.
  • Examples of the aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms having the substituent represented by R 301a to R 308 a include a 2-methoxyphenyloxy group and a 4-isopropoxyphenyloxy group.
  • Examples of the aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms having the substituent represented by R 301a to R 308 a include a 2-fluorophenyloxy group and a 3-chlorophenyloxy group.
  • examples of the aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms having the substituent represented by R 301a to R 308a include 3-chloro-4-methylphenyloxy group and 2-phenylphenyloxy group. Can be done.
  • the heteroaryl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms represented by R 301a to R 308 a is, for example, from an aromatic heterocycle containing at least one nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, or sulfur atom as a hetero atom. Examples thereof include a group excluding one hydrogen atom.
  • the heteroaryl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms having a substituent represented by R 301a to R 308 a one or two or more hydrogen atoms in the heteroaryl group are substituted with the substituent. Things can be mentioned.
  • the substituent substituting the hydrogen atom include those listed as the substituent substituting the hydrogen atom of the alkyl group represented by R 301 to R 308.
  • Heteroaryl groups having 2 to 30 carbon atoms represented by R 301a to R 308 a that is, heteroaryl groups having 6 to 30 carbon atoms having no substituents, and 2 to 2 carbon atoms having substituents.
  • Examples of the heteroaryl group of 30 include a furanyl group, a pyrrolyl group, a 3-pyrrolino group, a pyrazolyl group, an imidazolyl group and the like.
  • the alicyclic structure formed by connecting R 301a and R 302a , R 303a and R 304a , R 305a and R 306a or R 307a and R 308a with each other is a carbon atom of a pyrrole ring to which R 301a or the like is bonded.
  • Examples thereof include alicyclic hydrocarbon groups having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, which are formed containing, for example, alicyclics such as cyclohexane, methylcyclohexane, dimethylcyclohexane, t-butylcyclohexane, cyanocyclohexane, and dichlorocyclohexane.
  • the structure can be mentioned.
  • R 301a to R 308a are hydrogen atoms, alkyl groups having 1 to 30 carbon atoms having no substituent or having a substituent, and 1 carbon atom having no substituent or having a substituent. It is preferably an alkoxy group of about 30 or an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms which does not have a substituent or has a substituent.
  • the combination of R 301a and R 302a , R 303a and R 304a , R 305a and R 306a, and R 307a and R 308a may be any combination as long as it can absorb light of a desired wavelength.
  • a combination of a hydrogen atom and an alkyl group (i) a combination of a hydrogen atom and an alkyl group, (ii) a combination of an alkyl group and an alkoxy group, (iii) a combination of an alkyl group and an aryl group, and the like are preferable, and among them, (iii). Is most preferable. This is because a cured product having a steep absorption peak in a desired wavelength range can be obtained. Further, R 301a , R 303a , R 305a and R 307a may be the same group or different groups, but are preferably the same group. This is because a cured product having a steeper absorption peak can be obtained in a desired wavelength range.
  • R 302a , R 304a , R 306a and R 308a may be the same group or different groups, but are preferably the same group. This is because a cured product having a steeper absorption peak can be obtained in a desired wavelength range.
  • the combination of the above (iii) includes an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms having no or having a substituent and an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms having no or having a substituent. Is preferable, and a combination of an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms having no substituent and an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms having a substituent is more preferable, and in particular, a carbon atom having no substituent.
  • a combination of an alkyl group having a number of 2 to 5 and an aryl group having a substituent and having 6 carbon atoms is more preferable.
  • the substituent that replaces one or more of the hydrogen atoms of the aryl group is preferably a halogen atom, and more preferably a fluorine atom. Further, it is preferable that one of the hydrogen atoms of the aryl group is substituted with a substituent.
  • R 301a , R 303a , R 305a and R 307a are phenyl groups in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with halogen atoms
  • R 302a , R 304a , R 306a and R 308a is an isopropyl group, an isobutyl group, a sec-butyl group, a tert-butyl group, an isopentyl group, a neopentyl group, a tert-pentyl group, a 1,2-dimethylpropyl group, a 1-methylbutyl group, a 2-methylbutyl group, etc.
  • R 301a , R 303a , R 305a and R 307a are 2-fluorophenyl group, 3-fluorophenyl group, 4-. It is a phenyl group in which one of the hydrogen atoms is substituted with a fluorine atom such as a fluorophenyl group, and R 302a , R 304a , R 306a and R 308a are an isopropyl group, an isobutyl group, a sec-butyl group and a tert-butyl.
  • Examples of the divalent metal atom represented by M include metal atoms belonging to groups 3 to 15 of the periodic table. Specifically, Cu, Zn, Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Pb, Rh, Pd, Pt, Mn, Sn, Pb and the like can be mentioned.
  • Examples of the monovalent metal atom represented by M include Na, K, Li and the like.
  • Examples of the compound of the trivalent or tetravalent metal represented by M include halides, hydroxides and oxidations of trivalent or tetravalent metals belonging to Groups 3 to 15 of the Periodic Table. Things etc. can be mentioned.
  • As the metal compound a divalent metal compound can be used.
  • examples thereof include Si (OCH 3 ) 2 , Si (OPh) 2 , Si (OSiCH 3 ) 2 , Sn (OH) 2 , Ge (OH) 2 , VO, and TiO.
  • the M is preferably Cu, Zn, Co, Ni, Pb, Pd, Pt, Mn, VO, TiO, and particularly preferably Cu, Co, Ni, Pd, VO. This is because a cured product having a steeper absorption peak can be obtained in a desired wavelength range.
  • the tetraazaporphyrin dye compound represented by the general formula (II) is more specifically the same as the specific example of the general formula (1) described in JP-A-2017-68221. Can be mentioned.
  • tetraazaporphyrin dye compound examples include, for example, PD-311S, PD-320, NC-35, SNC-8 (Yamamoto Kasei Co., Ltd.), FDG-004, FDG-007 (Yamada). Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • the content of the tetraazaporphyrin dye is preferably 20 parts by mass or more in 100 parts by mass of the dye, and more preferably 30 parts by mass or more and 80 parts by mass or less, and particularly 40 parts by mass. It is preferably 70 parts by mass or more, and particularly preferably 45 parts by mass or more and 65 parts by mass or less. This is because it has the effect of improving the light resistance of the specific pyrromethene compound.
  • the content of the tetraazaporphyrin dye is preferably 0.01 part by mass or more, and more than 0.01 part by mass and 8 part by mass or less in 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition. It is preferably 0.1 part by mass or more and 5 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 0.1 part by mass or more and 3 parts by mass or less. This is because it is necessary to efficiently cut only specific wavelengths.
  • the content of the tetraazaporphyrin dye is preferably 0.001 part by mass or more, and particularly 0.01 part by mass or more and 6.4 parts by mass or less in 100 parts by mass of the composition. Is preferable, and in particular, it is preferably 0.05 parts by mass or more and 4 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 0.1 parts by mass or more and 2.4 parts by mass or less.
  • the pyrromethene dye and tetra containing the specific pyrromethene compound can be easily produced because there are few foreign substances and the cured product has excellent light absorption.
  • the total content of the azaporphyrin dye is preferably 30 parts by mass or more, particularly preferably 50 parts by mass or more, and particularly 80 parts by mass or more in 100 parts by mass of the entire dye. It is preferable that the amount is 90 parts by mass or more, particularly preferably 95 parts by mass or more, and particularly 100 parts by mass, that is, whether the dye is the pyrromethene dye. , Or the above-mentioned pyrromethene dye and tetraazaporphyrin dye are preferable.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain a pyrromethene compound other than the specific pyrromethene compound.
  • the amount of the pyrromethene compound other than the specific pyrromethene compound in the composition of the present invention is based on 100 parts by mass of the specific pyrromethene compound from the viewpoint of enhancing the effect of obtaining a cured product having few foreign substances and excellent light absorption. , 100 parts by mass or less, more preferably 50 parts by mass or less, particularly preferably 30 parts by mass or less, and most preferably 10 parts by mass or less.
  • Resin components other than the cationically polymerizable component contains the above-mentioned cationically polymerizable component as a resin component, but if necessary, a resin component other than the above-mentioned cationically polymerizable component (hereinafter, other resin). It may be referred to as a component).
  • the other resin component include a compound capable of polycondensation and a polycondensate thereof.
  • the compound capable of polycondensation include a radically polymerizable compound.
  • the monomer components constituting the polycondensate product described later can also be mentioned.
  • the radically polymerizable compound has a radically polymerizable group.
  • the radically polymerizable group may be any radically polymerizable group, and examples thereof include ethylenically unsaturated groups such as an acryloyl group, a methacryloyl group, and a vinyl group.
  • the radically polymerizable compound may have one or more radically polymerizable groups, and a monofunctional compound having one radically polymerizable group and a polyfunctional compound having two or more radically polymerizable groups can be used. ..
  • a compound having an acid value As the radically polymerizable compound, a compound having an acid value, a compound having no acid value, or the like can be used.
  • the compound having an acid value include an acrylate compound having a carboxyl group such as methacrylic acid and acrylic acid, and a methacrylate compound.
  • the compound having no acid value include acrylates having no carboxyl group such as urethane acrylate resin, urethane methacrylate resin, epoxy acrylate resin, epoxy methacrylate resin, 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate, and -2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate. Examples thereof include compounds and methacrylate compounds.
  • the radically polymerizable compound can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the radically polymerizable compound can be used in combination with a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group and having an acid value and a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group and having no acid value.
  • a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group and having an acid value and a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group and having no acid value.
  • two or more kinds of radically polymerizable compounds are mixed and used, they may be copolymerized in advance and used as a copolymer. More specific examples of such radically polymerizable compounds include radically polymerizable compounds described in JP-A-2016-17609.
  • the content of the radically polymerizable compound is small from the viewpoint that a cured product having a small amount of foreign matter and excellent light absorption can be formed.
  • the content of the radically polymerizable compound is preferably 10 parts by mass or less, particularly preferably 5 parts by mass or less, and particularly 1 part by mass in 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition. It is preferably less than or equal to, particularly preferably 0.5 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 0 parts by mass, that is, it does not contain a radically polymerizable compound.
  • the polycondensate can be an oligomer or a polymer containing two or more repeating units.
  • the polycondensate include thermoplastic resins such as polyolefin resins, styrene resins, polyester resins, polyether resins, polycarbonate resins, polyamide resins, and halogen-containing resins.
  • thermoplastic resins such as polyolefin resins, styrene resins, polyester resins, polyether resins, polycarbonate resins, polyamide resins, and halogen-containing resins.
  • Such a polycondensate can be, for example, the same as that described as a thermoplastic resin in WO 2017/150662.
  • the composition of the present invention can contain a silicon-based surfactant.
  • Silicon-based surfactants include SH series, SD series, ST series from Toray Dow Corning Silicone, BYK series from Big Chemie Japan Co., Ltd., KP series from Shinetsu Silicone, Disform series from Nippon Oil & Fats Co., Ltd., Toshiba.
  • Examples include, but are not limited to, Silicone's TSF series. Specific examples thereof include those described in JP-A-2019-091034, Re-Table 2018/062408, and Re-Table 2015/129783.
  • the amount of the silicon-based surfactant is preferably 0.001 to 5 parts by mass, and 0.01 to 3 parts by mass, for example, out of 100 parts by mass of the composition, from the viewpoint of enhancing the effect of the addition thereof. Is more preferable, and 0.02 to 1.5 parts by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the amount of the silicon-based surfactant is preferably 0.003 to 7 parts by mass, preferably 0.02, based on 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition, for example, from the viewpoint of enhancing the effect of the silicon-based surfactant. It is more preferably to 5 parts by mass, and particularly preferably 0.03 to 3 parts by mass.
  • the composition of the present invention can contain an antioxidant.
  • the antioxidant include phenolic antioxidants, phosphorus-based antioxidants, and thioether-based antioxidants, and are not particularly limited, but International Publication No. 2017/098996, JP-A-2019-116523. Examples thereof include those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-149852.
  • the amount of the antioxidant is preferably 0.01 to 10 parts by mass, preferably 0.05 to 5 parts by mass, out of 100 parts by mass of the composition, for example, from the viewpoint of enhancing the effect of the antioxidant. It is more preferably 0.1 to 3 parts by mass, and particularly preferably 0.1 to 3 parts by mass.
  • the amount of the antioxidant is preferably 0.02 to 10 parts by mass, preferably 0.1 to 5 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition, for example, from the viewpoint of enhancing the effect of the antioxidant. Is more preferable, and 0.2 to 3 parts by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the content of the total dye is 0.01 part by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less in 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition
  • the content of the cationically polymerizable component is 50 parts by mass or more in 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition
  • the content of the acid generator is 0.01 parts by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less in 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition.
  • the content of all dyes indicates the total content of the above-mentioned specific pyrromethene compound and dyes added as needed that do not correspond to the formula (I).
  • compositions of the present invention include optical filters, paints, coating agents, lining agents, adhesives, printing plates, insulating varnishes, insulating sheets, laminated boards, printed circuit boards, semiconductor devices, LED packages, and the like.
  • organic electroluminescence (EL) optical elements, electrical insulation, electronic components, separation films, etc., sealants, molding materials, putties, glass fiber impregnants, sealants, semiconductors, etc. ⁇ Passion film for solar cells, interlayer insulation film, protective film, printed circuit board, color TV, PC monitor, mobile information terminal, color filter for CCD image sensor, electrode material for plasma display panel, printing ink, dental
  • compositions, photoforming resins, both liquid and dry films, micromechanical components, glass fiber cable coatings, and holographic recording materials are examples of the compositions, photoforming resins, both liquid and dry films, micromechanical components, glass fiber cable coatings, and holographic recording materials.
  • the optical filter may be required to change the spectral shape of the light transmitted through the optical filter.
  • a liquid crystal display LCD
  • PDP plasma display panel
  • ELD electroluminescence display
  • CTR Cathode ray tube display
  • CCD image sensor CCD image sensor
  • CMOS sensor CCD image sensor
  • fluorescent display tube for image display devices such as electric field radiation type display, for analyzer, for semiconductor device manufacturing, for astronomical observation, for optical communication, spectacle lens , Can be used for applications such as windows.
  • the composition is preferably for forming an optical filter, particularly preferably for forming an optical filter for an image display device, and particularly for forming a color adjusting filter for an image display device.
  • the color adjustment filter may be one that adjusts the light of each color. More specifically, as the color adjustment filter, the color of light transmitted through a color filter in which pixels of R (red), G (green), B (blue) and other colors used as an optical filter are arranged. In order to further adjust the color of the light emitted from the light emitters of each color, such as those arranged so as to overlap with the color filter in plan view, and the electroluminescence element of each color, the light emitters of each color.
  • the above application is particularly for a color adjustment filter of an image display device having blue light and green light emission light when the specific pyrromethene compound is a dye having a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more and less than 550 nm. It is preferable, and in particular, it is for a color adjustment filter of an image display device which overlaps with blue pixels and green pixels in a plan view and is arranged so that both blue light and green light emission light are transmitted. Is preferable.
  • the above application is for forming a filter for color adjustment of an image display device arranged so as to overlap with a blue pixel or a green pixel. This is because the above-mentioned application can more effectively exert the effect that an optical filter having excellent light absorption in a desired wavelength range can be manufactured.
  • an application for forming a member requiring flexibility can also be mentioned.
  • the above composition can be preferably used for forming an optical filter for an image display device having flexibility.
  • the cured product of the present invention is characterized by being a cured product of the above-mentioned composition.
  • the cured product is a cured product of the above composition, and thus can be used as, for example, an optical filter having few foreign substances and excellent light absorption.
  • the cured product of the present invention uses the above-mentioned composition.
  • the cured product of the present invention will be described in detail.
  • the composition may be the same as the content described in the section "A. Composition”.
  • the cured product usually contains a polymer of a cationically polymerizable component.
  • the plan-view shape, thickness, and the like of the cured product can be appropriately set according to the intended use of the cured product.
  • the thickness can be, for example, 0.05 ⁇ m or more and 300 ⁇ m or less.
  • the method for producing the cured product is not particularly limited as long as the cured product of the composition can be formed into a desired shape.
  • a manufacturing method for example, the same as the content described in the section "D. Manufacturing method of cured product" described later can be applied, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.
  • optical filter of the present invention is characterized by having a light absorption layer containing the above-mentioned cured product.
  • the light absorbing layer contains the cured product described above, so that the light absorbing layer has high definition and excellent color reproducibility of the image display device.
  • the optical filter of the present invention has the above-mentioned light absorption layer.
  • the light absorption layer included in the optical filter of the present invention will be described in detail.
  • the light absorption layer contains the above-mentioned cured product.
  • the content of the cured product contained in the light absorption layer is usually 100 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of the light absorption layer. That is, the light absorption layer can be made of the cured product.
  • the cured product may be the same as the content described in the section “B. Cured product”.
  • the shape, area, thickness, and the like of the light absorption layer in a plan view can be appropriately set according to the application of the optical filter and the like.
  • the method for forming the light absorption layer any known method for forming a coating film can be used as long as it can form a light absorption layer having a desired shape and thickness.
  • the forming method can be, for example, the same as that described in the section “D. Method for producing a cured product” described later.
  • the optical filter may include only the light absorption layer, or may include other layers other than the light absorption layer.
  • the other layers include a transparent support, an undercoat layer, an antireflection layer, a hard coat layer, a lubricating layer, and an adhesive layer.
  • the contents of each layer and the method for forming the layers can be generally used for optical filters, and are described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-144280, International Publication No. 2016/158369, and the like. It can be the same as the content.
  • the light absorption layer may be used, for example, as an adhesive layer for adhering between the transparent support and any of the layers.
  • the optical filter may be provided with a known separator film such as a polyethylene terephthalate film that is easily adhered to the surface of the light absorption layer as an adhesive layer.
  • the optical filter When the optical filter is used for an image display device, the optical filter can usually be arranged in front of a display. For example, there is no problem even if the optical filter is directly attached to the surface of the display, and if a front plate or an electromagnetic wave shield is provided in front of the display, the front side (outside) or the back side (display side) of the front plate or the electromagnetic wave shield is provided. ) May be pasted with an optical filter.
  • the optical filter may be used as an optical member of each member included in an image display device, for example, a color filter, a polarizing plate, or the like. Further, the optical filter may be directly laminated on each member included in the image display device.
  • the method for producing a cured product of the present invention is characterized by including a step of curing the above-mentioned composition.
  • the method for producing the cured product is to cure the composition, for example, a cured product that can be used as an optical filter having high definition and excellent light absorption can be obtained. Can be done.
  • the method for producing a cured product of the present invention includes the above-mentioned curing step.
  • each step of the method for producing a cured product of the present invention will be described in detail. Since the composition can be the same as the content described in the section "A. Composition", the description thereof is omitted here.
  • the curing step is a step of curing the above-mentioned composition.
  • the curing method of the composition may be any method as long as the cationically polymerizable components can be polymerized with each other. Examples thereof include a method of irradiating the coating film of the composition with energy rays, a method of heating the coating film of the composition, and the like.
  • an acid generator such a polymerization method is preferably determined according to the type of the acid generator.
  • a method of irradiating energy rays can be preferably used, and when the composition contains a thermoacid generator as an acid generator. Can preferably use a heating method. This is because the polymerization of the cationically polymerizable component is easy.
  • the light source of the energy ray used for the polymerization of the cationically polymerizable component is an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, a high pressure mercury lamp, a medium pressure mercury lamp, a low pressure mercury lamp, a mercury steam arc lamp, a xenon arc lamp, and a carbon arc lamp.
  • an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp, a mercury vapor arc lamp, a carbon arc lamp, a xenon arc lamp, a light emitting diode, or the like that emits light having a wavelength of 300 to 450 nm is used. This is because the polymerization of the cationically polymerizable component is easy.
  • the irradiation amount of the energy ray is not particularly limited and can be appropriately determined depending on the composition of the composition.
  • the dose from the viewpoint of preventing deterioration of the components in the composition, the amount of irradiation 100mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 2000mJ / cm 2 is preferred.
  • Examples of the method for heating the coating film of the composition in this step include a method using a hot plate such as a hot plate, an air oven, an inert gas oven, a vacuum oven, a hot air circulation oven and the like.
  • the heating temperature when heating the coating film is not particularly limited, but is preferably 70 ° C. or higher and 200 ° C. or lower, and 90 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower, from the viewpoint of easy polymerization of the cationically polymerizable component. preferable.
  • the heating time when heating the coating film is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 60 minutes, more preferably 1 to 30 minutes from the viewpoint of improving productivity.
  • the curing method is a method in which a method of irradiating energy rays and a method of heating are used in combination, and more specifically, a method of irradiating energy rays and a method of heating are performed in this order. Is preferable. This is because the polymerization of the cationically polymerizable component can be efficiently promoted.
  • the above-mentioned manufacturing method may have other steps as required. Examples of such a step include a step of applying the above composition before the step of curing the composition.
  • a method for applying the composition known methods such as a spin coater, a roll coater, a bar coater, a die coater, a curtain coater, various types of printing, and immersion can be used.
  • the base material can be appropriately set according to the intended use of the cured product, and examples thereof include soda glass, quartz glass, semiconductor substrates, metals, paper, plastics, and the like. Further, the cured product may be formed on the base material and then peeled off from the base material, or may be transferred from the base material to another adherend and used.
  • the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment.
  • the above-described embodiment is an example, and any one having substantially the same configuration as the technical idea described in the claims of the present invention and exhibiting the same effect and effect is the present invention. It is included in the technical scope of.
  • Examples 1 to 16 and Comparative Examples 1 to 4 After blending the cationically polymerizable component, acid generator, dye, radically polymerizable compound, photoradical initiator, solvent and additive according to the formulations shown in Tables 3 and 4 below, the formulation is applied to a 5 ⁇ m membrane filter. The composition was obtained by passing through and removing the insoluble matter. In addition, the following materials were used for each component. The blending amount in the table represents the mass part of each component.
  • A1-11 A compound represented by the following formula (A1-1) (aliphatic epoxy compound, low molecular weight compound).
  • A1-2 A compound represented by the following formula (A1-2) (aliphatic epoxy compound, epoxy equivalent: 300, low molecular weight compound).
  • A1-3 A compound represented by the following formula (A1-3) (aromatic epoxy compound, low molecular weight compound).
  • A1-4 A compound represented by the following formula (A1-4) (JER # 1004, aromatic epoxy compound, epoxy equivalent 875-975, number average molecular weight Mn1650, high molecular weight compound).
  • A1-5 A compound represented by the following formula (A1-5) (aliphatic epoxy compound, low molecular weight compound).
  • A1-6 A compound represented by the following formula (A1-6) (Daicel's celloxide 2021P, alicyclic epoxy compound, low molecular weight compound).
  • A1-7 Daicel EHPE-3150 (1,2-epoxy-4- (2-oxylanyl) cyclohexane adduct of 2,2-bis (hydroxymethyl) -1-butanol, aliphatic epoxy compound, high molecular weight compound) Is.
  • A1-8 OXT-211 (oxetane compound, low molecular weight compound) manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • A2-1 Toagosei DPHA (radical polymerizable compound).
  • A2-2 Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • A-200 (radical polymerizable compound).
  • A3-1 Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd. Sumipex PMMA (polycondensate).
  • B1-1 A 50% by mass solution of PC (propylene carbonate) of a compound (photoacid generator) represented by the following formula (B1-1).
  • B1-2 A 50% by mass solution of PC (propylene carbonate) of a compound (photoacid generator) represented by the following formula (B1-2).
  • B1-3 A 50% by mass solution of PC (propylene carbonate) of a compound (photoacid generator) represented by the following formula (B1-3).
  • B1-4 A 50% by mass solution of PC (propylene carbonate) of a compound (photoacid generator) represented by the following formula (B1-4).
  • B1-5 A compound (photoacid generator) represented by the following formula (B1-5) was used.
  • C-2 A compound represented by the following formula (C-2) (specific pyrromethene compound, maximum absorption wavelength is 499 nm (in chloroform).
  • C-3 A compound represented by the following formula (C-3) (specific pyrromethene compound, maximum absorption wavelength is 498 nm (in chloroform).
  • C-4 A compound represented by the following formula (C-4) (specific pyrromethene compound, maximum absorption wavelength is 490 nm (in chloroform)).
  • C-5 A compound represented by the following formula C-5) (pyrromethene dye, maximum absorption wavelength is 496 nm (in chloroform)).
  • C-6 A compound represented by the following formula C-6) (tetraazaporphyrin dye, maximum absorption wavelength is 594 nm (in chloroform)).
  • D-1 SH-29P Paint additive (surfactant) manufactured by Toray Dow Corning.
  • D-2 BYK-333 (surfactant) manufactured by Big Chemie.
  • D-3 A compound (antioxidant) represented by the following formula (D-3).
  • D-4 A compound (antioxidant) represented by the following formula (D-4).
  • D-5 Compound represented by the following formula (D-5) (sensitizer, benzocarbazole derivative)
  • D-6 Compound represented by the following formula (D-6) (sensitizer, carbazole derivative)
  • E-1 Methyl ethyl ketone (solvent, ketone solvent).
  • E-2 Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (solvent, PGMEA, ether ester solvent).
  • E-3 Diacetone alcohol (solvent, alcohol-based solvent).
  • E-4 Dipropylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (solvent, ether ester solvent).
  • E-5 Propylene glycol diacetate (solvent, ether ester solvent).
  • the coating conditions were 10 seconds at a rotation speed of 1500 rpm. Next, the solvent was dried and removed by heat treatment at 80 ° C. for 3 minutes on a hot plate to prepare a sample for evaluating foreign substances.
  • The number of foreign substances is 5 counts or less
  • The number of foreign substances is more than 5 counts and less than 20 counts
  • The number of foreign substances is 20 counts or more The smaller the number of foreign substances is, the more preferable the optical filter is.
  • Evaluation 2-1 Minimum transmittance and maximum absorption wavelength of the composition and its cured product Using the compositions of Examples and Comparative Examples, an evaluation sample before curing and an evaluation sample after curing were prepared by the following methods, and manufactured by Nippon Spectroscopy. The transmittance spectrum was measured using a visible ultraviolet absorptiometer V-670 to obtain the minimum transmittance in the range of 380 nm or more and 780 nm or less and the wavelength at that time (maximum absorption wavelength). The results are shown in Tables 6 and 7 below. Since Comparative Example 3 is not a curable composition, only the measurement results of the evaluation sample before curing are shown.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength of the dye showing the maximum absorption wavelength having the shortest wavelength is shown.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength obtained based on Compound C-1, which has a short maximum absorption wavelength is shown in the table.
  • the above composition was applied to a base material (PET film A9300 manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd., 100 ⁇ m) by a bar coating method.
  • the thickness of the coating film was adjusted so that the transmittance of the following evaluation sample before curing at the maximum absorption wavelength was about 3-7%.
  • the coating film was dried in an oven at 80 ° C. for 5 minutes to remove the solvent, and an evaluation sample before curing was obtained.
  • Evaluation 2-2 Absolute value of the difference between the minimum transmittance of the cured product and the minimum transmittance of the composition In Examples 1 to 16 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2, the evaluation sample before curing and the evaluation after curing obtained in Evaluation 2-1. The difference between the two was calculated from the minimum transmittance of the sample for use. It can be judged that the smaller the difference in the minimum transmittance before and after curing, that is, the smaller the change in transmittance before and after curing, the better the light absorption.
  • the composition of the present invention had good dispersion stability and was easy to form a cured film with few foreign substances. From the results of evaluation 2-1 in Tables 6 and 7, it was confirmed that the composition of the example had a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more and less than 550 nm. Further, from Evaluation 2-1 and Evaluation 2-2, the composition of the example had less change in transmittance before and after curing as compared with the composition of the comparative example, and had light absorption in the wavelength region of 450 nm or more and less than 550 nm. It was confirmed that an excellent cured product could be obtained.
  • the composition of the present invention can absorb light of a specific wavelength to increase the color purity, for example, increase the color purity of blue light emission and green light emission, and improve the color reproducibility of the image display device. It was confirmed that it is particularly useful for an excellent optical filter.
  • the composition of the present invention From the curl property evaluation (evaluation 3), it was confirmed that the composition of the present invention has little curing shrinkage and is excellent in adhesion and the like. From the flexibility evaluation (evaluation 4), it was confirmed that the composition of the present invention has good flexibility and is particularly useful for, for example, an optical filter used in an image display device having flexibility. .. From the evaluation of solvent resistance (evaluation 5), the composition of the present invention can form a three-dimensionally crosslinked coating film by containing a cationically polymerizable component, and can be cured with excellent durability such as dye retention performance. I was able to confirm that I could get things.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Materials Engineering (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Compositions Of Macromolecular Compounds (AREA)
  • Optical Filters (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention is a composition having a pyrromethene compound in which a compound represented by general formula (I) is coordinated to a metal atom or a metal compound, a cationically polymerizable component, and an acid generator. (In the formula, R101-R103 and R105-R107 each independently represent an optionally substituted linear or branched alkyl group, and R104 represents a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted linear or branched alkyl group, or an optionally substituted aryl group.)

Description

組成物、硬化物、光学フィルタ及び硬化物の製造方法Method for manufacturing composition, cured product, optical filter and cured product
 本発明は、特定構造のピロメテン化合物と、カチオン重合性成分と、酸発生剤とを含む組成物に関するものである。 The present invention relates to a composition containing a pyrromethene compound having a specific structure, a cationically polymerizable component, and an acid generator.
 特定波長の光を吸収する光学フィルタの形成方法として、着色剤と硬化性化合物を含む着色組成物を、フォトリソグラフィ法、インクジェット法などの各種塗布方法によって塗布して、着色パターンを形成する方法が知られている。このような着色組成物としては、例えば、ラジカル重合性化合物と着色剤とを組み合わせた組成物が知られている。例えば、特許文献1には染料とラジカル重合性化合物とを含む組成物が記載されている。 As a method for forming an optical filter that absorbs light of a specific wavelength, a method of applying a coloring composition containing a colorant and a curable compound by various coating methods such as a photolithography method and an inkjet method to form a coloring pattern is used. Are known. As such a coloring composition, for example, a composition in which a radically polymerizable compound and a coloring agent are combined is known. For example, Patent Document 1 describes a composition containing a dye and a radically polymerizable compound.
US2016216604A1US2016216604A1
 しかしながら、画像表示装置に対する高輝度、高コントラスト等の色再現性の要求の高まりから、光吸収性により優れた光学フィルタが要求されている。
 また、染料を含む組成物を塗膜とし、これを硬化させて光学フィルタを形成した場合に、光学フィルタ中に異物が発生する場合があるといった不具合があった。
However, due to the increasing demand for color reproducibility such as high brightness and high contrast for image display devices, an optical filter having better light absorption is required.
Further, when a composition containing a dye is used as a coating film and cured to form an optical filter, there is a problem that foreign matter may be generated in the optical filter.
 本発明は、上記問題点に鑑みてなされたものであり、光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を形成可能な組成物を提供することにある。 The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a composition capable of forming a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances.
 本発明は、下記一般式(I)で表される化合物が金属原子又は金属化合物に配位したピロメテン化合物と、
 カチオン重合性成分と、
 酸発生剤と、
 を有する組成物を提供する。
The present invention comprises a pyrromethene compound in which a compound represented by the following general formula (I) is coordinated to a metal atom or a metal compound.
With cationically polymerizable components,
Acid generator and
A composition having the above is provided.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004

(式中、R101、R102、R103、R105、R106及びR107は、各々独立に、置換基を有していてもよい直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基を表し、R104は、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい直鎖若しくは分岐鎖のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004

(In the formula, R 101 , R 102 , R 103 , R 105 , R 106 and R 107 each independently represent a linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent, and R 104 is , A hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of a linear or branched chain which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.)
 本発明によれば、上記一般式(I)で表される化合物が金属原子又は金属化合物に配位したピロメテン化合物、カチオン重合性成分及び酸発生剤を含む組成物は、光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を得ることができる。 According to the present invention, the composition in which the compound represented by the above general formula (I) is coordinated with a metal atom or a metal compound and contains a pyrromethene compound, a cationically polymerizable component and an acid generator is excellent in light absorption and A cured product with few foreign substances can be obtained.
 本発明においては、上記ピロメテン化合物が、下記一般式(I-1)で表される化合物又は下記一般式(I-2)で表される化合物であることが、光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を一層容易に得られる点で好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005

(式中、R201、R202、R203、R205、R206及びR207は、各々独立に、置換基を有していてもよい直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基を表し、
 R204は、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい直鎖若しくは分岐鎖のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。
 X1及びX2は、各々独立に、ヒドロキシ基、ハロゲン原子、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアルコキシ基を表す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006

(式中、R301、R302、R303、R305、R306及びR307並びにR401、R402、R403、R405、R406及びR407は、各々独立に、置換基を有していてもよい直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基を表し、
 R304及びR404は、各々独立に、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい直鎖若しくは分岐鎖のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。
 M3は、金属原子又は金属化合物を表す。)
In the present invention, the pyrromethene compound is a compound represented by the following general formula (I-1) or a compound represented by the following general formula (I-2), which is excellent in light absorption and contains foreign substances. It is preferable in that a small amount of cured product can be obtained more easily.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005

(In the formula, R 201 , R 202 , R 203 , R 205 , R 206 and R 207 each independently represent a linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent.
R 204 represents a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.
Each of X 1 and X 2 may independently have a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, a phenyl group which may have a substituent, or a substituent. Represents an alkoxy group. )
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006

(In the formula, R 301 , R 302 , R 303 , R 305 , R 306 and R 307 and R 401 , R 402 , R 403 , R 405 , R 406 and R 407 each independently have a substituent. Represents a linear or branched alkyl group that may be
R 304 and R 404 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.
M 3 represents a metal atom or a metal compound. )
 本発明においては、前記ピロメテン化合物が、前記一般式(I-2)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。当該化合物を染料として用いることで、例えば、光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を一層容易に得ることができるからである。 In the present invention, the pyrromethene compound is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (I-2). This is because, for example, by using the compound as a dye, a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances can be obtained more easily.
 本発明においては、R301、R303、R305及びR307、並びに、R401、R403、R405及びR407が、それぞれ独立に、炭素原子数1~20の置換基を有していてもよい直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基であり、
 R302及びR306並びにR402及びR406が、それぞれ独立に、炭素原子数1~20の置換基を有していてもよい直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基であり、
 R304及びR404が、水素原子であり、M3がZn、Cu、Ni又はCoであることが好ましい。当該染料を用いることで、光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を一層容易に得ることができるからである。
In the present invention, R 301 , R 303 , R 305 and R 307 , and R 401 , R 403 , R 405 and R 407 each independently have a substituent having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. May be a linear or branched alkyl group,
R 302 and R 306 and R 402 and R 406 are linear or branched alkyl groups which may independently have a substituent having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, respectively.
It is preferable that R 304 and R 404 are hydrogen atoms and M 3 is Zn, Cu, Ni or Co. This is because by using the dye, a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances can be obtained more easily.
 本発明においては、前記カチオン重合性成分が、脂環式エポキシ化合物及び脂肪族エポキシ化合物の少なくとも一方を含むことが好ましい。これらのエポキシ化合物を用いることで、光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を一層容易に得ることができるからである。 In the present invention, it is preferable that the cationically polymerizable component contains at least one of an alicyclic epoxy compound and an aliphatic epoxy compound. This is because by using these epoxy compounds, a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances can be obtained more easily.
 本発明においては、前記カチオン重合性成分の含有量が、前記組成物の固形分100質量部中に、50質量部以上であることが好ましく、且つ/又は、前記脂環式エポキシ化合物及び前記脂肪族エポキシ化合物の合計の含有量が、前記カチオン重合性成分100質量部中に、50質量部以上であることが好ましい。
 上記含有量が上述の範囲であることで、上記組成物は、光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を得ることが一層容易だからである。
In the present invention, the content of the cationically polymerizable component is preferably 50 parts by mass or more in 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition, and / or the alicyclic epoxy compound and the fat. The total content of the group epoxy compounds is preferably 50 parts by mass or more in 100 parts by mass of the cationically polymerizable component.
This is because when the content is in the above range, it is easier to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances in the composition.
 本発明においては、前記組成物が、溶剤を含み、
 前記溶剤が、アルコール系溶剤及びエーテルエステル系溶剤の少なくとも一方を含むことが好ましい。上記有機溶剤は、上記ピロメテン化合物の分散安定性が良好だからである。また、上記有機溶剤を含む組成物は、保存時の揮発が少なく、分散安定性に優れた組成物の形成が容易である。また、硬化物形成時の乾燥工程(プリベーク工程)、加熱硬化工程(ポストベーク工程)等の加熱処理時に、溶剤を容易に除去できる。このため、上記組成物は、光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を更に容易に得ることができるからである。
In the present invention, the composition contains a solvent and
The solvent preferably contains at least one of an alcohol solvent and an ether ester solvent. This is because the organic solvent has good dispersion stability of the pyrromethene compound. Further, the composition containing the organic solvent has less volatilization during storage, and it is easy to form a composition having excellent dispersion stability. In addition, the solvent can be easily removed during heat treatment such as a drying step (pre-baking step) and a heat curing step (post-baking step) at the time of forming a cured product. Therefore, the above composition can more easily obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances.
 本発明においては、上記組成物が、光学フィルタ形成用であることが好ましい。上記組成物は、光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を得ることができるとの効果を効果的に発揮することができるからである。 In the present invention, it is preferable that the above composition is for forming an optical filter. This is because the above composition can effectively exert the effect of being able to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances.
 更に本発明は、上記組成物の硬化物を提供する。当該硬化物は、光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない光学フィルタ等として使用できる。 Further, the present invention provides a cured product of the above composition. The cured product can be used as an optical filter or the like having excellent light absorption and less foreign matter.
 また本発明は、上記組成物の硬化物を含む光吸収層を有することを特徴とする光学フィルタを提供する。当該光学フィルタは、上記光吸収層を有することにより、高精細、かつ、画像表示装置の色再現性に優れたものとなる。 The present invention also provides an optical filter characterized by having a light absorption layer containing a cured product of the above composition. By having the light absorption layer, the optical filter has high definition and excellent color reproducibility of an image display device.
 本発明は、上記組成物を硬化する工程を含む硬化物の製造方法を提供する。当該硬化物の製造方法は、上記組成物を硬化させるものであるため、例えば、光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない光学フィルタ等として使用可能な硬化物を得ることができる。 The present invention provides a method for producing a cured product, which comprises a step of curing the above composition. Since the method for producing the cured product is to cure the composition, for example, a cured product that can be used as an optical filter having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances can be obtained.
 本発明は、光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を製造可能な組成物を提供できるという効果を奏する。 The present invention has the effect of being able to provide a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances.
 本発明は、組成物、その硬化物、光学フィルタ及び硬化物の製造方法に関するものである。
 以下、本発明について詳細に説明する。
The present invention relates to a composition, a cured product thereof, an optical filter, and a method for producing the cured product.
Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail.
A.組成物
 まず、本発明の組成物について説明する。
 本発明の組成物は、上記一般式(I)で表される化合物が金属原子又は金属化合物に配位したピロメテン化合物(以下、特定ピロメテン化合物と称する場合がある。)と、カチオン重合性成分と、酸発生剤と、を含むことに特徴の1つを有するものである。
A. Composition First, the composition of the present invention will be described.
The composition of the present invention comprises a pyrromethene compound (hereinafter, may be referred to as a specific pyrromethene compound) in which the compound represented by the general formula (I) is coordinated to a metal atom or a metal compound, and a cationically polymerizable component. , An acid generator, and one of the characteristics of the compound.
 本発明者は、従来、着色剤として染料を含むラジカル重合性着色組成物を用いて光学フィルタを形成した場合、光吸収性に優れた光学フィルタを得ることができない場合がある不具合が存在することを知見した。
 そして、硬化性化合物としてカチオン重合性化合物を用いることで、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を得られることを見出し、本願出願前にこれを提案した。
 しかしながら、更なる研究の結果、カチオン重合性化合物及び染料を含む組成物を塗膜とし、これを硬化させて光学フィルタを形成した場合に、光学フィルタ中に異物が発生する場合があるといった不具合があることを知見した。そこで、鋭意検討したところ、上記特定ピロメテン化合物、カチオン重合性成分及び酸発生剤を含むことで、光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を得ることができることを見出した。
Conventionally, when an optical filter is formed by using a radically polymerizable coloring composition containing a dye as a colorant, the present inventor has a problem that an optical filter having excellent light absorption may not be obtained. Was found.
Then, they found that a cured product having excellent light absorption can be obtained by using a cationically polymerizable compound as the curable compound, and proposed this before filing the application.
However, as a result of further research, when a composition containing a cationically polymerizable compound and a dye is used as a coating film and cured to form an optical filter, foreign matter may be generated in the optical filter. I found that there is. Therefore, as a result of diligent studies, it was found that a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances can be obtained by containing the above-mentioned specific pyrromethene compound, a cationically polymerizable component and an acid generator.
 上記特定ピロメテン化合物を、カチオン重合性成分及び酸発生剤と組み合わせることで、光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を得ることができる理由については明確ではないが、以下のように推察される。
 異物は硬化物中において、主成分として含まれるカチオン重合性成分の重合物と相溶性が低く、所定の粒径を有するものであると考えられる。このような異物としては、染料を中心とした凝集物が考えられる。
 また、このような異物の発生原因としては、組成物の保存時に染料等が凝集する場合、塗布装置の吐出部分に付着した組成物から溶剤が乾燥除去される過程で染料等が凝集する場合等が考えられる。
 これに対して、上記特定ピロメテン化合物は、幅広い溶解度パラメーター(SP値)の化合物と相溶性を示し、例えば、溶剤についても、メチルエチルケトン等のケトン系溶剤、ジアセトンアルコール等のアルコール系溶剤、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート等のエーテルエステル系溶剤等の様々な種類と良好な相溶性を示す。この結果、上記組成物は、溶剤の選択の自由度が高く、保存時の異物発生の抑制が容易となる。また、上記組成物は、該組成物を、塗工・塗布装置の吐出部分に付着した際に乾燥し難いものとするための溶剤の選択の自由度が高く、吐出部分における異物発生の抑制が容易となる。
 また、上記特定ピロメテン化合物は、分散安定性に優れ、凝集が少ないことで、上記組成物の使用前に濾過処理を行った場合でも、濾過前後で組成物中の濃度変化が少ない。
 この結果、上記組成物は、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を安定的に形成容易となる。
 以上のことから、上記特定ピロメテン化合物を、カチオン重合性成分及び酸発生剤と組み合わせることで、異物の発生が少なく、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を得ることができるのである。
 また、上記組成物は硬化性成分として、カチオン重合性成分を用いる。エポキシ化合物等のカチオン重合性成分は、例えばメタクリレート、アクリレート等のラジカル重合性化合物等と比較して、硬化反応が穏やかであり、特定ピロメテン化合物を含む染料に変性等を生じることを抑制できる。その結果、組成物を硬化させた際に、所望の波長領域の光を吸収可能な化合物として有効に機能する染料の含有量の低下が少ない。またエポキシ化合物等のカチオン重合性成分はラジカル重合性化合物等と比較して、硬化時の硬化収縮が少なく、硬化時に特定ピロメテン化合物が凝集する等の不具合が少ない。その結果、上記組成物の硬化物は、特定ピロメテン化合物が安定的に分散して保持されるものとなる。それゆえ当該硬化物中の特定ピロメテン化合物は、所望の波長範囲の光を効率的に吸収可能となる。
 このようなことからも、上記組成物は、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を得ることができるのである。
It is not clear why the above-mentioned specific pyrromethene compound can be combined with a cationically polymerizable component and an acid generator to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances, but it is presumed as follows. ..
It is considered that the foreign matter has low compatibility with the polymer of the cationically polymerizable component contained as the main component in the cured product and has a predetermined particle size. As such a foreign substance, agglomerates centered on a dye can be considered.
Further, the causes of such foreign substances include the case where the dye or the like aggregates during storage of the composition, or the case where the dye or the like aggregates in the process of drying and removing the solvent from the composition adhering to the discharge portion of the coating device. Can be considered.
On the other hand, the specific pyromethene compound shows compatibility with compounds having a wide solubility parameter (SP value). For example, the solvent is also a ketone solvent such as methyl ethyl ketone, an alcohol solvent such as diacetone alcohol, or propylene glycol. It shows good compatibility with various types of ether ester solvents such as monoethyl ether acetate. As a result, the composition has a high degree of freedom in selecting a solvent, and it becomes easy to suppress the generation of foreign substances during storage. Further, the above composition has a high degree of freedom in selecting a solvent for making the composition difficult to dry when it adheres to the discharge portion of the coating / coating device, and suppresses the generation of foreign matter in the discharge portion. It will be easy.
In addition, the specific pyrromethene compound has excellent dispersion stability and less aggregation, so that the concentration change in the composition is small before and after filtration even when the filtration treatment is performed before the use of the composition.
As a result, the above composition facilitates stable formation of a cured product having excellent light absorption.
From the above, by combining the above-mentioned specific pyrromethene compound with a cationically polymerizable component and an acid generator, it is possible to obtain a cured product having less foreign matter and excellent light absorption.
In addition, the above composition uses a cationically polymerizable component as a curable component. The cationically polymerizable component such as an epoxy compound has a milder curing reaction than, for example, a radically polymerizable compound such as methacrylate and acrylate, and can suppress the occurrence of modification of the dye containing the specific pyrromethene compound. As a result, when the composition is cured, there is little decrease in the content of the dye that effectively functions as a compound capable of absorbing light in a desired wavelength region. Further, the cationically polymerizable component such as an epoxy compound has less curing shrinkage during curing and less problems such as aggregation of the specific pyromethene compound during curing as compared with the radically polymerizable compound and the like. As a result, in the cured product of the above composition, the specific pyrromethene compound is stably dispersed and retained. Therefore, the specific pyrromethene compound in the cured product can efficiently absorb light in a desired wavelength range.
From such a thing, it is possible to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption by the above composition.
 本発明の組成物は上述のように重合時の硬化収縮が少ないため基材等の部材に塗布された後、硬化物とされた場合でも、カールの発生、更に剥離の発生が少ないものとなる。またカチオン重合性成分は、アクリレート等のラジカル重合性化合物等と比較して、耐水性が高く、例えば高湿環境下における密着力の低下も少ない。以上のことから、特定ピロメテン化合物、カチオン重合性成分及び酸発生剤を同時に含むものとすることで、上記組成物は、異物が少なく、光吸収性に優れた光学フィルタを製造可能な組成物となると共に、カールの発生、剥離の発生が少なく、密着性にも優れた硬化物を得ることができる。更に上記組成物は、カチオン重合により硬化可能であることで、得られた硬化物を3次元架橋したものとすることができる。その結果、上記硬化物は、例えば、熱可塑性樹脂等に特定ピロメテン化合物を分散させた組成物等と比較して、特定ピロメテン化合物の保持性能等の耐久性、強度等に優れたものとなる。更に、上記組成物は、エポキシ化合物等のカチオン重合性成分を含むものであるため、得られる硬化物は、例えば、アクリレート等のラジカル重合性化合物等と比較して、柔軟性に優れたものとなる。従って、上記組成物を用いて製造された光学フィルタは、例えば、フレキシブル性が要求される画像表示装置等にも好ましく用いることができる。 As described above, the composition of the present invention has less curing shrinkage during polymerization, so even if it is applied to a member such as a base material and then made into a cured product, curling and peeling are less likely to occur. .. Further, the cationically polymerizable component has high water resistance as compared with a radically polymerizable compound such as acrylate, and for example, the decrease in adhesion in a high humidity environment is small. From the above, by simultaneously containing the specific pyrromethene compound, the cationically polymerizable component and the acid generator, the above composition becomes a composition capable of producing an optical filter having few foreign substances and excellent light absorption. , Curling and peeling are less likely to occur, and a cured product having excellent adhesion can be obtained. Further, since the above composition can be cured by cationic polymerization, the obtained cured product can be three-dimensionally crosslinked. As a result, the cured product is superior in durability, strength, etc., such as holding performance of the specific pyrromethene compound, as compared with, for example, a composition in which the specific pyrromethene compound is dispersed in a thermoplastic resin or the like. Further, since the composition contains a cationically polymerizable component such as an epoxy compound, the obtained cured product has excellent flexibility as compared with, for example, a radically polymerizable compound such as acrylate. Therefore, the optical filter manufactured by using the above composition can be preferably used, for example, in an image display device or the like that requires flexibility.
 以下、本発明の組成物の各成分について、詳細に説明する。 Hereinafter, each component of the composition of the present invention will be described in detail.
1.ピロメテン化合物
 本発明に用いられるピロメテン化合物は、下記一般式(I)で表される化合物が金属原子又は金属化合物に配位したピロメテン化合物である。
1. 1. Pyrromethene compound The pyrromethene compound used in the present invention is a pyrromethene compound in which a compound represented by the following general formula (I) is coordinated to a metal atom or a metal compound.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007

(式中、R101、R102、R103、R105、R106及びR107は、各々独立に、置換基を有していてもよい直鎖若しくは分岐鎖のアルキル基を表し、R104は、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい直鎖若しくは分岐鎖のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007

(In the formula, R 101 , R 102 , R 103 , R 105 , R 106 and R 107 each independently represent a linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent, and R 104 is , A hydrogen atom, an alkyl group of a linear or branched chain which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.)
 式(I)で表される化合物が配位する金属原子又は金属化合物としては、錯体を形成可能なものであればよい。
 金属原子は、ホウ素、ケイ素、ゲルマニウム、ヒ素、アンチモン、テルル、セレン、ポロニウム、アスタチン等の半金属をも含むものである。
 金属化合物としては、金属原子と金属原子以外の原子を含むものである。このような金属化合物としては、金属原子が、塩素原子、フッ素原子等のハロゲン原子と結合した金属のハロゲン化物、金属原子が、水酸基と結合した金属の水酸化物、金属原子が、酸素原子と結合した金属の酸化物等が挙げられる。
 金属原子又は金属化合物としては、2価の金属原子、3価又は4価の金属のハロゲン化物、水酸化物及び酸化物等が挙げられ、金属化合物としては、全体として、2価のものを用いることができる。
 上記金属原子又は金属化合物としては、例えば、Zn、Mg、Si、Sn、Rh、Pt、Pd、Mo、Mn、Pb、Cu、Ni、Co、Fe、Al、In、Fe、Ti、Sn、Si、Ge、B、V、AlCl、InCl、FeCl、TiCl2、SnCl2、SiCl2、GeCl2、BCl2、BF2、TiO、VO、Si(OH)2等が挙げられる。
 更に具体的に言えば、式(I)で示される構造が金属原子又は金属化合物に配位したピロメテン化合物の好ましい態様としては、下記式(I-1)又は(I-2)で示される錯体化合物が挙げられる。このような錯体化合物を用いることで、光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を得ることが一層容易となる。
 本発明においては、光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を製造可能な組成物の形成が容易となる観点から、上記特定ピロメテン化合物が、2量体構造のピロメテン錯体化合物であることが好ましく、特に、上記一般式(I-2)で表される錯体化合物であることが好ましい。
The metal atom or metal compound to which the compound represented by the formula (I) is coordinated may be any one capable of forming a complex.
Metal atoms also include metalloids such as boron, silicon, germanium, arsenic, antimony, tellurium, selenium, polonium and astatine.
The metal compound includes a metal atom and an atom other than the metal atom. Examples of such metal compounds include metal halides in which metal atoms are bonded to halogen atoms such as chlorine atoms and fluorine atoms, metal hydroxides in which metal atoms are bonded to hydroxyl groups, and oxygen atoms in which metal atoms are oxygen atoms. Examples include bonded metal oxides.
Examples of the metal atom or the metal compound include a divalent metal atom, a halide of a trivalent or tetravalent metal, a hydroxide and an oxide, and the metal compound is a divalent metal compound as a whole. be able to.
Examples of the metal atom or metal compound include Zn, Mg, Si, Sn, Rh, Pt, Pd, Mo, Mn, Pb, Cu, Ni, Co, Fe, Al, In, Fe, Ti, Sn, Si. , Ge, B, V, AlCl, InCl, FeCl, TiCl 2 , SnCl 2 , SiCl 2 , GeCl 2 , BCl 2 , BF 2 , TiO, VO, Si (OH) 2 and the like.
More specifically, a preferred embodiment of the pyrromethene compound in which the structure represented by the formula (I) is coordinated to a metal atom or a metal compound is a complex represented by the following formula (I-1) or (I-2). Examples include compounds. By using such a complex compound, it becomes easier to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances.
In the present invention, the specific pyrromethene compound is preferably a pyrromethene complex compound having a dimeric structure from the viewpoint of facilitating the formation of a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances. In particular, it is preferably a complex compound represented by the above general formula (I-2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008

(式中、R201、R202、R203、R205、R206及びR207は、各々独立に、置換基を有していてもよい直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基を表し、
 R204は、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい直鎖若しくは分岐鎖のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。
 X1及びX2は、各々独立に、ヒドロキシ基、ハロゲン原子、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアルコキシ基を表す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009

(式中、R301、R302、R303、R305、R306及びR307並びにR401、R402、R403、R405、R406及びR407は、各々独立に、置換基を有していてもよい直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基を表し、R304及びR404は、各々独立に、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい直鎖若しくは分岐鎖のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。
 M3は、Zn、Mg、Si、Sn、Rh、Pt、Pd、Mo、Mn、Pb、Cu、Ni、Co、Fe、Al、In、Fe、Ti、Sn、Si、Ge、B、又はVを表す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008

(In the formula, R 201 , R 202 , R 203 , R 205 , R 206 and R 207 each independently represent a linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent.
R 204 represents a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.
Each of X 1 and X 2 may independently have a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, a phenyl group which may have a substituent, or a substituent. Represents an alkoxy group. )
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009

(In the formula, R 301 , R 302 , R 303 , R 305 , R 306 and R 307 and R 401 , R 402 , R 403 , R 405 , R 406 and R 407 each independently have a substituent. Represents a linear or branched alkyl group which may have, and R 304 and R 404 each independently have a hydrogen atom and a linear or branched alkyl group or a substituent which may have a substituent. Represents an aryl group that may have.
M 3 is Zn, Mg, Si, Sn, Rh, Pt, Pd, Mo, Mn, Pb, Cu, Ni, Co, Fe, Al, In, Fe, Ti, Sn, Si, Ge, B, or V. Represents. )
 R101~R107、R201~R207、R301~R307、R401~R407(以下、「R101等」ともいう。)で表される直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基としては炭素原子数1以上30以下のものが挙げられ、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、アミル基、イソアミル基、t-アミル基、ヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、イソオクチル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、t-オクチル基、ノニル基、イソノニル基、デシル基、イソデシル基、ウンデシル基、ドデシル基、テトラデシル基、ヘキサデシル基、オクタデシル基及びイコシル基等が挙げられる。
 R101等に用いられる置換基を有している直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基は、直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基中の1又は2以上の水素原子が置換基で置換された基が挙げられる。
Carbon as a linear or branched alkyl group represented by R 101 to R 107 , R 201 to R 207 , R 301 to R 307 , and R 401 to R 407 (hereinafter, also referred to as “R 101, etc.”). Examples thereof include those having 1 or more and 30 or less atoms, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, s-butyl group, t-butyl group, amyl group, isoamyl group, t-. Amil group, hexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, isooctyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, t-octyl group, nonyl group, isononyl group, decyl group, isodecyl group, undecyl group, dodecyl group, tetradecyl group, hexadecyl group, octadecyl group. Examples include a group and an icosyl group.
Examples of the linear or branched alkyl group having a substituent used in R 101 and the like include a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms in the linear or branched alkyl group are substituted with a substituent. Be done.
 X1及びX2(以下「X1等」とも記載する)で表されるアルキル基としては炭素原子数1~30である、直鎖又は分岐の鎖状アルキル基、炭素原子数3~30のシクロアルキル基、炭素原子数4~30のシクロアルキルアルキル基が挙げられる。直鎖又は分岐の鎖状アルキル基としては、前記のR101等で表される直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基で例示した基と同様の基が挙げられる。 The alkyl group represented by X 1 and X 2 (hereinafter, also referred to as “X 1 etc.”) has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a linear or branched chain alkyl group, and 3 to 30 carbon atoms. Examples thereof include cycloalkyl groups and cycloalkylalkyl groups having 4 to 30 carbon atoms. Examples of the linear or branched chain alkyl group include the same groups as those exemplified for the linear or branched alkyl group represented by R 101 and the like.
 炭素原子数3~30のシクロアルキル基とは、3~30の炭素原子を有する、飽和単環式又は飽和多環式アルキル基を意味する。例えば、上記シクロアルキル基としては、シクロヘキシル環等の単環式炭化水素環、ノルボルナン環等の架橋炭化水素環等のシクロアルキル環から水素原子を1つ除いた基又はシクロアルキル環から水素原子を1つ除いた基の環中の水素原子の1つ又は2つ以上を脂肪族炭化水素基により置換した基である、単環式炭化水素基、架橋炭化水素環基等が挙げられる。 A cycloalkyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms means a saturated monocyclic or saturated polycyclic alkyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms. For example, as the cycloalkyl group, a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a cycloalkyl ring such as a monocyclic hydrocarbon ring such as a cyclohexyl ring or a crosslinked hydrocarbon ring such as a norbornan ring, or a hydrogen atom from a cycloalkyl ring. Examples thereof include monocyclic hydrocarbon groups and crosslinked hydrocarbon ring groups, which are groups in which one or more hydrogen atoms in the ring of the group excluding one are substituted with an aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
 上記単環式炭化水素基としては、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、シクロヘプチル基、シクロオクチル基、シクロノニル基、シクロデシル基、メチルシクロペンチル基、メチルシクロヘキシル基、ジメチルシクロヘキシル基、トリメチルシクロヘキシル基、テトラメチルシクロヘキシル基、ペンタメチルシクロヘキシル基、エチルシクロヘキシル基及びメチルシクロヘプチル基等を挙げることができる。
 上記架橋炭化水素環基としては、ビシクロ[2.1.1]ヘキシル基、ビシクロ[2.2.1]ヘプチル基、ビシクロ[2.2.2]オクチル基、ビシクロ[4.3.1]デシル基、ビシクロ[3.3.1]ノニル基、ボルニル基、ボルネニル基、ノルボルニル基、ノルボルネニル基、6,6-ジメチルビシクロ[3.1.1]ヘプチル基、トリシクロブチル基、アダマンチル基が挙げられる。
Examples of the monocyclic hydrocarbon group include a cyclopropyl group, a cyclobutyl group, a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, a cycloheptyl group, a cyclooctyl group, a cyclononyl group, a cyclodecyl group, a methylcyclopentyl group, a methylcyclohexyl group, a dimethylcyclohexyl group and a trimethyl group. Examples thereof include a cyclohexyl group, a tetramethylcyclohexyl group, a pentamethylcyclohexyl group, an ethylcyclohexyl group and a methylcycloheptyl group.
Examples of the crosslinked hydrocarbon ring group include a bicyclo [2.1.1] hexyl group, a bicyclo [2.2.1] heptyl group, a bicyclo [2.2.2] octyl group, and a bicyclo [4.3.1]. Decyl group, bicyclo [3.3.1] nonyl group, bornyl group, bornenyl group, norbornyl group, norbornenyl group, 6,6-dimethylbicyclo [3.1.1] heptyl group, tricyclobutyl group, adamantyl group Can be mentioned.
 炭素原子数4~30のシクロアルキルアルキル基としては、上記シクロアルキル基と、上記直鎖又は分岐の鎖状アルキル基とを組合せた基を用いることができる。例えば、直鎖又は分岐の鎖状アルキル基中の水素原子の1つ又は2つ以上が、上記シクロアルキル基により置換された基、直鎖又は分岐の鎖状アルキル基中のメチレン基の1つ又は2つ以上が、上記シクロアルキル基から水素原子を1つ除いた基により置換された基等が挙げられる。具体的には、直鎖又は分岐の鎖状アルキル基の水素原子が、シクロアルキル基により置換された4~30の炭素原子を有する基としては、シクロプロピルメチル基、シクロブチルメチル基、シクロペンチルメチル基、シクロヘキシルメチル基、シクロヘプチルメチル基、シクロオクチルメチル基、シクロノニルメチル基、シクロデシルメチル基、2-シクロブチルエチル基、2-シクロペンチルエチル基、2-シクロヘキシルエチル基、2-シクロヘプチルエチル基、2-シクロオクチルエチル基、2-シクロノニルエチル基、2-シクロデシルエチル基、3-シクロブチルプロピル基、3-シクロペンチルプロピル基、3-シクロヘキシルプロピル基、3-シクロヘプチルプロピル基、3-シクロオクチルプロピル基、3-シクロノニルプロピル基、3-シクロデシルプロピル基、4-シクロブチルブチル基、4-シクロペンチルブチル基、4-シクロヘキシルブチル基、4-シクロヘプチルブチル基、4-シクロオクチルブチル基、4-シクロノニルブチル基、4-シクロデシルブチル基、3-3-アダマンチルプロピル基及びデカハイドロナフチルプロピル基等が挙げられ、炭素原子数4~10のシクロアルキルアルキル基としては、例えば、シクロプロピルメチル基、シクロブチルメチル基、シクロペンチルメチル基、シクロヘキシルメチル基、シクロヘプチルメチル基、シクロオクチルメチル基、シクロノニルメチル基、2-シクロブチルエチル基、2-シクロペンチルエチル基、2-シクロヘキシルエチル基、2-シクロヘプチルエチル基、2-シクロオクチルエチル基、3-シクロブチルプロピル基、3-シクロペンチルプロピル基、3-シクロヘキシルプロピル基、3-シクロヘプチルプロピル基、4-シクロブチルブチル基、4-シクロペンチルブチル基及び4-シクロヘキシルブチル基等が挙げられる。 As the cycloalkylalkyl group having 4 to 30 carbon atoms, a group obtained by combining the cycloalkyl group and the linear or branched chain alkyl group can be used. For example, one or more hydrogen atoms in a linear or branched chain alkyl group is one of a group substituted with the cycloalkyl group, or a methylene group in a linear or branched chain alkyl group. Alternatively, a group in which two or more are substituted with a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the cycloalkyl group can be mentioned. Specifically, examples of the group having 4 to 30 carbon atoms in which the hydrogen atom of the linear or branched chain alkyl group is substituted with the cycloalkyl group include a cyclopropylmethyl group, a cyclobutylmethyl group, and a cyclopentylmethyl. Group, cyclohexylmethyl group, cycloheptylmethyl group, cyclooctylmethyl group, cyclononylmethyl group, cyclodecylmethyl group, 2-cyclobutylethyl group, 2-cyclopentylethyl group, 2-cyclohexylethyl group, 2-cycloheptylethyl group Group, 2-cyclooctylethyl group, 2-cyclononylethyl group, 2-cyclodecylethyl group, 3-cyclobutylpropyl group, 3-cyclopentylpropyl group, 3-cyclohexylpropyl group, 3-cycloheptylpropyl group, 3 -Cyclooctylpropyl group, 3-cyclononylpropyl group, 3-cyclodecylpropyl group, 4-cyclobutylbutyl group, 4-cyclopentylbutyl group, 4-cyclohexylbutyl group, 4-cycloheptylbutyl group, 4-cyclooctyl Examples of the cycloalkylalkyl group having 4 to 10 carbon atoms include a butyl group, a 4-cyclononylbutyl group, a 4-cyclodecylbutyl group, a 3-3-adamantylpropyl group and a decahydronaphthylpropyl group. , Cyclopropylmethyl group, cyclobutylmethyl group, cyclopentylmethyl group, cyclohexylmethyl group, cycloheptylmethyl group, cyclooctylmethyl group, cyclononylmethyl group, 2-cyclobutylethyl group, 2-cyclopentylethyl group, 2-cyclohexyl Ethyl group, 2-cycloheptylethyl group, 2-cyclooctylethyl group, 3-cyclobutylpropyl group, 3-cyclopentylpropyl group, 3-cyclohexylpropyl group, 3-cycloheptylpropyl group, 4-cyclobutylbutyl group, Examples thereof include 4-cyclopentylbutyl group and 4-cyclohexylbutyl group.
 X1等に用いられる置換基を有しているアルキル基は、アルキル基中の1又は2以上の水素原子が置換基で置換された基が挙げられる。 Examples of the alkyl group having a substituent used for X 1 and the like include a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms in the alkyl group are substituted with a substituent.
 R104、R204、R304、R404(以下、R104等ともいう。)で表されるアリール基としては炭素原子数6以上30以下のものが挙げられ、例えば、芳香環から水素原子を1つ除いた基又はその基に含まれる芳香環中の水素原子が脂肪族炭化水素基により置換された基とすることができる。より具体的には、上記アリール基としては、単環芳香環から水素原子を1つ除いた基又はその基に含まれる芳香環中の水素原子が脂肪族炭化水素基により置換された基である単環芳香族炭化水素基、単環芳香環が縮合した縮合芳香環から水素原子を1つ除いた基又はその基に含まれる芳香環中の水素原子が脂肪族炭化水素基により置換された基である縮合環芳香族炭化水素基、単環芳香環及び縮合芳香環が、単結合又はカルボニル基等の連結基を介して結合した集合芳香環から水素原子を1つ除いた基又はその基に含まれる芳香環中の水素原子が脂肪族炭化水素基により置換された基である環集合芳香族炭化水素基等が挙げられる。 Examples of the aryl group represented by R 104 , R 204 , R 304 , and R 404 (hereinafter, also referred to as R 104, etc.) include those having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, and for example, a hydrogen atom from an aromatic ring. It can be a group in which one is removed or a group in which a hydrogen atom in an aromatic ring contained in the group is substituted with an aliphatic hydrocarbon group. More specifically, the aryl group is a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a monocyclic aromatic ring or a group in which a hydrogen atom in the aromatic ring contained in the group is substituted with an aliphatic hydrocarbon group. A monocyclic aromatic hydrocarbon group, a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a condensed aromatic ring in which a monocyclic aromatic ring is condensed, or a group in which a hydrogen atom in the aromatic ring contained in the group is substituted with an aliphatic hydrocarbon group. A group in which one hydrogen atom is removed from an aggregated aromatic ring in which a fused ring aromatic hydrocarbon group, a monocyclic aromatic ring and a condensed aromatic ring are bonded via a linking group such as a single bond or a carbonyl group, or a group thereof. Examples thereof include a ring-aggregated aromatic hydrocarbon group in which the hydrogen atom in the contained aromatic ring is substituted with an aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
 ここで、上記芳香環中の水素原子を置換する脂肪族炭化水素基としては、炭素原子数1~30のものを用いることができ、炭素原子数1~30の直鎖又は分岐の鎖状アルキル基、炭素原子数2~30のアルケニル基、炭素原子数3~30のシクロアルキル基及び炭素原子数4~30のシクロアルキルアルキル基等が挙げられる。
 上記脂肪族炭化水素基に用いられる炭素原子数1~30の直鎖又は分岐の鎖状アルキル基、炭素原子数3~30のシクロアルキル基及び炭素原子数4~30のシクロアルキルアルキル基としては、X1等に用いられるアルキル基として用いられるものと同様とすることができる。
Here, as the aliphatic hydrocarbon group substituting the hydrogen atom in the aromatic ring, one having 1 to 30 carbon atoms can be used, and a linear or branched chain alkyl having 1 to 30 carbon atoms can be used. Examples thereof include a group, an alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms, and a cycloalkylalkyl group having 4 to 30 carbon atoms.
As the linear or branched chain alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, the cycloalkyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms, and the cycloalkylalkyl group having 4 to 30 carbon atoms used in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group. , X 1 and the like used as an alkyl group.
 上記炭素原子数2~30のアルケニル基としては、例えば、ビニル基、2-プロペニル基、3-ブテニル基、2-ブテニル基、4-ペンテニル基、3-ペンテニル基、2-ヘキセニル基、3-ヘキセニル基、5-ヘキセニル基、2-ヘプテニル基、3-ヘプテニル基、4-ヘプテニル基、3-オクテニル基、3-ノネニル基、4-デセニル基、3-ウンデセニル基、4-ドデセニル基、3-シクロヘキセニル基、2,5-シクロヘキサジエニル-1-メチル基、及び4,8,12-テトラデカトリエニルアリル基等が挙げられる。 Examples of the alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms include a vinyl group, a 2-propenyl group, a 3-butenyl group, a 2-butenyl group, a 4-pentenyl group, a 3-pentenyl group, a 2-hexenyl group and a 3-. Hexenyl group, 5-hexenyl group, 2-heptenyl group, 3-heptenyl group, 4-heptenyl group, 3-octenyl group, 3-nonenyl group, 4-decenyl group, 3-undecenyl group, 4-dodecenyl group, 3- Cyclohexenyl groups, 2,5-cyclohexadienyl-1-methyl groups, 4,8,12-tetradecatrienylallyl groups and the like can be mentioned.
 上記単環芳香族炭化水素基としては、炭素原子数6~20のものが好ましく、具体的にはフェニル基、o-トリル基、m-トリル基、p-トリル基、2,4-キシリル基、p-クメニル基、メシチル基等が挙げられる。
 上記縮合環芳香族炭化水素基としては、炭素原子数10~20のものが好ましく、具体的には1-ナフチル基、2-ナフチル基、1-アンスリル基、2-アンスリル基、5-アンスリル基、1-フェナンスリル基、9-フェナンスリル基、1-アセナフチル基、2-アズレニル基、1-ピレニル基、2-トリフェニレル基、1-ピレニル基、2-ピレニル基、1-ペリレニル基、2-ペリレニル基、3-ペリレニル基、2-トレフェニレニル基、2-インデニル基、1-アセナフチレニル基、2-ナフタセニル基、2-ペンタセニル基等が挙げられる。
 上記環集合芳香族炭化水素基としては、炭素原子数12~20のものが好ましく、具体的にはo-ビフェニリル基、m-ビフェニリル基、p-ビフェニリル基、テルフェニリル基、7-(2-ナフチル)-2-ナフチル基等が挙げられる。
The monocyclic aromatic hydrocarbon group preferably has 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and specifically, a phenyl group, an o-tolyl group, an m-tolyl group, a p-tolyl group, and a 2,4-xylyl group. , P-cumenyl group, mesityl group and the like.
The fused ring aromatic hydrocarbon group preferably has 10 to 20 carbon atoms, and specifically, a 1-naphthyl group, a 2-naphthyl group, a 1-anthryl group, a 2-anthrill group, and a 5-anthryl group. , 1-phenanthryl group, 9-phenanthryl group, 1-acenaphthyl group, 2-azulenyl group, 1-pyrenyl group, 2-triphenylel group, 1-pyrenyl group, 2-pyrenyl group, 1-perylenyl group, 2-perylenyl group , 3-Perylenyl group, 2-Trefenirenyl group, 2-Indenyl group, 1-Acenaphthylenyl group, 2-Naphthalenyl group, 2-Pentasenyl group and the like.
The ring-assembled aromatic hydrocarbon group preferably has 12 to 20 carbon atoms, and specifically, an o-biphenylyl group, an m-biphenylyl group, a p-biphenylyl group, a terphenylyl group, and 7- (2-naphthyl). ) -2-Naphtyl group and the like.
 R104等で表される置換されているアリール基としては、上記のアリール基の1又は2以上の水素原子が置換基で置換された基が挙げられる。 Examples of the substituted aryl group represented by R 104 or the like include a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms of the above aryl group are substituted with a substituent.
 X1及びX2で表される置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基としては、フェニル基中の1又は2以上の水素原子が置換基で置換された基が挙げられる。 Examples of the phenyl group which may have a substituent represented by X 1 and X 2 include a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms in the phenyl group are substituted with a substituent.
 X1及びX2で表されるアルコキシ基としては、直鎖又は分岐の鎖状アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、シクロアルキルアルキル基等の飽和脂肪族炭化水素基の結合箇所側末端に、-O-が結合した炭素原子数1~30の基を用いることができる。X1及びX2で表されるアルコキシ基を構成する直鎖又は分岐の鎖状アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、シクロアルキルアルキル基としては、X1及びX2で表されるアルキル基の例として挙げた、直鎖又は分岐の鎖状アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、シクロアルキルアルキル基がそれぞれ挙げられる。
 X1及びX2で表されるアルコキシ基としては具体的にはメトキシ基、エトキシ基、n-プロポキシ基、イソプロポキシ基、n-ブトキシ基が挙げられる。
 X1及びX2で表される置換されているアルコキシ基としては、上記のアルコキシ基中の1又は2以上の水素原子が置換基で置換された基が挙げられる。
Alkoxy groups represented by X 1 and X 2 include -O- at the end of a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group such as a linear or branched chain alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, or cycloalkylalkyl group. A group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms bonded to the group can be used. Straight or branched chain alkyl group constituting the alkoxy group represented by X 1 and X 2, a cycloalkyl group, a cycloalkylalkyl group, as examples of the alkyl group represented by X 1 and X 2 In addition, linear or branched chain alkyl groups, cycloalkyl groups, and cycloalkylalkyl groups can be mentioned, respectively.
Specific examples of the alkoxy group represented by X 1 and X 2 include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, an n-propoxy group, an isopropoxy group, and an n-butoxy group.
Examples of the substituted alkoxy group represented by X 1 and X 2 include a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms in the above alkoxy groups are substituted with a substituent.
 R101等に用いられる置換基を有している直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基、R104等に用いられる置換基を有しているアリール基、X1等に用いられる置換基を有しているアルキル基及びアルコキシ基に用いられる基中の水素原子を置換する置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、ニトロ基、シアノ基、水酸基、アミノ基、カルボキシル基、メタクリロイル基、アクリロイル基、エポキシ基、ビニル基、ビニルエーテル基、メルカプト基又はイソシアネート基で置換された基が挙げられる。
 上記R101等並びにX1等で表される基中の水素原子を置換するハロゲン原子又はX1等で表されるハロゲン原子としてはフッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子又はヨウ素原子が挙げられる。
 上記R101等並びにX1等で表される基中の水素原子を置換するアミノ基は、第一級アミノ基、第二級アミノ基及び第三級アミノ基のいずれでもよい。第二級アミノ基及び第三級アミノ基としては、それぞれ第一級アミノ基(-NH)の水素原子の1つ又は2つが炭素原子数1~30の炭化水素基により置換されているものを挙げることができる。
 該炭素原子数1~30の炭化水素基としては、炭素原子数1~30の直鎖又は分岐の鎖状アルキル基、炭素原子数2~30のアルケニル基、炭素原子数3~30のシクロアルキル基及び炭素原子数4~30のシクロアルキルアルキル基等の脂肪族炭化水素基、炭素原子数6~30のアリール基及び炭素原子数7~30のアリールアルキル基等の芳香族炭化水素基等が挙げられる。
It has a linear or branched alkyl group having a substituent used for R 101 etc., an aryl group having a substituent used for R 104 etc., and a substituent used for X 1 etc. Examples of the substituent that replaces the hydrogen atom in the group used for the alkyl group and the alkoxy group include a halogen atom, a nitro group, a cyano group, a hydroxyl group, an amino group, a carboxyl group, a methacryloyl group, an acryloyl group, an epoxy group and a vinyl group. , Vinyl ether group, mercapto group or group substituted with isocyanate group.
The halogen atom represented by halogen atom or X 1 or the like to replace a hydrogen atom in the group represented by R 101 and the like as well as X 1 and fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or an iodine atom.
The amino group that replaces the hydrogen atom in the group represented by R 101 and the like and X 1 and the like may be any of a primary amino group, a secondary amino group and a tertiary amino group. As the secondary amino group and the tertiary amino group, one or two hydrogen atoms of the primary amino group (-NH 2 ) are substituted with a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, respectively. Can be mentioned.
The hydrocarbon group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms includes a linear or branched chain alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, and a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms. A group and an aliphatic hydrocarbon group such as a cycloalkylalkyl group having 4 to 30 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, an aromatic hydrocarbon group such as an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, and the like. Can be mentioned.
 上記脂肪族炭化水素基に用いられる炭素原子数1~30の脂肪族炭化水素基としては、R104等に用いられるアリール基において、芳香環中の水素原子を置換する脂肪族炭化水素基として挙げたものを用いることができる。  Examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms used in the above aliphatic hydrocarbon group, in the aryl group used in R 104 or the like, mentioned as the aliphatic hydrocarbon group substituting for a hydrogen atom in the aromatic ring Can be used.
 上記芳香族炭化水素基として用いられるアリール基としては、R104等に用いられるアリール基と同様とすることができる。
 上記芳香族炭化水素基として用いられるアリールアルキル基としては、アルキル基の水素原子が、アリール基により置換された7~30の炭素原子を有する基を意味する。ここで、アリールアルキル基を構成するアルキル基としては、X1等に用いられるアルキル基として用いられるものと同様とすることができる。また、アリールアルキル基を構成するアリール基としては、R104等に用いられるアリール基と同様とすることができる。アリールアルキル基としては、例えば、ベンジル基、α-メチルベンジル基、α,α-ジメチルベンジル基、フェニルエチル基及びナフチルプロピル基等が挙げられる。
The aryl group used as the aromatic hydrocarbon group can be the same as the aryl group used for R 104 and the like.
The arylalkyl group used as the aromatic hydrocarbon group means a group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms in which the hydrogen atom of the alkyl group is substituted with the aryl group. Here, the alkyl group constituting the arylalkyl group can be the same as that used as the alkyl group used for X 1 and the like. Further, the aryl group constituting the arylalkyl group can be the same as the aryl group used for R 104 and the like. Examples of the arylalkyl group include a benzyl group, an α-methylbenzyl group, an α, α-dimethylbenzyl group, a phenylethyl group, a naphthylpropyl group and the like.
 上記第二級アミノ基としては、例えば、N-メチルアミノ基、N-エチルアミノ基及びN-n-ブチルアミノ基等を挙げることができる。
 上記第三級アミノ基としては、N,N-ジメチルアミノ基、N,N-ジエチルアミノ基及びN,N-ジ-n-ブチルアミノ基、N,N-エチルフェニル等を挙げることができる。
Examples of the secondary amino group include an N-methylamino group, an N-ethylamino group, an Nn-butylamino group and the like.
Examples of the tertiary amino group include N, N-dimethylamino group, N, N-diethylamino group, N, N-di-n-butylamino group, N, N-ethylphenyl and the like.
 なお、本明細書において、所定の炭素原子数の基の水素原子が炭素原子を含む置換基により置換される場合、当該置換基の炭素原子も含めて所定の炭素原子数の規定を満たすものとする。したがって、炭素原子数1~30の炭化水素基が、その基中の水素原子が置換基により置換されている場合、炭素原子数1~30とは、水素原子が置換された後の炭素原子数を指し、水素原子が置換される前の基の炭素原子数を指すのではない。 In the present specification, when a hydrogen atom of a group having a predetermined number of carbon atoms is replaced by a substituent containing a carbon atom, the specification of the predetermined number of carbon atoms including the carbon atom of the substituent shall be satisfied. To do. Therefore, when a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms has a hydrogen atom in the group substituted with a substituent, the number of carbon atoms 1 to 30 means the number of carbon atoms after the hydrogen atom has been substituted. It does not refer to the number of carbon atoms in the group before the hydrogen atom is replaced.
 上記特定ピロメテン化合物としては、式(I)、式(I-1)又は(I-2)として、以下の構成の1又は2以上を満たす錯体化合物を用いることが、光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を一層容易に得られるため好ましい。以下に記載されたいずれの好ましい構成も任意に複数組み合わせることができる。 As the specific pyrromethene compound, it is preferable to use a complex compound satisfying 1 or 2 or more of the following constitutions as the formula (I), the formula (I-1) or the (I-2), which is excellent in light absorption and foreign matter. It is preferable because a cured product having a small amount of water can be obtained more easily. Any or more of any of the preferred configurations described below can be combined.
 化合物の入手容易性や、光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を一層容易に得られる点から、式(I)のR101、R103、R105、R107、式(I-1)のR201、R203、R205、R207、及び(I-2)のR301、R303、R305、R307、R401、R403、R405及びR407としては、置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基が好ましく、置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数1~15のアルキル基が好ましく、置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数1~8のアルキル基がより好ましく、置換基を有していてもよい炭素原子数1~3のアルキル基が特に好ましく、置換基を有していてもよいメチル基若しくはエチル基がとりわけ好ましく、置換基を有していてもよいメチル基が最も好ましい。
 また、化合物の入手容易性の点や光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない点から、式(I)のR101、R103、R105、R107、式(I-1)のR201、R203、R205、R207、及び(I-2)のR301、R303、R305、R307、R401、R403、R405及びR407として表される直鎖若しくは分岐鎖のアルキル基が無置換であることも好ましい。
R 101 , R 103 , R 105 , R 107 , and formula (I-1) of the formula (I) are obtained from the viewpoint of easy availability of the compound and the more easily obtained a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances. R 201 , R 203 , R 205 , R 207 , and (I-2) R 301 , R 303 , R 305 , R 307 , R 401 , R 403 , R 405, and R 407 have substituents. Alkyl groups having 1 to 20 carbon atoms may be preferable, alkyl groups having 1 to 15 carbon atoms may have substituents, and alkyl groups may have substituents. Alkyl groups of 1 to 8 are more preferable, alkyl groups having 1 to 3 carbon atoms which may have a substituent are particularly preferable, and methyl group or ethyl group which may have a substituent is particularly preferable. The methyl group, which may have a substituent, is most preferable.
Further, from the viewpoint of easy availability of the compound, excellent light absorption, and few foreign substances, R 101 , R 103 , R 105 , R 107 of the formula (I), R 201 , R of the formula (I-1). Linear or branched alkyl groups represented as 203 , R 205 , R 207 , and (I-2) R 301 , R 303 , R 305 , R 307 , R 401 , R 403 , R 405 and R 407. Is also preferably unsubstituted.
 化合物の入手容易性や光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を一層容易に得られる点から、式(I)のR102、R106、式(I-1)のR202、R206、及び式(I-2)のR302、R306、R402、R406で表される直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基としては、炭素原子数1~20が好ましく、炭素原子数1~15がより好ましく、炭素原子数2~10が更に好ましく、炭素原子数3~10が更に一層好ましく、炭素原子数3~8が特に好ましい。
 また、式(I)のR102、R106、式(I-1)のR202、R206、及び式(I-2)のR302、R306、R402、R406で表される直鎖若しくは分岐の鎖状アルキル基は、無置換のアルキル基であることが好ましい。化合物の入手容易性や光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を一層容易に得られるからである。
 式(I)のR102、R106、式(I-1)のR202、R206、及び式(I-2)のR302、R306、R402、R406で表されるアルキル基が分岐鎖状であることが組成物の分散安定性の点で好ましい。
 式(I)のR102、R106及び式(I-1)のR202、R206が直鎖状であることは、化合物の入手容易性や光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を一層容易に得られる点で好ましい。
R 102 , R 106 of formula (I), R 202 , R 206 of formula (I-1), from the viewpoint that a cured product having excellent availability of compounds and light absorption and few foreign substances can be obtained more easily. The linear or branched alkyl group represented by R 302 , R 306 , R 402 , and R 406 of the formula (I-2) is preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms. More preferably, the number of carbon atoms is further preferably 2 to 10, the number of carbon atoms is even more preferably 3 to 10, and the number of carbon atoms is particularly preferably 3 to 8.
Further, it is directly represented by R 102 and R 106 of the formula (I), R 202 and R 206 of the formula (I-1), and R 302 , R 306 , R 402 and R 406 of the formula (I-2). The chain or branched chain alkyl group is preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group. This is because a cured product having excellent availability and light absorption of the compound and few foreign substances can be obtained more easily.
The alkyl groups represented by R 102 and R 106 of the formula (I), R 202 and R 206 of the formula (I-1), and R 302 , R 306 , R 402 and R 406 of the formula (I-2) are A branched chain is preferable from the viewpoint of dispersion stability of the composition.
The fact that R 102 and R 106 of the formula (I) and R 202 and R 206 of the formula (I-1) are linear means that a cured product having excellent compound availability and light absorption and few foreign substances can be obtained. It is preferable because it can be obtained more easily.
 化合物の入手容易性や光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を一層容易に得られる点から、式(I)のR104、式(I-1)のR204、及び(I-2)のR304、R404としては、水素原子、炭素原子数1~30の置換基を有していてもよい直鎖又は分岐状のアルキル基、又は炭素原子数6~30の置換基を有していてもよいアリール基が挙げられる。当該アルキル基及び当該アリール基の炭素原子数の上限は、20以下であることが好ましく、10以下であることが更に好ましい。
 また、式(I)のR104、式(I-1)のR204、及び(I-2)のR304、R404が水素原子又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基であることが好ましい。化合物の入手容易性や光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を一層容易に得られるからである。
 更に、式(I)のR104、式(I-1)のR204、及び(I-2)のR304、R404で表されるアリール基としては化合物の入手容易性や光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を一層容易に得られる点から、単環芳香族炭化水素基が好ましく、単環芳香環から水素原子を1つ除いた基又はその基に含まれる芳香環中の水素原子がアルキル基により置換された基が特に好ましく、とりわけ、単環芳香環から水素原子を1つ除いた基が好ましい。具体的にはフェニル基、トリル基、キシリル基、エチルフェニル基が好ましく、フェニル基が最も好ましい。
 また、式(I-1)においては、R204が、置換基を有している場合があるアリール基であることが好ましく、なかでも、無置換又は置換アミノ基により置換されたフェニル基であることが好ましい。式(I-1)において、R204に用いられるフェニル基中の水素原子を置換する置換アミノ基としては、第三級アミノ基であることが好ましく、特に、アミノ基の水素原子の2つが、炭素原子数1~10の直鎖若しくは分岐の鎖状アルキル基により置換されている基、又は、アミノ基の水素原子の2つが、炭素原子数1~10の直鎖若しくは分岐の鎖状アルキル基及び炭素原子数6~10のアリール基により置換されている基であることが好ましい。上記特定ピロメテン化合物は、組成物中の分散安定性に優れたものとなるからである。
 式(I-2)においては、R304及びR404が水素原子であることが好ましい。上記特定ピロメテン化合物は、組成物中の分散安定性に優れたものとなるからである。
R 104 of formula (I), R 204 of formula (I-1), and (I-2) from the viewpoint that a cured product having excellent availability of compounds and light absorption and few foreign substances can be obtained more easily. R 304 and R 404 have a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, or a substituent having 6 to 30 carbon atoms. Aryl groups may be mentioned. The upper limit of the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group and the aryl group is preferably 20 or less, and more preferably 10 or less.
Further, R 104 of the formula (I), R 204 of the formula (I-1), and R 304 and R 404 of the formula (I-2) are aryl groups which may have a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Is preferable. This is because a cured product having excellent availability and light absorption of the compound and few foreign substances can be obtained more easily.
Further, as the aryl group represented by R 104 of the formula (I), R 204 of the formula (I-1), and R 304 and R 404 of the formula (I-2), the availability of the compound and the light absorption property are improved. A monocyclic aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferable from the viewpoint that an excellent cured product with few foreign substances can be obtained more easily, and the group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the monocyclic aromatic ring or the hydrogen contained in the group thereof. A group in which an atom is substituted with an alkyl group is particularly preferable, and a group in which one hydrogen atom is removed from a monocyclic aromatic ring is particularly preferable. Specifically, a phenyl group, a tolyl group, a xsilyl group, and an ethylphenyl group are preferable, and a phenyl group is most preferable.
Further, in the formula (I-1), R 204 is preferably an aryl group that may have a substituent, and among them, a phenyl group that is unsubstituted or substituted with a substituted amino group. Is preferable. In the formula (I-1), the substituted amino group for substituting the hydrogen atom in the phenyl group used in R 204 is preferably a tertiary amino group, and in particular, two hydrogen atoms of the amino group are used. A group substituted with a linear or branched chain alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or two hydrogen atoms of an amino group are linear or branched chain alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. And a group substituted with an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. This is because the specific pyrromethene compound has excellent dispersion stability in the composition.
In formula (I-2), it is preferable that R 304 and R 404 are hydrogen atoms. This is because the specific pyrromethene compound has excellent dispersion stability in the composition.
 式(I-1)で表される化合物として、X1等は化合物の入手容易性や異物が少ない硬化物が得やすい点からハロゲン原子が好ましく、とりわけフッ素原子であることが好ましい。
 式(I-2)で表される化合物として、M3は入手容易性や光吸収性及び分散安定性に優れる点から、Zn、Cu、Ni又はCoであるものが特に好ましく、Zn又はCoがとりわけ好ましく、Coが最も好ましい。
As the compound represented by the formula (I-1), X 1 and the like are preferably halogen atoms, and particularly preferably fluorine atoms, from the viewpoints of easy availability of the compound and easy availability of a cured product with few foreign substances.
As the compound represented by the formula (I-2), M 3 is particularly preferably Zn, Cu, Ni or Co from the viewpoint of easy availability, light absorption and dispersion stability, and Zn or Co is preferable. Especially preferable, Co is the most preferable.
 式(I)で表される化合物の中でも、異物が少ない硬化物が得やすく光吸収性に優れた硬化物の製造容易性の点から、特に式(I-2)で表される化合物が好ましい。とりわけ上記の点から、式(I-2)で表される化合物であって下記要件(a)、要件(b)、要件(c)又は要件(d)を満たすことが好ましく、要件(a)~(d)の少なくとも2以上を満たすことが好ましく、要件(a)~(d)のうち少なくとも3以上を満たすことが更に好ましく、要件(a)~(d)のすべて満たすことが最も好ましい。要件(a)~(d)のいずれの要件も任意に複数組み合わせることができ、またこれらのいずれの要件も上述した好ましい構成のいずれかと任意に複数組み合わせることができる。
 要件(a)R302及びR306並びにR402及びR406が、それぞれ独立に、炭素原子数1~20の置換基を有していてもよい直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基である。
 要件(b)R301、R303、R305及びR307、並びに、R401、R403、R405及びR407が、それぞれ独立に、炭素原子数1~20の置換基を有していてもよい直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基である。
 要件(c)R304及びR404が、水素原子である。
 要件(d)M3がCoである。
Among the compounds represented by the formula (I), the compound represented by the formula (I-2) is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of easy production of a cured product having a small amount of foreign matter and excellent light absorption. .. In particular, from the above points, it is preferable that the compound represented by the formula (I-2) satisfies the following requirements (a), requirement (b), requirement (c) or requirement (d), and the requirement (a) It is preferable that at least 2 or more of the requirements (d) are satisfied, it is more preferable that at least 3 or more of the requirements (a) to (d) are satisfied, and it is most preferable that all of the requirements (a) to (d) are satisfied. Any plurality of requirements (a) to (d) can be arbitrarily combined, and any plurality of these requirements can be arbitrarily combined with any of the above-mentioned preferable configurations.
Requirement (a) R 302 and R 306 and R 402 and R 406 are linear or branched alkyl groups which may independently have a substituent having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
Requirement (b) Even if R 301 , R 303 , R 305 and R 307 , and R 401 , R 403 , R 405 and R 407 each independently have a substituent having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. A good linear or branched alkyl group.
Requirement (c) R 304 and R 404 are hydrogen atoms.
Requirement (d) M 3 is Co.
 <例示化合物>
 一般式(I-1)で示される化合物としては、次の例示化合物(1)~(16)等が挙げられる。
<Example compound>
Examples of the compound represented by the general formula (I-1) include the following exemplified compounds (1) to (16).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000010
 一般式(I-2)で示される化合物としては、次の例示化合物(17)~(42)等が挙げられる。 Examples of the compound represented by the general formula (I-2) include the following exemplified compounds (17) to (42).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000011
 特定ピロメテン化合物の製造方法は、特に限定されないが、例えば、ピロメテン構造の化合物の合成方法としては、特開2011-174036号公報に記載の方法を用いることができ、2量体の特定ピロメテン化合物の合成方法としては、特開2006-189751号公報に記載の方法を用いることができる。 The method for producing the specific pyrromethene compound is not particularly limited, but for example, as a method for synthesizing a compound having a pyrromethene structure, the method described in JP-A-2011-174036 can be used, and a dimer of the specific pyrromethene compound can be used. As the synthesis method, the method described in JP-A-2006-189751 can be used.
 特定ピロメテン化合物は、450nm以上550nm未満に最大吸収波長を有することが好ましい。450nm以上550nm未満に最大吸収波長を有するとは、380nm以上780nm以下の波長範囲における最大吸収波長が、450nm以上550nm未満に含まれることをいうものとすることができる。特定ピロメテン化合物の最大吸収波長は470nm以上530nm以下であることが好ましく、なかでも、480nm以上510nm以下であることが好ましく、485nm以上500nm以下であることがより好ましい。青色光及び緑色光の色純度に優れたものとすることが容易であり、更に、色強度の低下の少ないものとなるからである。
 また、異物が少なく光吸収性に優れた硬化物を得ることができるとの効果をより効果的に得ることができるからである。
The specific pyrromethene compound preferably has a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more and less than 550 nm. Having a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more and less than 550 nm can mean that the maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 380 nm or more and 780 nm or less is included in 450 nm or more and less than 550 nm. The maximum absorption wavelength of the specific pyrromethene compound is preferably 470 nm or more and 530 nm or less, more preferably 480 nm or more and 510 nm or less, and more preferably 485 nm or more and 500 nm or less. This is because it is easy to make the color purity of blue light and green light excellent, and further, the decrease in color intensity is small.
Further, it is possible to more effectively obtain the effect that a cured product having less foreign matter and excellent light absorption can be obtained.
 特定ピロメテン化合物等の染料の最大吸収波長は以下の方法で測定できる。
(1)溶剤に染料を溶解し、染料溶液を調製する。
(2)染料溶液を、石英セル(光路長10mm、厚み1.25mm)に充填し、分光光度計(例えば、日本分光製可視紫外吸光度計V-670等)を用いて透過率を測定する。
 なお、染料溶液の濃度は、最大吸収波長が正確に確認できる濃度であれば問題はなく、例えば、最大吸収波長となる波長における透過率が5%程度(例えば、3%以上7%以下)となるように調整することができる。
 上記溶剤としては、染料を溶解可能であり、最大吸収波長のシフトが少ない等、各染料の透過スペクトルを精度よく測定可能ものであれば問題はなく、例えば、クロロホルムを用いることができる。また、クロロホルムに溶解しない染料については、他の溶剤を用いることができる。
 染料溶液の透過スペクトルは、予め溶剤単体での透過スペクトルを測定し、染料溶液の透過スペクトルから溶剤の透過スペクトルを差し引いて補正したものを用いる。
 上記染料が2種類以上の染料を含む場合には、それぞれの染料を用いて染料溶液を調製する。
The maximum absorption wavelength of a dye such as a specific pyrromethene compound can be measured by the following method.
(1) Dissolve the dye in a solvent to prepare a dye solution.
(2) The dye solution is filled in a quartz cell (optical path length 10 mm, thickness 1.25 mm), and the transmittance is measured using a spectrophotometer (for example, a visible ultraviolet absorptiometer V-670 manufactured by JASCO Corporation).
There is no problem with the concentration of the dye solution as long as the maximum absorption wavelength can be confirmed accurately. For example, the transmittance at the wavelength that becomes the maximum absorption wavelength is about 5% (for example, 3% or more and 7% or less). Can be adjusted to be.
As the solvent, there is no problem as long as the dye can be dissolved, the shift of the maximum absorption wavelength is small, and the transmission spectrum of each dye can be measured accurately. For example, chloroform can be used. Further, for the dye that does not dissolve in chloroform, another solvent can be used.
As the transmission spectrum of the dye solution, the transmission spectrum of the solvent alone is measured in advance, and the transmission spectrum of the solvent is subtracted from the transmission spectrum of the dye solution to correct the transmission spectrum.
When the above dyes contain two or more kinds of dyes, a dye solution is prepared using each dye.
 本発明の組成物は特定ピロメテン化合物を1種又は2種以上含有するものである。特定ピロメテン化合物の含有量は、異物が少なく、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を得ることができる量であれば問題はなく、上記組成物の用途等に応じて適宜設定されるものであるが、組成物の固形分100質量部中に、0.01質量部以上20質量部以下とすることができ、0.01質量部以上5質量部以下であることがより好ましく、なかでも特に、0.1質量部以上5質量部以下が好ましい。上記含有量が上述の範囲であることで、異物が少なく、上記組成物を用いて得られる硬化物は、光吸収性に優れたものとなる。
 なお、固形分とは、溶剤以外の全ての成分を含むものである。
 また、上記組成物が特定ピロメテン化合物として2種類以上の特定ピロメテン化合物を含む場合には、上記特定ピロメテン化合物の含有量は、特定ピロメテン化合物の合計含有量をいうものである。
 また、本明細書において特に断りがない場合には、含有量は質量基準である。
The composition of the present invention contains one or more specific pyrromethene compounds. The content of the specific pyrromethene compound is not a problem as long as it contains a small amount of foreign matter and can obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption, and is appropriately set according to the use of the above composition and the like. The solid content of the composition can be 0.01 part by mass or more and 20 parts by mass or less, more preferably 0.01 part by mass or more and 5 parts by mass or less, and particularly 0. .Preferably 1 part by mass or more and 5 parts by mass or less. When the content is in the above range, there are few foreign substances, and the cured product obtained by using the above composition has excellent light absorption.
The solid content includes all components other than the solvent.
When the composition contains two or more kinds of specific pyrromethene compounds as the specific pyrromethene compound, the content of the specific pyrromethene compound means the total content of the specific pyrromethene compound.
Unless otherwise specified in the present specification, the content is based on mass.
 上記特定ピロメテン化合物の含有量としては、組成物100質量部中に、0.002質量部以上であることが好ましく、なかでも、0.002質量部以上4質量部以下であることが好ましく、特に、0.02質量部以上4質量部以下であることが好ましい。異物が少なく、光吸収性に優れた硬化物が得られるとの効果を効果的に発揮でき、光吸収性に優れた光学フィルタを得ることが容易となるからである。
 特定ピロメテン化合物の含有量は、異物が少なく、光吸収性に優れた硬化物が得られるとの効果を効果的に発揮できるとの観点からは、組成物100質量部中に、0.002質量部以上1.8質量部以下であることが好ましい。
The content of the specific pyrromethene compound is preferably 0.002 parts by mass or more, and more preferably 0.002 parts by mass or more and 4 parts by mass or less in 100 parts by mass of the composition. , 0.02 parts by mass or more and preferably 4 parts by mass or less. This is because the effect of obtaining a cured product having few foreign substances and excellent light absorption can be effectively exhibited, and it becomes easy to obtain an optical filter having excellent light absorption.
The content of the specific pyrromethene compound is 0.002% by mass in 100 parts by mass of the composition from the viewpoint that the effect of obtaining a cured product having few foreign substances and excellent light absorption can be effectively exhibited. It is preferably 1 part or more and 1.8 parts by mass or less.
2.カチオン重合性成分
 本発明の組成物は、カチオン重合性成分を含むものである。
 上記カチオン重合性成分は、酸発生剤から発生した酸により重合反応又は架橋反応を起こす化合物であればよく、特に限定されるものではない。
 このようなカチオン重合性成分としては、例えば、エポキシ化合物及びオキセタン化合物等の環状エーテル化合物、環状ラクトン化合物、環状アセタール化合物、環状チオエーテル化合物、スピロオルトエステル化合物並びにビニルエーテル化合物等を挙げることができる。カチオン重合性成分として、これらから選ばれる1種又は2種以上を使用することができる。
 なお、例えエポキシ基等カチオン重合性基を有していても染料又は酸発生剤に該当するものはそれぞれ染料又は酸発生剤に該当するものとし、カチオン重合性成分には含めない。
2. 2. Cationic Polymerizable Component The composition of the present invention contains a cationically polymerizable component.
The cationically polymerizable component is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound that causes a polymerization reaction or a cross-linking reaction with an acid generated from an acid generator.
Examples of such cationically polymerizable components include cyclic ether compounds such as epoxy compounds and oxetane compounds, cyclic lactone compounds, cyclic acetal compounds, cyclic thioether compounds, spiroorthoester compounds, and vinyl ether compounds. As the cationically polymerizable component, one or more selected from these can be used.
Even if it has a cationically polymerizable group such as an epoxy group, those corresponding to a dye or an acid generator shall correspond to a dye or an acid generator, respectively, and are not included in the cationically polymerizable component.
 本発明においては、一層光吸収性に優れた硬化物を製造可能な組成物が一層得やすい点から、上記カチオン重合性成分として環状エーテル化合物を用いることが好ましい。
 環状エーテル化合物の含有量は、カチオン重合性成分100質量部中に、50質量部以上であることが好ましく、70質量部以上であることがより好ましく、90質量部以上であることが更に好ましく、95質量部以上であることが特に好ましい。光吸収性に優れた硬化物の製造が一層容易となるからである。
In the present invention, it is preferable to use a cyclic ether compound as the cationically polymerizable component from the viewpoint that a composition capable of producing a cured product having more excellent light absorption can be obtained more easily.
The content of the cyclic ether compound is preferably 50 parts by mass or more, more preferably 70 parts by mass or more, and further preferably 90 parts by mass or more in 100 parts by mass of the cationically polymerizable component. It is particularly preferable that the amount is 95 parts by mass or more. This is because it becomes easier to produce a cured product having excellent light absorption.
 上記環状エーテル化合物としては、エポキシ化合物及びオキセタン化合物が好ましく、特に、エポキシ化合物が好ましい。エポキシ化合物を含むことで、上記組成物は、光吸収性に優れた硬化物の製造が一層容易となるからである。 As the cyclic ether compound, an epoxy compound and an oxetane compound are preferable, and an epoxy compound is particularly preferable. This is because the inclusion of the epoxy compound makes it easier to produce a cured product having excellent light absorption.
 上記エポキシ化合物には、エポキシ基を含む全ての化合物が含まれるものとする。例えば、エポキシ基およびオキセタン基の両者を含む化合物は、エポキシ化合物に該当するものとなる。
 このようなエポキシ化合物としては、例えば、芳香族エポキシ化合物、脂環式エポキシ化合物、脂肪族エポキシ化合物等を挙げることができる。
The epoxy compound shall include all compounds containing an epoxy group. For example, a compound containing both an epoxy group and an oxetane group corresponds to an epoxy compound.
Examples of such an epoxy compound include aromatic epoxy compounds, alicyclic epoxy compounds, and aliphatic epoxy compounds.
(1)芳香族エポキシ化合物
 上記芳香族エポキシ化合物は、芳香環及びエポキシ基を有し、シクロアルケンオキサイド構造を有しないものである。
 このような芳香族エポキシ化合物としては、例えば、少なくとも1個の芳香環を有する多価フェノール類又はそのアルキレンオキサイド付加物のポリグリシジルエーテル、例えばビスフェノールA、ビスフェノールF、又はこれらにアルキレンオキサイドを付加した化合物のグリシジルエーテル、及びエポキシノボラック樹脂(フェノールノボラック型エポキシ化合物)、レゾルシノールやハイドロキノン、カテコール等の2個以上のフェノール性水酸基を有する芳香族化合物のグリシジルエーテル等が挙げられる。
 また、ベンゼンジメタノールやベンゼンジエタノール、ベンゼンジブタノール等のアルコール性水酸基を2個以上有する芳香族化合物のポリグリシジルエーテル;フタル酸、テレフタル酸、トリメリット酸等の2個以上のカルボン酸を有する多塩基酸芳香族化合物のポリグリシジルエステル;安息香酸やトルイル酸、ナフトエ酸等の安息香酸類のグリシジルエステル;スチレンオキサイド又はジビニルベンゼンのエポキシ化物等が挙げられる。
 本発明においては、フェノール類のポリグリシジルエーテル、アルコール性水酸基を2個以上有する芳香族化合物のポリグリシジルエーテル、多価フェノール類のポリグリシジルエーテル、安息香酸類のグリシジルエステル及び多塩基酸類のポリグリシジルエステルが好ましく、特に、多価フェノール類のポリグリシジルエーテルが好ましく、以下の式(1)で表される化合物が好ましい。このような化合物を含むことで、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を製造可能な組成物を得ることが容易となるからである。硬化性の点から、式(1)中のmaは例えば式(1)で表される化合物のエポキシ当量が1200以下となる数であることが好ましく、1000以下となる数であることがより好ましく、500以下となる数であることが更に好ましく、300以下となる数であることがより好ましく、200以下となる数であってもよい。
(1) Aromatic Epoxy Compound The aromatic epoxy compound has an aromatic ring and an epoxy group, and does not have a cycloalkene oxide structure.
As such an aromatic epoxy compound, for example, a polyhydric phenol having at least one aromatic ring or a polyglycidyl ether of an alkylene oxide adduct thereof, for example, bisphenol A, bisphenol F, or alkylene oxide is added thereto. Examples thereof include glycidyl ether of the compound, epoxy novolac resin (phenol novolac type epoxy compound), and glycidyl ether of an aromatic compound having two or more phenolic hydroxyl groups such as resorcinol, hydroquinone, and catechol.
In addition, polyglycidyl ether of an aromatic compound having two or more alcoholic hydroxyl groups such as benzenedimethanol, benzenediethanol, and benzenedibutanol; many having two or more carboxylic acids such as phthalic acid, terephthalic acid, and trimellitic acid. Polyglycidyl esters of basic acid aromatic compounds; glycidyl esters of benzoic acids such as benzoic acid, toluic acid and naphthoic acid; epoxidized products of styrene oxide or divinylbenzene and the like.
In the present invention, polyglycidyl ethers of phenols, polyglycidyl ethers of aromatic compounds having two or more alcoholic hydroxyl groups, polyglycidyl ethers of polyhydric phenols, glycidyl esters of benzoic acids and polyglycidyl esters of polybasic acids Is preferable, and polyglycidyl ether, which is a polyhydric phenol, is preferable, and a compound represented by the following formula (1) is preferable. This is because the inclusion of such a compound makes it easy to obtain a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption. From the viewpoint of curability, ma in the formula (1) is preferably a number such that the epoxy equivalent of the compound represented by the formula (1) is 1200 or less, and more preferably 1000 or less. The number is more preferably 500 or less, more preferably 300 or less, and may be 200 or less.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012

(式中、R1a及びR1bはそれぞれ独立に水素原子又はメチル基を表し、maは0以上の整数を表す)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012

(In the equation, R 1a and R 1b independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and ma represents an integer of 0 or more)
 上記芳香族エポキシ化合物の含有量はカチオン重合性成分の合計100質量部中に0質量部であってもよいが、含有する場合にはカチオン重合性成分の合計100質量部中に、60質量部以下であることが好ましく、5質量部以上45質量部以下であることがより好ましく、10質量部以上40質量部以下であることが更に好ましい。この範囲とすることで光吸収性に優れた硬化物を一層製造容易となるからである。なお、本発明の組成物が多官能の芳香族エポキシ化合物を含有する場合、多官能の芳香族エポキシ化合物の好ましい量としては、上記の芳香族エポキシ化合物の量として上記で挙げた量と同様の量が挙げられる。 The content of the aromatic epoxy compound may be 0 parts by mass in a total of 100 parts by mass of the cationically polymerizable component, but when it is contained, it is 60 parts by mass in a total of 100 parts by mass of the cationically polymerizable component. It is preferably 5 parts by mass or more and 45 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 10 parts by mass or more and 40 parts by mass or less. This is because it becomes easier to produce a cured product having excellent light absorption within this range. When the composition of the present invention contains a polyfunctional aromatic epoxy compound, the preferable amount of the polyfunctional aromatic epoxy compound is the same as the amount mentioned above as the amount of the above aromatic epoxy compound. The amount can be mentioned.
(2)脂環式エポキシ化合物
 上記脂環式エポキシ化合物は、シクロアルケンオキサイド構造を有する化合物である。シクロアルケンオキサイド構造は、シクロヘキセン環含有化合物やシクロペンテン環含有化合物をそれぞれ酸化剤でエポキシ化することによって得られる、シクロヘキセンオキサイド構造やシクロペンテンオキサイド構造のように、脂肪族環とエポキシ環とが環構造の一部を共有する構造である。また、このようなシクロアルケンオキサイド構造のシクロアルカン中の水素原子を1つ除いた基をエポキシシクロアルキル基と称する場合がある。
(2) Alicyclic Epoxy Compound The alicyclic epoxy compound is a compound having a cycloalkene oxide structure. The cycloalkene oxide structure is obtained by epoxidizing a cyclohexene ring-containing compound and a cyclopentene ring-containing compound with an oxidizing agent, respectively. Like the cyclohexene oxide structure and the cyclopentene oxide structure, the aliphatic ring and the epoxy ring have a ring structure. It is a structure that shares a part. Further, a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a cycloalkane having such a cycloalkene oxide structure may be referred to as an epoxycycloalkyl group.
 上記脂環式エポキシ化合物としては、下記一般式(2)で表される化合物のような、2以上のエポキシシクロアルキル基を有する化合物を挙げることができる。このような化合物を含むことで、上記組成物は、異物が少ない組成物の形成が容易であると共に、硬化反応の進行が進みやすいという硬化性に優れたものとなるからである。また、光吸収性に優れた硬化物の製造が一層容易となるからである。 Examples of the alicyclic epoxy compound include compounds having two or more epoxycycloalkyl groups, such as the compound represented by the following general formula (2). This is because the inclusion of such a compound makes it easy to form a composition with few foreign substances and has excellent curability such that the curing reaction can easily proceed. In addition, it becomes easier to produce a cured product having excellent light absorption.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013

(式中、X5は、直接結合又は1以上の原子を有する二価の連結基を表す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013

(In the formula, X 5 represents a divalent linking group having a direct bond or one or more atoms.)
 X5で表される連結基としては、例えば、二価の炭化水素基、炭素-炭素二重結合の一部又は全部がエポキシ化されたアルケニレン基、カルボニル基、エーテル結合、エステル結合、カーボネート基、アミド基、及びこれらが複数連結した基等が挙げられる。 Examples of the linking group represented by X 5 include a divalent hydrocarbon group, an alkenylene group in which part or all of the carbon-carbon double bond is epoxidized, a carbonyl group, an ether bond, an ester bond, and a carbonate group. , Amid group, and a group in which a plurality of these are linked.
 上記二価の炭化水素基としては、直鎖若しくは分岐の、又はシクロアルキル環を有する炭素原子数1~30のアルキレン基を挙げることができる。 Examples of the divalent hydrocarbon group include a linear or branched alkylene group having a cycloalkyl ring and having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
 上記直鎖又は分岐のアルキレン基としては、炭素原子数1~30の直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基から水素原子を1つ除いた基を挙げることができる。
 上記炭素原子数1~30の直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基としては、上記式(I)中のR101に用いられる置換基を有していてもよい直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基を用いることができる。
 上記炭素原子数1~30の直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基としては、より具体的には、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、s-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、アミル基、イソアミル基、t-アミル基、ヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、イソオクチル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、t-オクチル基、ノニル基、イソノニル基、デシル基、イソデシル基、ウンデシル基、ドデシル基、テトラデシル基、ヘキサデシル基、オクタデシル基、イコシル基等を挙げることができる。
 上記二価の炭化水素基としての、炭素原子数1~30の直鎖又は分岐のアルキレン基としては、メチレン基、メチルメチレン基、ジメチルメチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基、トリメチレン基等を挙げることができる。
Examples of the linear or branched alkylene group include a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms minus one hydrogen atom.
As the linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent used for R 101 in the above formula (I) may be used. it can.
More specifically, the linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms includes a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a butyl group, an isobutyl group, an s-butyl group, and a t-butyl. Group, amyl group, isoamyl group, t-amyl group, hexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, isooctyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, t-octyl group, nonyl group, isononyl group, decyl group, isodecyl group, undecyl group, Examples thereof include a dodecyl group, a tetradecyl group, a hexadecyl group, an octadecyl group, and an icosyl group.
Examples of the linear or branched alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms as the divalent hydrocarbon group include a methylene group, a methylmethylene group, a dimethylmethylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a trimethylene group and the like. Can be done.
 上記シクロアルキル環を有する炭素原子数1~30のアルキレン基としては、シクロアルキル環を有するアルキル基から水素原子を1つ除いた基を挙げることができる。
 上記シクロアルキル環を有するアルキル基としては、シクロアルキル基及びシクロアルキルアルキル基からそれぞれ水素原子を一つ除いた基が挙げられる。
 このようなシクロアルキル基及びシクロアルキルアルキル基としては、「1.ピロメテン化合物」の項に記載の、X1等に用いられるシクロアルキル基、シクロアルキルアルキル基と同様の基を用いることができる。
 具体的には、例えば、1,2-シクロペンチレン基、1,3-シクロペンチレン基、シクロペンチリデン基、1,2-シクロヘキシレン基、1,3-シクロヘキシレン基、1,4-シクロヘキシレン基、シクロヘキシリデン基等のシクロアルキレン基(シクロアルキリデン基を含む)等が挙げられる。
Examples of the alkylene group having a cycloalkyl ring having 1 to 30 carbon atoms include a group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the alkyl group having a cycloalkyl ring.
Examples of the alkyl group having a cycloalkyl ring include a cycloalkyl group and a cycloalkylalkyl group from which one hydrogen atom has been removed.
As such a cycloalkyl group and a cycloalkylalkyl group, a group similar to the cycloalkyl group and the cycloalkylalkyl group used for X 1 and the like described in the section of "1. Pyrromethene compound" can be used.
Specifically, for example, 1,2-cyclopentylene group, 1,3-cyclopentylene group, cyclopentylidene group, 1,2-cyclohexylene group, 1,3-cyclohexylene group, 1,4- Examples thereof include a cycloalkylene group (including a cycloalkylidene group) such as a cyclohexylene group and a cyclohexylidene group.
 上記炭素-炭素二重結合の一部又は全部がエポキシ化されたアルケニレン基(以下、「エポキシ化アルケニレン基」と称する場合がある。)におけるアルケニレン基としては、炭素原子数2~30の直鎖又は分岐のアルキレン基中のエチレン基(-CH2-CH2-)を、不飽和基(-CH=CH-)に置き換えた基を挙げることができる。
 上記アルキレン基としては、上記直鎖若しくは分岐の、又はシクロアルキル環を有する炭素原子数1~30のアルキレン基を用いることができる。
 上記アルケニレン基としては、例えば、ビニレン基、プロペニレン基、1-ブテニレン基、2-ブテニレン基、ブタジエニレン基、ペンテニレン基、ヘキセニレン基、ヘプテニレン基、オクテニレン基等の炭素原子数2~8の直鎖又は分岐のアルケニレン基等が挙げられる。
The alkenylene group in the alkenylene group in which a part or all of the carbon-carbon double bond is epoxidized (hereinafter, may be referred to as "epoxidized alkenylene group") is a straight chain having 2 to 30 carbon atoms. Alternatively, a group in which the ethylene group (-CH 2- CH 2- ) in the branched alkylene group is replaced with an unsaturated group (-CH = CH-) can be mentioned.
As the alkylene group, the linear or branched alkylene group having a cycloalkyl ring and having 1 to 30 carbon atoms can be used.
Examples of the alkenylene group include a linear chain having 2 to 8 carbon atoms such as a vinylene group, a propenylene group, a 1-butenylene group, a 2-butenylene group, a butadienylene group, a pentenylene group, a hexenylene group, a heptenylene group and an octenylene group. A branched alkenylene group and the like can be mentioned.
 本発明においては、X5が連結基であることが好ましく、二価の炭化水素基、エステル結合、又はこれらが複数連結した基であることが好ましく、特に、二価の炭化水素基とエステル結合とが連結した基であることが好ましい。このような化合物を用いることで、組成物は、光吸収性に優れた硬化物の製造が一層容易となるからである。
 また、本発明においては、X5に用いられる二価の炭化水素基が、炭素原子数1~18の直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基から水素原子を1つ除いたアルキレン基であることが好ましく、炭素原子数1~8の直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基から水素原子を1つ除いたアルキレン基であることがより好ましく、炭素原子数1~5の直鎖のアルキル基から水素原子を1つ除いたアルキレン基であることが更に好ましく、特に、炭素原子数1~3の直鎖のアルキル基から水素原子を1つ除いたアルキレン基であることが好ましい。上記炭素原子数が上述の範囲内であることで、組成物は、異物が少ない硬化物が得られると共に、光吸収性に優れた硬化物の製造が一層容易なものとなるからである。
In the present invention, X 5 is preferably a linking group, preferably a divalent hydrocarbon group, an ester bond, or a group in which a plurality of these are linked, and in particular, a divalent hydrocarbon group and an ester bond. Is preferably a linked group. This is because the use of such a compound makes it easier for the composition to produce a cured product having excellent light absorption.
Further, in the present invention, the divalent hydrocarbon group used for X 5 is preferably an alkylene group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms. It is more preferable that it is an alkylene group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and one hydrogen atom is removed from the linear alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. It is more preferably an alkylene group, and particularly preferably an alkylene group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from a linear alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. This is because when the number of carbon atoms is within the above range, a cured product having less foreign substances can be obtained as the composition, and the cured product having excellent light absorption can be more easily produced.
 上記脂環式エポキシ化合物として、より具体的には、3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシルメチル-3,4-エポキシシクロヘキサンカルボキシレート、3,4-エポキシ-1-メチルシクロヘキシル-3,4-エポキシ-1-メチルヘキサンカルボキシレート、6-メチル-3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシルメチル-6-メチル-3,4-エポキシシクロヘキサンカルボキシレート、3,4-エポキシ-3-メチルシクロヘキシルメチル-3,4-エポキシ-3-メチルシクロヘキサンカルボキシレート、3,4-エポキシ-5-メチルシクロヘキシルメチル-3,4-エポキシ-5-メチルシクロヘキサンカルボキシレート、2-(3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシル-5,5-スピロ-3,4-エポキシ)シクロヘキサン-メタジオキサン、ビス(3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシルメチル)アジペート、3,4-エポキシ-6-メチルシクロヘキシルカルボキシレート、メチレンビス(3,4-エポキシシクロヘキサン)、ジシクロペンタジエンジエポキサイド、エチレンビス(3,4-エポキシシクロヘキサンカルボキシレート)、エポキシヘキサヒドロフタル酸ジオクチル、エポキシヘキサヒドロフタル酸ジ-2-エチルヘキシル、1-エポキシエチル-3,4-エポキシシクロヘキサン、1,2-エポキシ-2-エポキシエチルシクロヘキサン、3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシルメチルアクリレート、3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシルメチルメタクリレート等を挙げることができる。 More specifically, as the alicyclic epoxy compound, 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl-3,4-epoxycyclohexanecarboxylate, 3,4-epoxy-1-methylcyclohexyl-3,4-epoxy-1- Methylhexanecarboxylate, 6-methyl-3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl-6-methyl-3,4-epoxycyclohexanecarboxylate, 3,4-epoxy-3-methylcyclohexylmethyl-3,4-epoxy-3- Methylcyclohexanecarboxylate, 3,4-epoxy-5-methylcyclohexylmethyl-3,4-epoxy-5-methylcyclohexanecarboxylate, 2- (3,4-epoxycyclohexyl-5,5-spiro-3,4-) Epoxy) cyclohexane-metadioxane, bis (3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl) adipate, 3,4-epoxy-6-methylcyclohexylcarboxylate, methylenebis (3,4-epoxycyclohexane), dicyclopentadiene diepoxiside, ethylene bis (3,4-Epoxycyclohexanecarboxylate), dioctyl epoxyhexahydrophthalate, di-2-ethylhexyl epoxyhexahydrophthalate, 1-epoxyethyl-3,4-epoxycyclohexane, 1,2-epoxy-2-epoxy Examples thereof include ethylcyclohexane, 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethylacrylate, and 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethylmethacrylate.
 本発明においては、3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシルメチル-3,4-エポキシシクロヘキサンカルボキシレート及び3,4-エポキシ-1-メチルシクロヘキシル-3,4-エポキシ-1-メチルヘキサンカルボキシレート等が好ましい。このような化合物を含むことで、組成物は、異物が少ない硬化物が得られると共に、光吸収性に優れた硬化物の製造が一層容易なものとなるからである。 In the present invention, 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl-3,4-epoxycyclohexanecarboxylate, 3,4-epoxy-1-methylcyclohexyl-3,4-epoxy-1-methylhexanecarboxylate and the like are preferable. By including such a compound, the composition can be obtained as a cured product having less foreign substances, and can be more easily produced as a cured product having excellent light absorption.
 上記脂環式エポキシ化合物として好適に使用できる市販品としては、例えば、特許第6103653号公報等に記載されたものを挙げることができる。 Examples of commercially available products that can be suitably used as the alicyclic epoxy compound include those described in Japanese Patent No. 6103653.
 上記脂環式エポキシ化合物の含有量は、異物が少ない硬化物が得られると共に、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を製造可能な組成物を得ることができるものであれば制限はないが、例えば、カチオン重合性成分の合計100質量部中に、20質量部以上とすることができ、30質量部以上95質量部以下であることがより好ましく、40質量部以上90質量部以下であることが更に好ましく、50質量部以上90質量部以下であることが特に好ましい。異物が少ない硬化物が得られると共に、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を製造可能な組成物を得ることが容易となるからである。本発明の組成物が多官能の脂環式エポキシ化合物を含有する場合、多官能の脂環式エポキシ化合物の好ましい量としては、上記の脂環式エポキシ化合物の量として上記で挙げた量と同様の量が挙げられる。 The content of the alicyclic epoxy compound is not limited as long as a cured product having few foreign substances can be obtained and a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption can be obtained. , 20 parts by mass or more, more preferably 30 parts by mass or more and 95 parts by mass or less, and 40 parts by mass or more and 90 parts by mass or less in the total of 100 parts by mass of the cationically polymerizable component. More preferably, it is 50 parts by mass or more and 90 parts by mass or less. This is because a cured product with few foreign substances can be obtained, and it becomes easy to obtain a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption. When the composition of the present invention contains a polyfunctional alicyclic epoxy compound, the preferable amount of the polyfunctional alicyclic epoxy compound is the same as the amount mentioned above as the amount of the above alicyclic epoxy compound. The amount of.
(3)脂肪族エポキシ化合物
 上記脂肪族エポキシ樹脂は、エポキシ基を有し、シクロアルケンオキサイド構造及び芳香環を含まないものである。
 このような脂肪族エポキシ化合物としては、例えば、脂肪族多価アルコール又はそのアルキレンオキサイド付加物のポリグリシジルエーテル;脂肪族長鎖多塩基酸のポリグリシジルエステル;グリシジルアクリレート又はグリシジルメタクリレートのビニル重合により合成したホモポリマー;グリシジルアクリレート又はグリシジルメタクリレートとその他のビニルモノマーとのビニル重合により合成したコポリマー等が挙げられる。
 代表的な化合物として、ジオールのジグリシジルエーテル、グリセリンのトリグリシジルエーテル、トリメチロールプロパンのトリグリシジルエーテル、ソルビトールのテトラグリシジルエーテル、ジペンタエリスリトールのヘキサグリシジルエーテル等の、多価アルコールのグリシジルエーテル、プロピレングリコール、トリメチロールプロパン、グリセリン等の脂肪族多価アルコールに1種又は2種以上のアルキレンオキサイドを付加することによって得られるポリエーテルポリオールのポリグリシジルエーテル、及び脂肪族長鎖二塩基酸のジグリシジルエステルが挙げられる。更に、脂肪族高級アルコールのモノグリシジルエーテル、フェノール、クレゾール、ブチルフェノール、又はこれらにアルキレンオキサイドを付加することによって得られるポリエーテルアルコールのモノグリシジルエーテル、高級脂肪酸のグリシジルエステル、エポキシ化大豆油、エポキシステアリン酸オクチル、エポキシステアリン酸ブチル及びエポキシ化ポリブタジエン等が挙げられる。
 また、上記脂肪族エポキシ化合物として、水素添加ビスフェノールAジグリシジルエーテル等の芳香族エポキシ化合物の水素添加物も用いることができる。
 上記脂肪族エポキシ化合物としては、2,2-ビス(ヒドロキシメチル)-1-ブタノールの1,2-エポキシ-4-(2-オキシラニル)シクロヘキサン付加物等の、エポキシシクロアルキル環に由来するシクロアルキル環にオキシラニル基が直接単結合で結合した構造を構成単位として有し、エポキシシクロアルキル環のエポキシ基同士が重合した構造を主鎖構造として有する化合物も用いることができる。
(3) Aliphatic Epoxy Compound The above-mentioned aliphatic epoxy resin has an epoxy group and does not contain a cycloalkene oxide structure and an aromatic ring.
Examples of such an aliphatic epoxy compound include polyglycidyl ether of an aliphatic polyvalent alcohol or an alkylene oxide adduct thereof; polyglycidyl ester of an aliphatic long-chain polybasic acid; and synthesized by vinyl polymerization of glycidyl acrylate or glycidyl methacrylate. Homopolymers; examples thereof include copolymers synthesized by vinyl polymerization of glycidyl acrylate or glycidyl methacrylate and other vinyl monomers.
Typical compounds include glycidyl ethers of polyhydric alcohols such as diglycidyl ethers of diols, triglycidyl ethers of glycerin, triglycidyl ethers of trimethylolpropane, tetraglycidyl ethers of sorbitol, and hexaglycidyl ethers of dipentaerythritol, and propylene. Polyglycidyl ether, which is a polyether polyol obtained by adding one or more alkylene oxides to aliphatic polyhydric alcohols such as glycol, trimethylolpropane, and glycerin, and diglycidyl ester of aliphatic long-chain dibasic acid. Can be mentioned. Further, monoglycidyl ether of aliphatic higher alcohol, phenol, cresol, butylphenol, or monoglycidyl ether of polyether alcohol obtained by adding alkylene oxide to these, glycidyl ester of higher fatty acid, epoxidized soybean oil, epoxy steer. Examples thereof include octyl acid, butyl epoxy stearate and epoxidized polybutadiene.
Further, as the aliphatic epoxy compound, a hydrogenated additive of an aromatic epoxy compound such as hydrogenated bisphenol A diglycidyl ether can also be used.
Examples of the aliphatic epoxy compound include cycloalkyl derived from an epoxycycloalkyl ring such as 1,2-epoxy-4- (2-oxylanyl) cyclohexane adduct of 2,2-bis (hydroxymethyl) -1-butanol. A compound having a structure in which an oxylanyl group is directly bonded to the ring by a single bond as a constituent unit and a structure in which the epoxy groups of the epoxycycloalkyl ring are polymerized as a main chain structure can also be used.
 上記脂肪族エポキシ化合物としては、下記一般式(4-1)又は式(4-2)で表される化合物を好ましく用いることができる。上記化合物を用いることで、上記組成物は異物が少ない硬化物が容易に得られるからである。 As the aliphatic epoxy compound, a compound represented by the following general formula (4-1) or formula (4-2) can be preferably used. This is because by using the above compound, a cured product having few foreign substances can be easily obtained as the above composition.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014


(式中、Y5は、二価の脂肪族炭化水素基又は該脂肪族炭化水素基中のメチレン基の1つ又は2つ以上は、酸素原子同士が隣り合わない条件で-O-で置き換わった基を示す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014


(Wherein, Y 5 is one or two or more divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group or a methylene group of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is replaced by -O- in the conditions between oxygen atoms not adjacent to each other Indicates a group.)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015


(式中、R1は、p価のアルコールからp個の水酸基(-OH)を除いた基であり、p及びqはそれぞれ1以上の整数を表す。
 pが2以上の場合、p個の構成単位qは同一でもよく、異なっていてもよい。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015


(In the formula, R 1 is a group obtained by removing p hydroxyl groups (-OH) from a p-valent alcohol, and p and q each represent an integer of 1 or more.
When p is 2 or more, the p structural units q may be the same or different. )
 式(4-1)についてまず説明する。Y5で表される二価の脂肪族炭化水素基としては、例えば、直鎖若しくは分岐の、又はシクロアルキル環を有する炭素原子数1~30のアルキレン基が挙げられる。
 また、Yで表される基は、該脂肪族炭化水素基中のメチレン基の1つ又は2つ以上は、酸素原子同士が隣り合わない条件で-O-で置き換わった基であってもよい。したがって、Yで表される基は、上記炭素原子数1~30のアルキレン基のメチレン基の1つ又は2つ以上は、-O-で置き換わった基であってもよい。
Equation (4-1) will be described first. Examples of the divalent aliphatic hydrocarbon group represented by Y 5 include a linear or branched alkylene group having a cycloalkyl ring and having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
Further, the group represented by Y 5 is one or two or more methylene groups in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a group together an oxygen atom is replaced by -O- under conditions nonadjacent Good. Accordingly, the groups represented by Y 5 is one or two or more methylene groups of the alkylene group of the 1 to 30 carbon atoms may be a group substituted with a -O-.
 Y5で表される直鎖若しくは分岐の、又はシクロアルキル環を有する炭素原子数1~30のアルキレン基としては、上記X5で表される直鎖若しくは分岐の、又はシクロアルキル環を有する炭素原子数1~30のアルキレン基と同様の基を用いることができる。
 本発明においては、Y5が、分岐を有する基であることが好ましい。上記構造を有することで、上記組成物は、異物が少ない硬化物が得られると共に、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を製造可能な組成物を得ることが一層容易となると共に、基材との密着性が良好な硬化物を得ることができるからである。
 本発明においては、Y5が、直鎖若しくは分岐の、又はシクロアルキル環を有する炭素原子数2~30のアルキレン基或いは該アルキレン基中のメチレン基が-O-で置換された基であることが好ましく、直鎖若しくは分岐の、又はシクロアルキル環を有する炭素原子数3~28のアルキレン基或いは該アルキレン基中のメチレン基が-O-で置換された基であることがより好ましく、特に、直鎖若しくは分岐の、又はシクロアルキル環を有する炭素原子数4~26のアルキレン基或いは該アルキレン基中のメチレン基が-O-で置換された基であることが好ましい。また、Y5が、直鎖又は分岐のアルキレン基であり、メチレン基が-O-で置き換わっていない場合、その炭素原子数は、4~10であることが好ましい。上記Y5が、直鎖または分岐であり、アルキレン基中のメチレン基が-O-で置き換わっている基である場合、Y5は、炭素原子数が10~26であり、ポリアルキレングリコールから両末端の水酸基を除いた構造を有する基であることが好ましく、なかでも、炭素原子数が10~26であり、ポリエチレングリコールまたはポリプロピレングリコールから両末端の水酸基を除いた構造を有する基であることが好ましい。Y5が、シクロアルキル環を有するアルキレン基である場合、Y5は、炭素原子数が13~20であり、シクロアルキル環を2つ有するアルキレン基であることが好ましく、特に、下記一般式(3)で表される基であることが好ましい。Y5が上述の構造を有することで、上記組成物は、異物が少ない硬化物が得られると共に、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を製造可能な組成物を得ることが一層容易となると共に、基材との密着性が良好な硬化物を得ることができるからである。
The linear or branched alkylene group represented by Y 5 or the alkylene group having a cycloalkyl ring having 1 to 30 carbon atoms includes the linear or branched carbon represented by X 5 or a carbon having a cycloalkyl ring. A group similar to the alkylene group having 1 to 30 atoms can be used.
In the present invention, Y 5 is preferably a branched group. By having the above structure, the above composition can obtain a cured product having less foreign substances, and more easily obtain a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption, and can be used with a base material. This is because a cured product having good adhesion can be obtained.
In the present invention, Y 5 is a linear or branched alkylene group having a cycloalkyl ring and having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, or a group in which the methylene group in the alkylene group is substituted with —O—. Is preferable, and it is more preferable that it is a linear or branched alkylene group having a cycloalkyl ring and having 3 to 28 carbon atoms, or a group in which the methylene group in the alkylene group is substituted with —O—, and particularly preferably. It is preferably a linear or branched alkylene group having a cycloalkyl ring and having 4 to 26 carbon atoms, or a group in which the methylene group in the alkylene group is substituted with —O—. When Y 5 is a linear or branched alkylene group and the methylene group is not replaced by —O—, the number of carbon atoms thereof is preferably 4 to 10. When Y 5 is a linear or branched group in which the methylene group in the alkylene group is replaced with —O—, Y 5 has 10 to 26 carbon atoms and is both from polyalkylene glycol. It is preferable that the group has a structure excluding the hydroxyl groups at the ends, and among them, the group has a carbon atom number of 10 to 26 and has a structure obtained by removing the hydroxyl groups at both ends from polyethylene glycol or polypropylene glycol. preferable. When Y 5 is an alkylene group having a cycloalkyl ring, Y 5 is preferably an alkylene group having 13 to 20 carbon atoms and having two cycloalkyl rings, and in particular, the following general formula ( It is preferably a group represented by 3). When Y 5 has the above-mentioned structure, it becomes easier to obtain a cured product having less foreign matter and to produce a cured product having excellent light absorption, and also to obtain a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption. This is because a cured product having good adhesion to the base material can be obtained.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016

(式中、R5a及びR5bは、水素原子またはメチル基を表し、*は、結合箇所を表す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016

(In the formula, R 5a and R 5b represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and * represents a bond site.)
 上記一般式(4-1)で表される脂肪族ジオール化合物のジグリシジルエーテル化物としては、具体的には、ジエチレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル、ジプロピレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル、トリプロピレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル等のポリアルキレングリコールのジグリシジルエーテル化物、エチレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル、プロピレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル、シクロヘキサンジメチロールジグリシジルエーテル、ネオペンチルグリコールジグリシジルエーテル、1,4-ブタンジオールジグリシジルエーテル、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジグリシジルエーテル、1,9-ノナンジオールジグリシジルエーテル等が挙げられる。
 また、Y5がシクロアルキル環を有するものとしては、例えば、水添ビスフェノールのジオールのジグリシジルエーテル化物、水添ビスフェノールAジグリシジルエーテル、水添ビスフェノールAFジグリシジルエーテル、水添ビスフェノールBジグリシジルエーテル、水添ビスフェノールCジグリシジルエーテル、水添ビスフェノールEジグリシジルエーテル、水添ビスフェノールFジグリシジルエーテル、水添ビスフェノールGジグリシジルエーテル、水添ビスフェノールMジグリシジルエーテル、水添ビスフェノールSジグリシジルエーテル、水添ビスフェノールPジグリシジルエーテル、水添ビスフェノールTMCジグリシジルエーテル、水添ビスフェノールZジグリシジルエーテル、ビス[4-(グリシジルオキシ)シクロヘキシル]エーテル、4,4'-ビシクロヘキサノールジグリシジルエーテル等が挙げられる。
Specific examples of the diglycidyl ether compound of the aliphatic diol compound represented by the general formula (4-1) include poly such as diethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, dipropylene glycol diglycidyl ether, and tripropylene glycol diglycidyl ether. Diglycidyl ether of alkylene glycol, ethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, propylene glycol diglycidyl ether, cyclohexanedimethylol diglycidyl ether, neopentyl glycol diglycidyl ether, 1,4-butanediol diglycidyl ether, 1,6-hexanediol Examples thereof include diglycidyl ether and 1,9-nonanediol diglycidyl ether.
Examples of Y 5 having a cycloalkyl ring include diglycidyl etherified product of hydrogenated bisphenol diol, hydrogenated bisphenol A diglycidyl ether, hydrogenated bisphenol AF diglycidyl ether, and hydrogenated bisphenol B diglycidyl ether. , Hydrogenated bisphenol C diglycidyl ether, hydrogenated bisphenol E diglycidyl ether, hydrogenated bisphenol F diglycidyl ether, hydrogenated bisphenol G diglycidyl ether, hydrogenated bisphenol M diglycidyl ether, hydrogenated bisphenol S diglycidyl ether, water Examples thereof include supplemented bisphenol P diglycidyl ether, hydrogenated bisphenol TMC diglycidyl ether, hydrogenated bisphenol Z diglycidyl ether, bis [4- (glycidyloxy) cyclohexyl] ether, 4,4'-bicyclohexanol diglycidyl ether and the like.
 式(4-2)について説明する。
 R1で表されるp価のアルコールからp個の水酸基(-OH)を除いた基は、脂肪族炭化水素基である。R1で表されるp価のアルコールからp個の水酸基(-OH)を除いた基としては、入手容易性や基材との密着性が良好な硬化物を得ることができる点から炭素原子数1~30の脂肪族炭化水素基が好ましく挙げられる。炭素原子数1~30の脂肪族炭化水素基としては、上記「1.ピロメテン化合物」の項に記載の、基中の水素原子を置換するアミノ基に用いられる炭化水素基として挙げた炭素原子数1~30のアルキル基、炭素原子数2~30のアルケニル基、炭素原子数3~30のシクロアルキル基若しくは炭素原子数4~30のシクロアルキルアルキル基等の脂肪族炭化水素基、又はこれらの基のメチレン基が下記群1から選択される二価の基により酸素原子が隣り合わない条件で置換された基のそれぞれからp-1個の水素原子を除いた基が挙げられる。
 入手容易性や基材との密着性が良好な硬化物を得ることができる点から、R1で表されるp価のアルコールからp個の水酸基(-OH)を除いた基は、炭素数1~10の脂肪族炭化水素基又は該脂肪族炭化水素基のメチレン基が下記群1から選択される二価の基により酸素原子が隣り合わない条件で置換された基であることが好ましく、より具体的には、炭素原子数2~10のアルキル基、炭素原子数3~10のアルケニル基、炭素原子数3~10のシクロアルキル基若しくは炭素原子数4~10のシクロアルキルアルキル基又はこれらの基のメチレン基が下記群1から選択される二価の基により酸素原子が隣り合わない条件で置換された基からp-1個の水素原子を除いた基であることが好ましい。とりわけ、入手容易性や基材との密着性が良好な硬化物を得ることができる点から、炭素原子数2~10のアルキル基又は該アルキル基中のメチレン基が下記群1から選択される二価の基により酸素原子が隣り合わない条件で置換された基が好ましく、炭素原子数2~10のアルキル基が特に好ましく、炭素原子数3~8の分岐状のアルキル基が最も好ましい。
 なお、所定の炭素原子数の基中のメチレン基が二価の基で置き換えられた基にかかる炭素原子数の規定は、その置換前の基に含まれる炭素原子数の規定と同じものとすることが好ましい。したがって、炭素原子数1~20の炭化水素基中のメチレン基が二価の基で置き換えられた基の炭素原子数の規定は、1~20とすることが好ましい。
Equation (4-2) will be described.
The group obtained by removing p hydroxyl groups (-OH) from the p-valent alcohol represented by R 1 is an aliphatic hydrocarbon group. As a group obtained by removing p hydroxyl groups (-OH) from a p-valent alcohol represented by R 1 , a carbon atom can be obtained from the viewpoint of easy availability and good adhesion to a substrate. An aliphatic hydrocarbon group having a number of 1 to 30 is preferably mentioned. As the aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, the number of carbon atoms listed as the hydrocarbon group used for the amino group substituting the hydrogen atom in the group described in the above section "1. Pyromethene compound". Aliphatic hydrocarbon groups such as 1 to 30 alkyl groups, 2 to 30 carbon atoms alkenyl groups, 3 to 30 carbon atoms cycloalkyl groups or 4 to 30 carbon atoms cycloalkylalkyl groups, or these Examples thereof include a group obtained by removing p-1 hydrogen atoms from each of the groups in which the methylene group of the group is substituted by a divalent group selected from the following group 1 under the condition that the oxygen atoms are not adjacent to each other.
A group obtained by removing p hydroxyl groups (-OH) from a p-valent alcohol represented by R 1 has a carbon number of carbons, because a cured product having good availability and adhesion to a base material can be obtained. It is preferable that the aliphatic hydrocarbon group 1 to 10 or the methylene group of the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is substituted with a divalent group selected from the following group 1 under the condition that the oxygen atoms are not adjacent to each other. More specifically, an alkyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, a cycloalkylalkyl group having 4 to 10 carbon atoms, or these. It is preferable that the methylene group of the group is a group obtained by removing p-1 hydrogen atoms from a group substituted under the condition that oxygen atoms are not adjacent to each other by a divalent group selected from the following group 1. In particular, an alkyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms or a methylene group in the alkyl group is selected from the following group 1 from the viewpoint that a cured product having good availability and adhesion to a base material can be obtained. A group substituted with a divalent group under the condition that the oxygen atoms are not adjacent to each other is preferable, an alkyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms is particularly preferable, and a branched alkyl group having 3 to 8 carbon atoms is most preferable.
The number of carbon atoms specified for a group in which the methylene group in the group having a predetermined number of carbon atoms is replaced with a divalent group shall be the same as the number of carbon atoms contained in the group before the substitution. Is preferable. Therefore, the specification of the number of carbon atoms of a group in which the methylene group in the hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is replaced with a divalent group is preferably 1 to 20.
 群1:-O-、-S-、-NR6-、-NR6-(C=O)-O-、-CO-、-(C=O)-O-、-O-(C=O)-、-O-(C=O)-O-。R6は水素原子又は炭素原子数1~30のアルキル基を表す。
 なお、R6に用いられる炭素原子数1~30のアルキル基としては、上記一般式(I)中のR101に用いられる炭素原子数1~30の直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基と同様の基が挙げられる。
Group 1: -O-, -S-, -NR 6- , -NR 6- (C = O) -O-, -CO-,-(C = O) -O-, -O- (C = O) )-, -O- (C = O) -O-. R 6 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
The alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms used in R 6 is a group similar to the linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms used in R 101 in the above general formula (I). Can be mentioned.
 式(4-2)で表される化合物は、1,2-エポキシ-4W-(2-オキシラニル)シクロヘキサン付加物として入手でき、入手容易性又は基材との密着性が良好な硬化物を得ることができる点から、R1を与えるp価のアルコールとしては、エチレングリコール、プロピレングリコール、1,4-ブタンジオール、1,2-ブタンジオール、ネオペンチルグリコール、1,6-ヘキサンジオール、1,2-オクタンジオール、1,8-オクタンジオール、イソプレングリコール、3-メチル-1,5-ペンタンジオール、1,4-シクロヘキサンジメタノール、ソルバイト、水添ビスフェノールA、水添ビスフェノールF、ダイマージオール等の2価アルコール、グリセリン、トリオキシイソブタン、1,2,3-ブタントリオール、1,2,3-ペンタントリオール、2-メチル-1,2,3-プロパントリオール、2-メチル-2,3,4-ブタントリオール、2-エチル-1,2,3-ブタントリオール、2,3,4-ペンタントリオール、2,3,4-ヘキサントリオール、4-プロピル-3,4,5-ヘプタントリオール、2,4-ジメチル-2,3,4-ペンタントリオール、ペンタメチルグリセリン、1,2,4-ブタントリオール、1,2,4-ペンタントリオール、トリメチロールエタン、トリメチロールプロパン等の3価アルコール、ペンタエリスリトール、ジグリセリン、1,2,3,4-ペンタンテトロール、2,3,4,5-ヘキサンテトロール、1,2,4,5-ペンタンテトロール、1,3,4,5-ヘキサンテトロール等の4価アルコール、トリグリセリン、アドニット、アラビット、キシリット等の5価アルコール、ジペンタエリスリトール、ソルビット、マンニット、イジット等の6価アルコール、蔗糖等の8価アルコールが挙げられる。 The compound represented by the formula (4-2) can be obtained as a 1,2-epoxy-4W- (2-oxylanyl) cyclohexane adduct to obtain a cured product having good availability or adhesion to a substrate. From the point of view, the p-valent alcohols that give R 1 include ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, 1,4-butanediol, 1,2-butanediol, neopentyl glycol, 1,6-hexanediol, 1, 2-octanediol, 1,8-octanediol, isoprene glycol, 3-methyl-1,5-pentanediol, 1,4-cyclohexanedimethanol, sorbite, hydrogenated bisphenol A, hydrogenated bisphenol F, dimerdiol, etc. Divalent alcohol, glycerin, trioxyisobutane, 1,2,3-butanetriol, 1,2,3-pentantriol, 2-methyl-1,2,3-propanetriol, 2-methyl-2,3,4 -Butantriol, 2-ethyl-1,2,3-butantriol, 2,3,4-pentantriol, 2,3,4-hexanetriol, 4-propyl-3,4,5-heptanetriol, 2, Trihydric alcohols such as 4-dimethyl-2,3,4-pentantriol, pentamethylglycerin, 1,2,4-butantriol, 1,2,4-pentantriol, trimethylolethane, trimethylrolpropane, pentaerythritol , Diglycerin, 1,2,3,4-pentantetrol, 2,3,4,5-hexanetetrol, 1,2,4,5-pentantetrol, 1,3,4,5-hexanete Examples thereof include tetravalent alcohols such as trawl, pentavalent alcohols such as triglycerin, adnit, arabit and xylit, hexavalent alcohols such as dipentaerythritol, sorbit, mannit and igit, and octavalent alcohols such as citrus sugar.
 pは、1以上10以下の整数であることが式(4-2)で表される化合物の入手容易性や基材との密着性が良好な硬化物を得ることができる点で好ましく、2以上8以下の整数であることがより好ましく、3以上6以下の整数であることがより好ましく、3以上4以下の整数であることが最も好ましい。qは1以上30以下の整数であることが好ましい。上記式(4-2)で表される化合物の重量平均分子量は1000超5000以下であることが好ましく、なかでも、1500以上4000以下であることがより好ましく、特に、2000以上3000以下であることが好ましい。上記分子量であることで、上記組成物は、基材との密着性が良好な硬化物を得やすい。また式(4-2)の化合物を使用する場合に異物が少なく、かつ、光吸収性に優れた硬化物の形成が容易となる。なお、式(4-2)で表される化合物が、モノマーやオリゴマーが重合した部位を有する場合、上記分子量は、重量平均分子量とすることができる。また、このような重量平均分子量の測定は、後述する、化合物が重合体である場合の重量平均分子量(Mw)の測定条件を用いることができる。
 上記式(4-2)で表される化合物のエポキシ当量としては、異物が少なく、かつ、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を形成可能とすることができるものであればよいが、100以上500以下であることが好ましく、なかでも、150以上200以下であることが好ましい。上記エポキシ当量が上述の範囲であることで、上記組成物は、異物が少なく、かつ、光吸収性に優れた硬化物の形成が容易となるからである。
It is preferable that p is an integer of 1 or more and 10 or less because it is possible to obtain a cured product having good availability of the compound represented by the formula (4-2) and adhesion to the base material. An integer of 8 or more is more preferable, an integer of 3 or more and 6 or less is more preferable, and an integer of 3 or more and 4 or less is most preferable. q is preferably an integer of 1 or more and 30 or less. The weight average molecular weight of the compound represented by the above formula (4-2) is preferably more than 1000 and 5000 or less, more preferably 1500 or more and 4000 or less, and particularly 2000 or more and 3000 or less. Is preferable. With the above molecular weight, the above composition can easily obtain a cured product having good adhesion to the base material. Further, when the compound of the formula (4-2) is used, a cured product having less foreign matter and excellent light absorption can be easily formed. When the compound represented by the formula (4-2) has a site where a monomer or an oligomer is polymerized, the molecular weight can be a weight average molecular weight. Further, for such measurement of the weight average molecular weight, the measurement conditions of the weight average molecular weight (Mw) when the compound is a polymer, which will be described later, can be used.
The epoxy equivalent of the compound represented by the above formula (4-2) may be one that has few foreign substances and can form a cured product having excellent light absorption, but is 100 or more and 500. It is preferably 150 or more and 200 or less. This is because when the epoxy equivalent is in the above range, the composition has few foreign substances and facilitates the formation of a cured product having excellent light absorption.
 とりわけ式(4-2)で表される化合物の入手容易性又は基材との密着性が良好な硬化物を得ることができる点から、式(4-2)で表される化合物としては、2,2-ビス(ヒドロキシメチル)-1-ブタノールの1,2-エポキシ-4-(2-オキシラニル)シクロヘキサン付加物等のエポキシシクロアルキル環に由来するシクロアルキル環にオキシラニル基が直接単結合で結合した構造を構成単位として有し、エポキシシクロアルキル環のエポキシ基同士が重合した構造を主鎖構造として有する化合物を好ましく挙げることができる。 In particular, the compound represented by the formula (4-2) is selected from the viewpoint that a cured product having good availability or adhesion to the substrate can be obtained. An oxylanyl group is directly attached to a cycloalkyl ring derived from an epoxycycloalkyl ring such as 1,2-epoxy-4- (2-oxylanyl) cyclohexane adduct of 2,2-bis (hydroxymethyl) -1-butanol by a single bond. A compound having a bonded structure as a constituent unit and having a structure in which epoxy groups of an epoxycycloalkyl ring are polymerized as a main chain structure can be preferably mentioned.
 上記脂肪族エポキシ化合物の含有量は、例えば、カチオン重合性成分の合計100質量部中に、5質量部以上とすることができ、10質量部以上70質量部以下であることが好ましく、15質量部以上60質量部以下であることがより好ましく、20質量部以上50質量部以下であることが特に好ましく、20質量部以上45質量部以下であることが最も好ましい。異物が少ない硬化物が得られると共に、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を製造可能な組成物を得ることが容易となるからである。本発明の組成物が多官能の脂肪族エポキシ化合物を含有する場合、多官能の脂肪族エポキシ化合物の好ましい量としては、上記の脂肪族エポキシ化合物の量として上記で挙げた量と同様の量が挙げられる。 The content of the aliphatic epoxy compound can be, for example, 5 parts by mass or more, preferably 10 parts by mass or more and 70 parts by mass or less, and 15 parts by mass in a total of 100 parts by mass of the cationically polymerizable component. It is more preferably 20 parts by mass or more and 60 parts by mass or less, particularly preferably 20 parts by mass or more and 50 parts by mass or less, and most preferably 20 parts by mass or more and 45 parts by mass or less. This is because a cured product with few foreign substances can be obtained, and it becomes easy to obtain a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption. When the composition of the present invention contains a polyfunctional aliphatic epoxy compound, the preferable amount of the polyfunctional aliphatic epoxy compound is the same as the amount mentioned above as the amount of the above-mentioned aliphatic epoxy compound. Can be mentioned.
 上記カチオン重合性成分は、脂肪族エポキシ化合物及び脂環式エポキシ化合物の少なくとも一方を含むことが好ましい。異物が少ない硬化物が得られると共に、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を製造可能な組成物を得ることが一層容易となるからである。
 上記カチオン重合性成分が、脂肪族エポキシ化合物及び脂環式エポキシ化合物の少なくとも一方を含む場合、上記脂肪族エポキシ化合物及び脂環式エポキシ化合物の合計量は、上記カチオン重合性成分の合計100質量部中に、50質量部以上であることが好ましく、60質量部以上であることがより好ましく、70質量部以上であることが特に好ましく、80質量部以上であることが最も好ましい。カチオン重合性成分100質量部中、脂肪族エポキシ化合物及び脂環式エポキシ化合物の合計量が100質量部であってもよい。
The cationically polymerizable component preferably contains at least one of an aliphatic epoxy compound and an alicyclic epoxy compound. This is because a cured product with few foreign substances can be obtained, and it becomes easier to obtain a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption.
When the cationically polymerizable component contains at least one of the aliphatic epoxy compound and the alicyclic epoxy compound, the total amount of the aliphatic epoxy compound and the alicyclic epoxy compound is 100 parts by mass in total of the cationically polymerizable component. Among them, 50 parts by mass or more is preferable, 60 parts by mass or more is more preferable, 70 parts by mass or more is particularly preferable, and 80 parts by mass or more is most preferable. The total amount of the aliphatic epoxy compound and the alicyclic epoxy compound may be 100 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of the cationically polymerizable component.
 上記芳香族及び脂肪族エポキシ化合物として好適に使用できる市販品としては、例えば、特許第6103653号公報等に記載されるものを挙げることができる。 Examples of commercially available products that can be suitably used as the aromatic and aliphatic epoxy compounds include those described in Japanese Patent No. 6103653.
 上記オキセタン化合物は、オキセタン環を有し、エポキシ基を含まないものである。
 このようなオキセタン化合物としては、例えば、3-エチル-3-ヒドロキシメチルオキセタン、3-(メタ)アリルオキシメチル-3-エチルオキセタン、(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメトキシ)メチルベンゼン、4-フルオロ-[1-(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメトキシ)メチル]ベンゼン、4-メトキシ-[1-(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメトキシ)メチル]ベンゼン、[1-(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメトキシ)エチル]フェニルエーテル、イソブトキシメチル(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、イソボルニルオキシエチル(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、イソボルニル(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、2-エチルヘキシル(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、エチルジエチレングリコール(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、ジシクロペンタジエン(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、ジシクロペンテニルオキシエチル(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、ジシクロペンテニル(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、テトラヒドロフルフリル(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、テトラブロモフェニル(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、2-テトラブロモフェノキシエチル(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、トリブロモフェニル(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、2-トリブロモフェノキシエチル(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、2-ヒドロキシエチル(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、2-ヒドロキシプロピル(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、ブトキシエチル(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、ペンタクロロフェニル(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、ペンタブロモフェニル(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、ボルニル(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、3,7-ビス(3-オキセタニル)-5-オキサ-ノナン、3,3'-(1,3-(2-メチレニル)プロパンジイルビス(オキシメチレン))ビス-(3-エチルオキセタン)、1,4-ビス[(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメトキシ)メチル]ベンゼン、1,2-ビス[(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメトキシ)メチル]エタン、1,3-ビス[(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメトキシ)メチル]プロパン、エチレングリコールビス(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、ジシクロペンテニルビス(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、トリエチレングリコールビス(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、テトラエチレングリコールビス(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、トリシクロデカンジイルジメチレン(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、トリメチロールプロパントリス(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、1,4-ビス(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメトキシ)ブタン、1,6-ビス(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメトキシ)ヘキサン、ペンタエリスリトールトリス(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、ペンタエリスリトールテトラキス(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、ポリエチレングリコールビス(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサキス(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタキス(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラキス(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、カプロラクトン変性ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサキス(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、カプロラクトン変性ジペンタエリスリトールペンタキス(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、ジトリメチロールプロパンテトラキス(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、EO変性ビスフェノールAビス(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、PO変性ビスフェノールAビス(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、EO変性水添ビスフェノールAビス(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、PO変性水添ビスフェノールAビス(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル、EO変性ビスフェノールF(3-エチル-3-オキセタニルメチル)エーテル等を挙げることができる。
The oxetane compound has an oxetane ring and does not contain an epoxy group.
Examples of such an oxetane compound include 3-ethyl-3-hydroxymethyloxetane, 3- (meth) allyloxymethyl-3-ethyloxetane, (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethoxy) methylbenzene, and 4-fluoro. -[1- (3-Ethyl-3-oxetanylmethoxy) methyl] benzene, 4-methoxy- [1- (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethoxy) methyl] benzene, [1- (3-ethyl-3-oxetanyl) methyl] Methoxy) ethyl] phenyl ether, isobutoxymethyl (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, isobornyloxyethyl (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, isobornyl (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) Ether, 2-ethylhexyl (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, ethyldiethylene glycol (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, dicyclopentadiene (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, dicyclopentenyloxy Ethyl (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, dicyclopentenyl (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, tetrahydrofurfuryl (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, tetrabromophenyl (3-ethyl) -3-Oxetanylmethyl) ether, 2-tetrabromophenoxyethyl (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, tribromophenyl (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, 2-tribromophenoxyethyl (3-) Ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, 2-hydroxyethyl (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, 2-hydroxypropyl (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, butoxyethyl (3-ethyl-3-3) Oxetanylmethyl) ether, pentachlorophenyl (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, pentabromophenyl (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, bornyl (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, 3,7 -Bis (3-oxetanyl) -5-oxa-nonane, 3,3'-(1,3- (2-methyleneyl) propandiylbis (oxymethylene)) bis- (3-ethyloxetane), 1,4- Bis [(3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethoxy) methyl] benzene, 1,2-bis [(3-ethyl-3-oki) Setanylmethoxy) methyl] ethane, 1,3-bis [(3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethoxy) methyl] propane, ethylene glycol bis (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, dicyclopentenylbis (3-) Ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, triethylene glycol bis (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, tetraethylene glycolbis (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, tricyclodecanediyldimethylene (3-) Ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, trimethylpropanthris (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, 1,4-bis (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethoxy) butane, 1,6-bis (3-bis) Ethyl-3-oxetanylmethoxy) hexane, pentaerythritol tris (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, pentaerythritol tetrakis (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, polyethylene glycol bis (3-ethyl-3-oxetanyl) Methyl) ether, dipentaerythritol hexax (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, dipentaerythritol pentax (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, dipentaerythritol tetrax (3-ethyl-3-oxetanyl) Methyl) ether, caprolactone-modified dipentaerythritol hexaxe (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, caprolactone-modified dipentaerythritol pentaxe (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, ditrimethylolpropanetetraxe (3-ethyl) -3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, EO-modified bisphenol A bis (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, PO-modified bisphenol A bis (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, EO-modified hydrogenated bisphenol A bis (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether Examples of 3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, PO-modified hydrogenated bisphenol A bis (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether, EO-modified bisphenol F (3-ethyl-3-oxetanylmethyl) ether and the like can be mentioned. it can.
 上記オキセタン化合物が有するオキセタン環の数としては、1以上であればよいが、1以上5以下であることが好ましく、1以上3以下であることが好ましい。硬化感度がより優れ、また光吸収性に優れた硬化物を製造可能な組成物を得ることが容易となるからである。 The number of oxetane rings contained in the oxetane compound may be 1 or more, preferably 1 or more and 5 or less, and preferably 1 or more and 3 or less. This is because it becomes easy to obtain a composition capable of producing a cured product having more excellent curing sensitivity and excellent light absorption.
 上記オキセタン化合物の含有量としては、異物が少ない硬化物の形成が容易であり、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を製造可能な組成物を得ることができるものであれば制限はないが、例えば、カチオン重合性成分の合計100質量部中に、60質量部以下とすることができ、5質量部以上50質量部以下であることが好ましく、10質量部以上40質量部以下であることがより好ましい。硬化感度がより優れ、また異物が少ない硬化物の形成が容易であり、光吸収性に優れた硬化物の製造が一層容易なものとなる組成物を得ることが容易となるからである。 The content of the oxetane compound is not limited as long as it is easy to form a cured product with few foreign substances and a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption can be obtained. , 60 parts by mass or less, preferably 5 parts by mass or more and 50 parts by mass or less, and 10 parts by mass or more and 40 parts by mass or less in the total of 100 parts by mass of the cationically polymerizable component. preferable. This is because it is easy to form a cured product having better curing sensitivity and less foreign matter, and it is easy to obtain a composition that makes it easier to produce a cured product having excellent light absorption.
 上記カチオン重合性成分としては、チイラン化合物、チエタン化合物等のその他の化合物も用いることができる。
 カチオン重合性成分として用いることができる、その他の化合物、環状ラクトン化合物、環状アセタール化合物、環状チオエーテル化合物、スピロオルトエステル化合物及びビニルエーテル化合物等については、特許第6103653号公報等に記載の内容と同様とすることができる。
As the cationically polymerizable component, other compounds such as a thielan compound and a thietan compound can also be used.
Other compounds, cyclic lactone compounds, cyclic acetal compounds, cyclic thioether compounds, spiroorthoester compounds, vinyl ether compounds, etc. that can be used as cationically polymerizable components are the same as those described in Japanese Patent No. 6103653 and the like. can do.
 上記カチオン重合性成分は、光吸収性に優れ且つ異物の少ない硬化物を得ることができるものであればよく、例えば、低分子量化合物、高分子量化合物の何れも用いることができる。
 上記カチオン重合性成分は、異物が少ない硬化物を得るとの観点、組成物の塗工容易性等の観点からは、低分子量化合物を含むことが好ましい。また、低分子量化合物は、組成物中への分散性又は溶解性等に優れるため、透明性に優れた硬化物を得ることができるからである。
 上記カチオン重合性成分は、硬化物の密着性等の観点からは、高分子量化合物を含むことが好ましい。
 本発明においては、上記カチオン重合性成分が、異物が少ない硬化物を得るとの観点、塗工性等の観点から、少なくとも低分子量化合物を含むことが好ましいが、組成物の塗工容易性、硬化物の密着性等のバランスの観点からは、上記低分子量化合物及び上記高分子量化合物の両者を含むものとしてもよい。
 上記低分子量化合物の分子量としては、異物が少なく所望の塗工性等が得られるものであればよく、例えば、1000以下とすることができ、50以上500以下であることが好ましく、なかでも50以上300以下であることが好ましい。
 上記高分子量化合物の分子量は、異物が少なく所望の接着容易性等が得られるものであればよく、例えば、1000より大きいものとすることができ、1000超50000以下であることが好ましく、なかでも、1000超10000以下であることが好ましい。
 なお、以下、分子量は、化合物が重合体である場合には、重量平均分子量(Mw)を示すものである。
 また、重量平均分子量は、ゲル・パーミエーション・クロマトグラフィー(GPC)により、標準ポリスチレン換算値として求めることができる。
 上記重量平均分子量Mwは、例えば、日本分光(株)製のGPC(LC-2000plusシリーズ)を用い、溶出溶剤をテトラヒドロフランとし、校正曲線用ポリスチレンスタンダードをMw1110000、707000、397000、189000、98900、37200、13700、9490、5430、3120、1010、589(東ソー(株)社製 TSKgel標準ポリスチレン)とし、測定カラムをKF-804、KF-803、KF-802(昭和電工(株)製)として測定して得ることができる。
 また、測定温度は40℃とすることができ、流速は1.0mL/分とすることができる。
The cationically polymerizable component may be any as long as it can obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances, and for example, either a low molecular weight compound or a high molecular weight compound can be used.
The cationically polymerizable component preferably contains a low molecular weight compound from the viewpoint of obtaining a cured product having few foreign substances and the ease of coating the composition. Further, since the low molecular weight compound is excellent in dispersibility or solubility in the composition, a cured product having excellent transparency can be obtained.
The cationically polymerizable component preferably contains a high molecular weight compound from the viewpoint of adhesion of the cured product and the like.
In the present invention, the cationically polymerizable component preferably contains at least a low molecular weight compound from the viewpoint of obtaining a cured product with few foreign substances, coatability, etc., but the composition is easy to coat. From the viewpoint of the balance of adhesion and the like of the cured product, both the low molecular weight compound and the high molecular weight compound may be contained.
The molecular weight of the low molecular weight compound may be any as long as it has few foreign substances and can obtain desired coatability and the like. For example, it can be 1000 or less, preferably 50 or more and 500 or less, and among them, 50. It is preferably 300 or more and 300 or less.
The molecular weight of the high molecular weight compound may be such that there are few foreign substances and desired adhesive ease can be obtained, for example, it can be larger than 1000, preferably more than 1000 and 50,000 or less, and above all. , More than 1000 and preferably 10000 or less.
Hereinafter, the molecular weight indicates the weight average molecular weight (Mw) when the compound is a polymer.
In addition, the weight average molecular weight can be determined as a standard polystyrene-equivalent value by gel permeation chromatography (GPC).
For the weight average molecular weight Mw, for example, GPC (LC-2000plus series) manufactured by JASCO Corporation is used, the elution solvent is tetrahydrofuran, and the polystyrene standard for the calibration curve is Mw1110,000, 707000, 397,000, 189000, 98900, 37200, 13700, 9490, 5430, 3120, 1010, 589 (TSKgel standard polystyrene manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), and the measurement columns were measured as KF-804, KF-803, KF-802 (manufactured by Showa Denko Corporation). Obtainable.
The measurement temperature can be 40 ° C. and the flow velocity can be 1.0 mL / min.
 上記低分子量化合物の含有量は、光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を製造可能な組成物を得ることができるものであれば制限はないが、例えば、カチオン重合性成分の合計100質量部中に、10質量部以上であることが好ましく、30質量部以上であることがより好ましく、50質量部以上であることが更に好ましく、70質量部以上であることが特に好ましく、80質量部以上であることが最も好ましい。光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を製造可能な組成物を得ることが一層容易となるからである。 The content of the low molecular weight compound is not limited as long as a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances can be obtained, but for example, a total of 100 masses of cationically polymerizable components. In the part, it is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, more preferably 30 parts by mass or more, further preferably 50 parts by mass or more, particularly preferably 70 parts by mass or more, and 80 parts by mass. The above is the most preferable. This is because it becomes easier to obtain a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances.
 上記カチオン重合性成分の含有量は、光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を製造可能な組成物が得られるものであれば制限はないが、例えば、本発明の組成物の固形分100質量部中に、50質量部以上であることが好ましく、70質量部以上であることがより好ましく、80質量部以上であることが更に好ましく、90質量部以上であることが特に好ましい。光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を得ることが容易となるからである。上記カチオン重合性成分の含有量の上限としては、特に制限はないが、例えば、他の成分の量を十分なものとする点で、本発明の組成物の固形分100質量部中に、99質量部以下であることが好ましく、97質量部以下であることがより好ましい。 The content of the cationically polymerizable component is not limited as long as a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances can be obtained. For example, the solid content of the composition of the present invention is 100. Among the parts by mass, it is preferably 50 parts by mass or more, more preferably 70 parts by mass or more, further preferably 80 parts by mass or more, and particularly preferably 90 parts by mass or more. This is because it becomes easy to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances. The upper limit of the content of the cationically polymerizable component is not particularly limited, but for example, 99 in 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition of the present invention in that the amount of other components is sufficient. It is preferably less than or equal to parts by mass, and more preferably less than or equal to 97 parts by mass.
 上記カチオン重合性成分の含有量は、上記組成物100質量部中に、25質量部以上とすることができ、30質量部以上80質量部以下であることが好ましく、特に、40質量部以上70質量部以下であることが好ましい。光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を製造可能な組成物を得ることが容易となるからである。 The content of the cationically polymerizable component can be 25 parts by mass or more, preferably 30 parts by mass or more and 80 parts by mass or less, and particularly 40 parts by mass or more and 70 parts by mass or more in 100 parts by mass of the composition. It is preferably parts by mass or less. This is because it becomes easy to obtain a composition capable of producing a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances.
3.酸発生剤
 上記酸発生剤としては、所定の条件により酸を発生させることが可能な化合物であればどのようなものでも問題はなく、特に限定されるものではない。
 このような酸発生剤としては、例えば、紫外線照射等の光照射により酸を発生させることが可能な光酸発生剤、熱により酸を発生させることが可能な熱酸発生剤を用いることができる。
 上記酸発生剤は、上記光酸発生剤及び熱酸発生剤の少なくとも一方を用いることができるが、硬化が容易であるとの観点、組成物の硬化時に、組成物に隣接して用いられる周辺部材への熱によるダメージを低減でき、周辺部材の選択の自由度が高くなるとの観点等からは、光酸発生剤であることが好ましい。また、上記光酸発生剤は硬化速度が速いという利点もある。
 また、上記酸発生剤は、光が到達困難な場所でも硬化物の形成が容易となる観点からは、熱酸発生剤であることが好ましい。また、上記熱酸発生剤は、硬化速度が比較的遅いため、これを利用し硬化処理(加熱処理)後に、他の部材との貼り合わせを容易に行うことができる。
3. 3. Acid Generator The acid generator is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound capable of generating an acid under predetermined conditions.
As such an acid generator, for example, a photoacid generator capable of generating an acid by light irradiation such as ultraviolet irradiation, and a thermoacid generator capable of generating an acid by heat can be used. ..
As the acid generator, at least one of the photoacid generator and the thermoacid generator can be used, but from the viewpoint of easy curing, the periphery used adjacent to the composition when the composition is cured. From the viewpoint that damage due to heat to the member can be reduced and the degree of freedom in selecting peripheral members is increased, the photoacid generator is preferable. Further, the photoacid generator also has an advantage that the curing rate is high.
Further, the acid generator is preferably a thermal acid generator from the viewpoint of facilitating the formation of a cured product even in a place where light is difficult to reach. Further, since the thermal acid generator has a relatively slow curing rate, it can be easily bonded to other members after the curing treatment (heat treatment) by utilizing the curing rate.
 上記酸発生剤の含有量は、単独又は複数種の合計で、上記組成物の固形分100質量部中に、0.01質量部以上10質量部以下、とすることができ、なかでも、0.1質量部以上5質量部以下であることが好ましい。上記組成物は、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を容易に得ることが可能となるからである。 The content of the acid generator, either alone or in total of a plurality of types, can be 0.01 part by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less in 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition, and among them, 0. . It is preferably 1 part by mass or more and 5 parts by mass or less. This is because the above composition makes it possible to easily obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption.
 上記カチオン重合性成分に対する酸発生剤の使用割合は特に限定されず、本発明の目的を阻害しない範囲内で概ね通常の使用割合で使用すれば構わないが、例えば、カチオン重合性成分100質量部に対して、酸発生剤0.05質量部以上10質量部以下であることが好ましく、0.5質量部以上8質量部以下であることが好ましく、1質量部以上7質量部以下であることが好ましく、なかでも、1.5質量部以上6質量部以下であることが好ましい。上記使用割合が上述の範囲であることで、カチオン重合性成分を十分に硬化させると共に、組成物の硬化物の耐熱性が良好な点で好適である。
 また、上記組成物は、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を容易に得ることが可能となるからである。
The ratio of the acid generator to the above-mentioned cationically polymerizable component is not particularly limited, and it may be used in a generally normal ratio within a range that does not impair the object of the present invention. For example, 100 parts by mass of the cationically polymerizable component. On the other hand, the acid generator is preferably 0.05 parts by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less, preferably 0.5 parts by mass or more and 8 parts by mass or less, and 1 part by mass or more and 7 parts by mass or less. Is preferable, and in particular, it is preferably 1.5 parts by mass or more and 6 parts by mass or less. When the usage ratio is within the above range, the cationically polymerizable component is sufficiently cured, and the cured product of the composition has good heat resistance, which is preferable.
Further, the above composition makes it possible to easily obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption.
(1)光酸発生剤
 上記光酸発生剤としては、紫外線照射等の光照射により酸を発生させることが可能な化合物であればどのようなものでも問題はないが、好ましくは、紫外線の照射によってルイス酸を放出するオニウム塩である複塩、又はその誘導体である。かかる化合物の代表的なものとしては、下記一般式(21)で表される陽イオンと陰イオンの塩を挙げることができる。
(1) Photoacid generator The photoacid generator may be any compound that can generate an acid by light irradiation such as ultraviolet irradiation, but it is preferable to irradiate with ultraviolet light. A compound salt, which is an onium salt that releases Lewis acid, or a derivative thereof. Typical examples of such compounds include salts of cations and anions represented by the following general formula (21).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 ここで陽イオン[A]m+はオニウムであることが好ましく、その構造は、例えば、下記一般式(22)で表すことができる。 Here, the cation [A] m + is preferably onium, and its structure can be represented by, for example, the following general formula (22).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 ここで、R13は炭素原子数が1~60であり、炭素原子以外の原子をいくつ含んでいても構わない有機基である。aは1~5の整数である。a個のR13は各々独立で、同一でも異なっていても構わない。また、少なくとも1つは、芳香環を有する上記有機基であることが好ましい。QはS,N,Se,Te,P,As,Sb,Bi,O,I,Br,Cl,F,N=Nからなる群から選ばれる原子或いは原子団である。また、陽イオン[A]m+中のQの原子価をqとしたとき、m=a-qなる関係が成り立つことが必要である(但し、N=Nは原子価0として扱う)。 Here, R 13 is an organic group having 1 to 60 carbon atoms and may contain any number of atoms other than carbon atoms. a is an integer from 1 to 5. The a R 13s are independent of each other and may be the same or different. Further, at least one is preferably the organic group having an aromatic ring. Q is an atom or atomic group selected from the group consisting of S, N, Se, Te, P, As, Sb, Bi, O, I, Br, Cl, F, N = N. Further, when the valence of Q in the cation [A] m + is q, it is necessary that the relationship m = aq is established (however, N = N is treated as 0 valence).
 また、陰イオン[B]m-は、ハロゲン化物錯体であることが好ましく、その構造は、例えば、下記一般式(23)で表すことができる。 Further, the anion [B] m- is preferably a halide complex, and its structure can be represented by, for example, the following general formula (23).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 ここで、Lはハロゲン化物錯体の中心原子である金属又は半金属(Metalloid)であり、B,P,As,Sb,Fe,Sn,Bi,Al,Ca,In,Ti,Zn,Sc,V,Cr,Mn,Co等である。Xはハロゲン原子である。bは3~7の整数である。また、陰イオン[B]m-中のLの原子価をpとしたとき、m=b-pなる関係が成り立つことが必要である。 Here, L is a metal or metalloid that is the central atom of the halide complex, and is B, P, As, Sb, Fe, Sn, Bi, Al, Ca, In, Ti, Zn, Sc, V. , Cr, Mn, Co and the like. X is a halogen atom. b is an integer of 3 to 7. Further, when the valence of L in the anion [B] m- is p, it is necessary that the relationship m = bp is established.
 上記一般式の陰イオン[LXbm-の具体例としては、テトラキス(ペンタフルオロフェニル)ボレート[(C654B]-、テトラフルオロボレート(BF4-、ヘキサフルオロホスフェート(PF6-、ヘキサフルオロアンチモネート(SbF6-、ヘキサフルオロアルセネート(AsF6-、ヘキサクロロアンチモネート(SbCl6-、トリス(ペンタフルオロメチル)トリフルオロリン酸イオン(FAPアニオン)等を挙げることができる。 Specific examples of the anion [LX b ] m- of the above general formula include tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate [(C 6 F 5 ) 4 B] - , tetrafluoroborate (BF 4 ) - , and hexafluorophosphate ( PF 6 ) - , Hexafluoroantimonate (SbF 6 ) - , Hexafluoroarsenate (AsF 6 ) - , Hexachloroantimonate (SbCl 6 ) - , Tris (pentafluoromethyl) trifluorophosphate ion (FAP anion), etc. Can be mentioned.
 また、陰イオン[B]m-は、下記一般式(24)で表される構造のものも好ましく用いることができる。 Further, as the anion [B] m- , a structure represented by the following general formula (24) can also be preferably used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020

 ここで、L,X,bは上記と同様である。また、その他用いることのできる陰イオンとしては、過塩素酸イオン(ClO4-、トリフルオロメチル亜硫酸イオン(CF3SO3-、フルオロスルホン酸イオン(FSO3-、トルエンスルホン酸陰イオン、トリニトロベンゼンスルホン酸陰イオン、カンファースルフォネート、ノナフロロブタンスルフォネート、ヘキサデカフロロオクタンスルフォネート、テトラアリールボレート、テトラキス(ペンタフルオロフェニル)ボレート等を挙げることができる。 Here, L, X, and b are the same as described above. Other anions that can be used include perchlorate ion (ClO 4 ) - , trifluoromethyl sulfite ion (CF 3 SO 3 ) - , fluorosulfonic acid ion (FSO 3 ) - , and toluene sulfonic acid anion. , Trinitrobenzene sulfonic acid anion, camphor sulfonate, nonafluorobutane sulfonate, hexadecafluorooctanesulfonate, tetraarylborate, tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate and the like.
 本発明では、このようなオニウム塩のなかでも、下記の(イ)~(ハ)の芳香族オニウム塩を使用することが特に有効である。これらのなかから、その1種を単独で、又は2種以上を混合して使用することができる。 In the present invention, among such onium salts, it is particularly effective to use the following aromatic onium salts (a) to (c). Among these, one of them can be used alone, or two or more of them can be mixed and used.
(イ)フェニルジアゾニウムヘキサフルオロホスフェート、4-メトキシフェニルジアゾニウムヘキサフルオロアンチモネート、4-メチルフェニルジアゾニウムヘキサフルオロホスフェート等のアリールジアゾニウム塩 (A) Aryldiazonium salts such as phenyldiazonium hexafluorophosphate, 4-methoxyphenyldiazonium hexafluoroantimonate, 4-methylphenyldiazonium hexafluorophosphate and the like.
(ロ)ジフェニルヨードニウムヘキサフルオロアンチモネート、ジ(4-メチルフェニル)ヨードニウムヘキサフルオロホスフェート、ジ(4-tert-ブチルフェニル)ヨードニウムヘキサフルオロホスフェート、トリルクミルヨードニウムテトラキス(ペンタフルオロフェニル)ボレート等のジアリールヨードニウム塩 (B) Diaryl such as diphenyliodonium hexafluoroantimonate, di (4-methylphenyl) iodonium hexafluorophosphate, di (4-tert-butylphenyl) iodonium hexafluorophosphate, trilucmil iodonium tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate, etc. Iodonium salt
(ハ)下記群III又は群IVで表されるスルホニウムカチオンとヘキサフルオロアンチモンイオン、テトラキス(ペンタフルオロフェニル)ボレートイオン等のスルホニウム塩 (C) Sulfonium cations represented by Group III or Group IV below and sulfonium salts such as hexafluoroantimon ion and tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate ion.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
 また、その他好ましいものとしては、(η5-2,4-シクロペンタジエン-1-イル)〔(1,2,3,4,5,6-η)-(1-メチルエチル)ベンゼン〕-アイアン-ヘキサフルオロホスフェート等の鉄-アレーン錯体や、トリス(アセチルアセトナト)アルミニウム、トリス(エチルアセトナトアセタト)アルミニウム、トリス(サリチルアルデヒダト)アルミニウム等のアルミニウム錯体とトリフェニルシラノール等のシラノール類との混合物等も挙げることができる。 Also, those other preferred, (eta 5-2,4-cyclopentadiene-1-yl) [(1,2,3,4,5,6-η) - (1- methylethyl) benzene] - Iron -Iron-arene complexes such as hexafluorophosphate, aluminum complexes such as tris (acetylacetonato) aluminum, tris (ethylacetonatoacetato) aluminum, and tris (salityl aldehyde) aluminum, and silanols such as triphenylsilanol. A mixture of the above can also be mentioned.
 これらのなかでも、実用面と光感度の観点から、芳香族ヨードニウム塩、芳香族スルホニウム塩、鉄-アレーン錯体を用いることが好ましく、下記一般式(5)で表される芳香族スルホニウム塩が、感度の点から更に好ましい。また、上記光酸発生剤が上記芳香族スルホニウム塩であることで、上記組成物は、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を形成可能となるからである。
 また、上記組成物は、硬化時に基材等の周辺部材への熱によるダメージを低減でき、周辺部材の選択の自由度が高くなるからである。
Among these, from the viewpoint of practical use and photosensitivity, it is preferable to use an aromatic iodonium salt, an aromatic sulfonium salt, or an iron-alene complex, and the aromatic sulfonium salt represented by the following general formula (5) is used. It is more preferable from the viewpoint of sensitivity. Further, since the photoacid generator is the aromatic sulfonium salt, the composition can form a cured product having excellent light absorption.
Further, the above composition can reduce the damage caused by heat to the peripheral members such as the base material at the time of curing, and the degree of freedom in selecting the peripheral members is increased.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
(式中、R21、R22、R23、R24、R25、R26、R27、R28、R29、R30、R31、R32、R33及びR34は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基、炭素原子数1~10のアルコキシ基、炭素原子数2~10のエステル基、又は該アルキル基、該アルコキシ基若しくは該エステル基中のメチレン基が下記群1で置き換えられた基を表し、
 R35は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基又は該アルキル基中のメチレン基が下記群1で置き換えられた基を表すか、或いは下記式(A)~(C)より選択される何れかの置換基を表し、
 An1q1-はq1価の陰イオンを表し、
 q1は1又は2の整数を表し、
 p1は電荷を中性にする係数を表す。
 群1:-O-、-S-、-NR6-、-NR6-(C=O)-O-、-CO-、-(C=O)-O-、-O-(C=O)-、-O-(C=O)-O-。R6は水素原子又は炭素原子数1~30のアルキル基を表す。)
(In the formula, R 21 , R 22 , R 23 , R 24 , R 25 , R 26 , R 27 , R 28 , R 29 , R 30 , R 31 , R 32 , R 33 and R 34 are independent of each other. , Hydrogen atom, halogen atom, alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, ester group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, or the alkyl group, the alkoxy group or the ester group. Represents a group in which the methylene group of is replaced by the following group 1.
R 35 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or a group in which the methylene group in the alkyl group is replaced by the following group 1, or the following formulas (A) to (C). Represents one of the substituents selected from
An1 q1- represents a q1-valent anion,
q1 represents an integer of 1 or 2 and represents
p1 represents the coefficient for neutralizing the charge.
Group 1: -O-, -S-, -NR 6- , -NR 6- (C = O) -O-, -CO-,-(C = O) -O-, -O- (C = O) )-, -O- (C = O) -O-. R 6 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. )
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
(式中、R121、R122、R123、R124、R125、R126、R127、R128、R129、R130、R131、R132、R133、R134、R136、R137、R138、R139、R140、R141、R142、R143及びR144、R145、R146、R147、R148及びR149は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基、炭素原子数1~10のアルコキシ基、炭素原子数2~10のエステル基又は該アルキル基、該アルコキシ基若しくは該エステル基中のメチレン基が上記群1で置き換えられた基を表し、
 *は式(5)中のSとの結合位置を表す。)
(In the formula, R 121 , R 122 , R 123 , R 124 , R 125 , R 126 , R 127 , R 128 , R 129 , R 130 , R 131 , R 132 , R 133 , R 134 , R 136 , R 137 , R 138 , R 139 , R 140 , R 141 , R 142 , R 143 and R 144 , R 145 , R 146 , R 147 , R 148 and R 149 are independently hydrogen atom, halogen atom and carbon. The above group 1 replaces an alkyl group having 1 to 10 atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an ester group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms or the alkyl group, the alkoxy group or the methylene group in the ester group. Represents the group
* Represents the connection position with S in the formula (5). )
 上記一般式(5)で表される化合物において、R21、R22、R23、R24、R25、R26、R27、R28、R29、R30、R31、R32、R33、R34、R35、R121、R122、R123、R124、R125、R126、R127、R128、R129、R130、R131、R132、R133、R134、R136、R137、R138、R139、R140、R141、R142、R143、R144、R145、R146、R147、R148及びR149で表されるハロゲン原子としては、フッ素、塩素、臭素、ヨウ素等が挙げられる。 Among the compounds represented by the above general formula (5), R 21 , R 22 , R 23 , R 24 , R 25 , R 26 , R 27 , R 28 , R 29 , R 30 , R 31 , R 32 , R. 33 , R 34 , R 35 , R 121 , R 122 , R 123 , R 124 , R 125 , R 126 , R 127 , R 128 , R 129 , R 130 , R 131 , R 132 , R 133 , R 134 , Halogen atoms represented by R 136 , R 137 , R 138 , R 139 , R 140 , R 141 , R 142 , R 143 , R 144 , R 145 , R 146 , R 147 , R 148 and R 149 are Fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine and the like can be mentioned.
 上記一般式(5)で表される化合物において、R21、R22、R23、R24、R25、R26、R27、R28、R29、R30、R31、R32、R33、R34、R35、R121、R122、R123、R124、R125、R126、R127、R128、R129、R130、R131、R132、R133、R134、R136、R137、R138、R139、R140、R141、R142、R143、R144、R145、R146、R147、R148及びR149(以下、これらをまとめて、R21等と称する場合がある。)で表される炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基としては、上記「1.ピロメテン化合物」の項に記載の、一般式(I)中のR101に用いられる、置換基を有していてもよい直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基のうち、所定の炭素原子数を満たすものが挙げられる。
 このようなR21等に用いられるアルキル基、該アルキル基、該アルコキシ基若しくは該エステル基中のメチレン基が上記群1で置き換えられた基等としては、メチル、エチル、プロピル、イソプロピル、ブチル、s-ブチル、t-ブチル、イソブチル、アミル、イソアミル、t-アミル、ヘキシル、シクロヘキシル、ヘプチル、オクチル、ノニル、エチルオクチル、2-メトキシエチル、3-メトキシプロピル、4-メトキシブチル、2-ブトキシエチル、メトキシエトキシエチル、メトキシエトキシエトキシエチル、3-メトキシブチル、2-メチルチオエチル、フルオロメチル、ジフルオロメチル、トリフルオロメチル、クロロメチル、ジクロロメチル、トリクロロメチル、ブロモメチル、ジブロモメチル、トリブロモメチル、ジフルオロエチル、トリクロロエチル、ジクロロジフルオロエチル、ペンタフルオロエチル、ヘプタフルオロプロピル、ノナフルオロブチル、デカフルオロペンチル、トリデカフルオロヘキシル、ペンタデカフルオロヘプチル、ヘプタデカフルオロオクチル、メトキシメチル、1,2-エポキシエチル、メトキシエチル、メトキシエトキシメチル、メチルチオメチル、エトキシエチル、ブトキシメチル、t-ブチルチオメチル、4-ペンテニルオキシメチル、トリクロロエトキシメチル、ビス(2-クロロエトキシ)メチル、メトキシシクロヘキシル、1-(2-クロロエトキシ)エチル、1-メチル-1-メトキシエチル、エチルジチオエチル、トリメチルシリルエチル、t-ブチルジメチルシリルオキシメチル、2-(トリメチルシリル)エトキシメチル、t-ブトキシカルボニルメチル、エチルオキシカルボニルメチル、エチルカルボニルメチル、t-ブトキシカルボニルメチル、アクリロイルオキシエチル、メタクリロイルオキシエチル、2-メチル-2-アダマンチルオキシカルボニルメチル、アセチルエチル、2-メトキシ-1-プロペニル、ヒドロキシメチル、2-ヒドロキシエチル、1-ヒドロキシエチル、2-ヒドロキシプロピル、3-ヒドロキシプロピル、3-ヒドロキシブチル、4-ヒドロキシブチル、1,2-ジヒドロキシエチル等が挙げられる。
Among the compounds represented by the above general formula (5), R 21 , R 22 , R 23 , R 24 , R 25 , R 26 , R 27 , R 28 , R 29 , R 30 , R 31 , R 32 , R. 33 , R 34 , R 35 , R 121 , R 122 , R 123 , R 124 , R 125 , R 126 , R 127 , R 128 , R 129 , R 130 , R 131 , R 132 , R 133 , R 134 , R 136 , R 137 , R 138 , R 139 , R 140 , R 141 , R 142 , R 143 , R 144 , R 145 , R 146 , R 147 , R 148 and R 149. The alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms represented by (may be referred to as 21 etc.) is used for R 101 in the general formula (I) described in the above section “1. Pyromethene compound”. , A linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent and which satisfies a predetermined number of carbon atoms can be mentioned.
Such R 21 such as an alkyl group used in the alkyl group, the methylene group in the alkoxy group or the ester group or the like group which is replaced by the group 1, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, s-butyl, t-butyl, isobutyl, amyl, isoamyl, t-amyl, hexyl, cyclohexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, ethyloctyl, 2-methoxyethyl, 3-methoxypropyl, 4-methoxybutyl, 2-butoxyethyl , Methoxyethoxyethyl, methoxyethoxyethoxyethyl, 3-methoxybutyl, 2-methylthioethyl, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, chloromethyl, dichloromethyl, trichloromethyl, bromomethyl, dibromomethyl, tribromomethyl, difluoroethyl , Trichloroethyl, dichlorodifluoroethyl, pentafluoroethyl, heptafluoropropyl, nonafluorobutyl, decafluoropentyl, tridecafluorohexyl, pentadecafluoroheptyl, heptadecafluorooctyl, methoxymethyl, 1,2-epoxyethyl, methoxy Ethyl, methoxyethoxymethyl, methylthiomethyl, ethoxyethyl, butoxymethyl, t-butylthiomethyl, 4-pentenyloxymethyl, trichloroethoxymethyl, bis (2-chloroethoxy) methyl, methoxycyclohexyl, 1- (2-chloroethoxy) ) Ethyl, 1-methyl-1-methoxyethyl, ethyldithioethyl, trimethylsilylethyl, t-butyldimethylsilyloxymethyl, 2- (trimethylsilyl) ethoxymethyl, t-butoxycarbonylmethyl, ethyloxycarbonylmethyl, ethylcarbonylmethyl, t-Butoxycarbonylmethyl, acryloyloxyethyl, methacryloyloxyethyl, 2-methyl-2-adamantyloxycarbonylmethyl, acetylethyl, 2-methoxy-1-propenyl, hydroxymethyl, 2-hydroxyethyl, 1-hydroxyethyl, 2 -Hydroxypropyl, 3-hydroxypropyl, 3-hydroxybutyl, 4-hydroxybutyl, 1,2-dihydroxyethyl and the like can be mentioned.
 上記一般式(5)で表される化合物において、R21、R22、R23、R24、R25、R26、R27、R28、R29、R30、R31、R32、R33、R34、R121、R122、R123、R124、R125、R126、R127、R128、R129、R130、R131、R132、R133、R134、R136、R137、R138、R139、R140、R141、R142、R143及びR144、R145、R146、R147、R148及びR149で表される炭素原子数1~10のアルコキシ基としては、アルキル基の結合箇所側末端のメチレン基に-O-が結合した基が挙げられる。上記アルコキシ基を構成するアルキル基としては、上記R21等に用いられるアルキル基として挙げたものを用いることができる。 このようなR21等に用いられるアルコキシ基としては、具体的には、メトキシ、エトキシ、プロピルオキ、イソプロピルオキシ、ブチルオキシ、s-ブチルオキシ、t-ブチルオキシ、イソブチルオキシ、ペンチルオキシ、イソアミルオキシ、t-アミルオキシ、ヘキシルオキシ、シクロヘキシルオキシ、シクロヘキシルメチルオキシ、テトラヒドロフラニルオキシ、テトラヒドロピラニルオキシ、2-メトキシエチルオキシ、3-メトキシプロピルオキシ、4-メトキシブチルオキシ、2-ブトキシエチルオキシ、メトキシエトキシエチルオキシ、メトキシエトキシエトキシエチルオキシ、3-メトキシブチルオキシ、2-メチルチオエチルオキシ、トリフルオロメチルオキシ等が挙げられる。 Among the compounds represented by the above general formula (5), R 21 , R 22 , R 23 , R 24 , R 25 , R 26 , R 27 , R 28 , R 29 , R 30 , R 31 , R 32 , R. 33 , R 34 , R 121 , R 122 , R 123 , R 124 , R 125 , R 126 , R 127 , R 128 , R 129 , R 130 , R 131 , R 132 , R 133 , R 134 , R 136 , Alkoxy with 1 to 10 carbon atoms represented by R 137 , R 138 , R 139 , R 140 , R 141 , R 142 , R 143 and R 144 , R 145 , R 146 , R 147 , R 148 and R 149. Examples of the group include a group in which —O— is bonded to a methylene group at the end on the bonding site side of the alkyl group. The alkyl group constituting the alkoxy group, there can be used those exemplified as the alkyl group used in the R 21 or the like. The alkoxy group used in such R 21 or the like, specifically, methoxy, ethoxy, Puropiruoki, isopropyloxy, butyloxy, s- butyloxy, t-butyloxy, iso-butyloxy, pentyloxy, iso-amyl oxy, t-amyloxy , Hexyloxy, Cyclohexyloxy, Cyclohexylmethyloxy, Tetrahydrofuranyloxy, Tetrahydropyranyloxy, 2-methoxyethyloxy, 3-methoxypropyloxy, 4-methoxybutyloxy, 2-butoxyethyloxy, methoxyethoxyethyloxy, methoxy Examples thereof include ethoxyethoxyethyloxy, 3-methoxybutyloxy, 2-methylthioethyloxy, trifluoromethyloxy and the like.
 上記一般式(5)で表される化合物において、R21、R22、R23、R24、R25、R26、R27、R28、R29、R30、R31、R32、R33、R34、R121、R122、R123、R124、R125、R126、R127、R128、R129、R130、R131、R132、R133、R134、R136、R137、R138、R139、R140、R141、R142、R143及びR144、R145、R146、R147、R148及びR149で表される炭素原子数2~10のエステル基としては、結合箇所側末端にエステル結合(-CO-O-又は-O-CO-)を有する基であればよく、アルキル基の結合箇所側末端のメチレン基にエステル結合が結合した基が挙げられる。上記エステル基を構成するアルキル基としては、上記R21等に用いられるアルキル基として挙げたものを用いることができる。
 このようなR21等に用いられるエステル基としては、具体的には、メトキシカルボニル、エトキシカルボニル、イソプロピルオキシカルボニル、フェノキシカルボニル、アセトキシ、プロピオニルオキシ、ブチリルオキシ、クロロアセチルオキシ、ジクロロアセチルオキシ、トリクロロアセチルオキシ、トリフルオロアセチルオキシ、t-ブチルカルボニルオキシ、メトキシアセチルオキシ、ベンゾイルオキシ等が挙げられる。
Among the compounds represented by the above general formula (5), R 21 , R 22 , R 23 , R 24 , R 25 , R 26 , R 27 , R 28 , R 29 , R 30 , R 31 , R 32 , R 33 , R 34 , R 121 , R 122 , R 123 , R 124 , R 125 , R 126 , R 127 , R 128 , R 129 , R 130 , R 131 , R 132 , R 133 , R 134 , R 136 , Esters with 2 to 10 carbon atoms represented by R 137 , R 138 , R 139 , R 140 , R 141 , R 142 , R 143 and R 144 , R 145 , R 146 , R 147 , R 148 and R 149. The group may be a group having an ester bond (-CO-O- or -O-CO-) at the end on the bond site side, and a group having an ester bond bonded to the methylene group at the end on the bond site side of the alkyl group may be used. Can be mentioned. The alkyl group constituting the ester group can be used those described as the alkyl group used in the R 21 or the like.
Specific examples of the ester group used for such R21 and the like include methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, isopropyloxycarbonyl, phenoxycarbonyl, acetoxy, propionyloxy, butyryloxy, chloroacetyloxy, dichloroacetyloxy, and trichloroacetyloxy. , Trifluoroacetyloxy, t-butylcarbonyloxy, methoxyacetyloxy, benzoyloxy and the like.
 なお、上記アルキル基、アルコキシ基及びエステル基のうちメチレン基を上記群1から選ばれる2価の基で置換する場合、当該2価の基同士が隣り合わないものとし、また該2価の基がアルコキシ基の結合末端の酸素原子又はエステル基の結合末端のエステル基とも隣り合わないものとする。 When the methylene group among the alkyl group, alkoxy group and ester group is replaced with a divalent group selected from the above group 1, the divalent groups are not adjacent to each other, and the divalent group is not adjacent to each other. Is not adjacent to the oxygen atom at the bond end of the alkoxy group or the ester group at the bond end of the ester group.
 本発明においては、上記R35が、上記化学式(A)~(C)より選択されるものであることが好ましく、なかでも、上記式(A)又は(B)より選択されるものであることが好ましい。上記R35が上述の構造を有することにより、組成物は、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を得ることができるものとなるからである。
 本発明の組成物においては、R35が、上記式(A)又は(C)より選択されるものも好ましく用いることができる。組成物は、硬化速度及び接着力に優れたものとなるからである。
In the present invention, the above R 35 is preferably selected from the above chemical formulas (A) to (C), and above all, the above R 35 is selected from the above formula (A) or (B). Is preferable. This is because when the R 35 has the above-mentioned structure, the composition can obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption.
In the composition of the present invention, R 35 selected from the above formula (A) or (C) can also be preferably used. This is because the composition has excellent curing speed and adhesive strength.
 R21、R22、R24、R25、R26、R27、R29、R30、R31、R32、R33及びR34は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基であることが好ましく、特に、水素原子であることが好ましい。上述の官能基であることで、組成物は、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を得ることができるものとなるからである。R23及びR28は、なかでも、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基であることが好ましく、特に、水素原子又はハロゲン原子であることが好ましい。上述の官能基であることで、組成物は、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を得ることができるものとなるからである。 R 21 , R 22 , R 24 , R 25 , R 26 , R 27 , R 29 , R 30 , R 31 , R 32 , R 33 and R 34 are hydrogen atoms, halogen atoms, and carbon atoms 1 to 10. It is preferably an alkyl group, and particularly preferably a hydrogen atom. This is because the above-mentioned functional group makes it possible to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption. Among them, R 23 and R 28 are preferably hydrogen atoms, halogen atoms, and alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably hydrogen atoms or halogen atoms. This is because the above-mentioned functional group makes it possible to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption.
 R121、R122、R124、R125、R126、R127、R129、R130、R131、R132、R133、R134、R137、R138、R139、R140、R141、R142、R143、R144、R145、R146、R147、R148及びR149は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基であることが好ましく、特に、水素原子であることが好ましい。上述の官能基であることで、組成物は、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を得ることができるものとなるからである。
 R123、R128及びR136は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基であることが好ましく、なかでも、水素原子又はハロゲン原子であることが好ましい。上述の官能基であることで、組成物は、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を得ることができるものとなるからである。
R 121 , R 122 , R 124 , R 125 , R 126 , R 127 , R 129 , R 130 , R 131 , R 132 , R 133 , R 134 , R 137 , R 138 , R 139 , R 140 , R 141 , R 142 , R 143 , R 144 , R 145 , R 146 , R 147 , R 148 and R 149 are preferably alkyl groups having a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom and 1 to 10 carbon atoms, particularly hydrogen. It is preferably an atom. This is because the above-mentioned functional group makes it possible to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption.
R 123 , R 128 and R 136 are preferably hydrogen atoms, halogen atoms, and alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably hydrogen atoms or halogen atoms. This is because the above-mentioned functional group makes it possible to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption.
 上記一般式(5)で表される化合物において、An1q1-で表されるq1価の陰イオンとしては、例えば、テトラキス(ペンタフルオロフェニル)ボレート[(C654B]-、テトラフルオロボレート(BF4-、ヘキサフルオロホスフェート(PF6-、ヘキサフルオロアンチモネート(SbF6-、ヘキサフルオロアルセネート(AsF6-、ヘキサクロロアンチモネート(SbCl6-、トリス(ペンタフルオロメチル)トリフルオロリン酸イオン(FAPアニオン)、過塩素酸イオン(ClO4-、トリフルオロメチル亜硫酸イオン(CF3SO3-、フルオロスルホン酸イオン(FSO3-、トルエンスルホン酸陰イオン、トリニトロベンゼンスルホン酸陰イオン、カンファースルフォネート、ノナフロロブタンスルフォネート、ヘキサデカフロロオクタンスルフォネート、テトラアリールボレート、テトラキス(ペンタフルオロフェニル)ボレート等を挙げることができる。 In the compound represented by the general formula (5), the q1 monovalent anion represented by An 1 Q1-, for example, tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate [(C 6 F 5) 4 B] -, tetra Fluoroborate (BF 4 ) - , Hexafluorophosphate (PF 6 ) - , Hexafluoroantimonate (SbF 6 ) - , Hexafluoroarsenate (AsF 6 ) - , Hexachloroantimonate (SbCl 6 ) - , Tris (pentafluoro) Methyl) trifluorophosphate ion (FAP anion), perchlorate ion (ClO 4 ) - , trifluoromethyl sulfite ion (CF 3 SO 3 ) - , fluorosulfonic acid ion (FSO 3 ) - , toluene sulfonic acid anion, Examples thereof include trinitrobenzene sulfonic acid anion, camphor sulfonate, nonafluorobutane sulfonate, hexadecafluorooctanesulfonate, tetraarylborate, tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate and the like.
(2)熱酸発生剤
 上記熱酸発生剤は、熱により酸を発生させることが可能な化合物であればどのようなものでも問題はなく、特に限定されるものではないが、好ましくは、熱によってルイス酸を放出するオニウム塩である複塩、又はその誘導体が、樹脂組成物を硬化した硬化物の耐熱性が良く、好適である。
 かかる化合物の代表的なものとしては、上記「(1)光酸発生剤」の項に記載の[A]m+[B]m-で表される陽イオンと陰イオンの塩を用いることができる。
(2) Thermal acid generator The thermal acid generator is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound capable of generating an acid by heat, and is not particularly limited, but is preferably heat. A compound salt, which is an onium salt that releases Lewis acid, or a derivative thereof, is suitable because it has good heat resistance of the cured product obtained by curing the resin composition.
As a typical compound, salts of cations and anions represented by [A] m + [B] m- described in the above section "(1) Photoacid generator" can be used. ..
 上記熱酸発生剤は、なかでも、樹脂の硬化性が良く、硬化物の耐熱性が高いことから、下記一般式(12)で表されるスルホニウム塩、又は一般式(13)で表されるスルホニウム塩であることが好ましい。 The thermal acid generator is represented by the sulfonium salt represented by the following general formula (12) or the general formula (13) because the resin has good curability and the cured product has high heat resistance. It is preferably a sulfonium salt.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
(式中、R221及びR222は、各々独立に、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基、炭素原子数6~20の芳香族基又は炭素原子数7~30のアリールアルキル基を表し、該アルキル基、芳香族基及びアリールアルキル基の1又は2以上の水素原子は、各々独立に、水酸基、ハロゲン原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基、炭素原子数6~20の芳香族基、ニトロ基、スルホン基又はシアノ基で置換される場合があり、R221とR222とは炭素原子数2~7のアルキル鎖で環構造を構成している場合があり、
 R223及びR224は、各々独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基、炭素原子数6~20の芳香族基、炭素原子数7~30のアリールアルキル基、ニトロ基、シアノ基又はスルホン基を表し、該アルキル基、芳香族基及びアリールアルキル基の1又は2以上の水素原子は、各々独立に、水酸基、ハロゲン原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基、炭素原子数6~20の芳香族基、炭素原子数7~30のアリールアルキル基、ニトロ基、スルホン基又はシアノ基で置換される場合があり、
 Anq'-はq’価のアニオンを表し、
 q’は1又は2を表し、
 p’は電荷を中性に保つ係数を表す。)
(In the formula, R 221 and R 222 each independently represent an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms. One or more hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group, aromatic group and arylalkyl group are independently hydroxyl groups, halogen atoms, alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, aromatic groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, respectively. It may be substituted with a nitro group, a sulfone group or a cyano group, and R 221 and R 222 may form a ring structure with an alkyl chain having 2 to 7 carbon atoms.
R 223 and R 224 are independently hydrogen atom, halogen atom, alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, and nitro. A group, a cyano group, or a sulfone group, and one or more hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group, aromatic group, and arylalkyl group are independently hydroxylated, halogen atom, and alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. It may be substituted with an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, a nitro group, a sulfone group or a cyano group.
An q'- represents a q'valent anion
q'represents 1 or 2
p'represents a coefficient that keeps the charge neutral. )
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
(式中、R225は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基、炭素原子数6~20の芳香族基、炭素原子数7~30のアリールアルキル基、水酸基、ニトロ基、スルホン基及びシアノ基を表し、該アルキル基、芳香族基及びアリールアルキル基の1又は2以上の水素原子は、各々独立に、水酸基、ハロゲン原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基、炭素原子数6~20の芳香族基、炭素原子数7~30のアリールアルキル基、ニトロ基、スルホン基又はシアノ基で置換される場合があり、
 R226は、水素原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基、炭素原子数6~20の芳香族基又は炭素原子数7~30のアリールアルキル基を表し、該アルキル基、芳香族基及びアリールアルキル基の1又は2以上の水素原子は、各々独立に、水酸基、ハロゲン原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基、炭素原子数6~20の芳香族基、炭素原子数7~30のアリールアルキル基、ニトロ基、スルホン基又はシアノ基で置換される場合があり、
 R227は、構成するメチレン基が、-O-又はS-で表される基で置換される場合がある炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基を表し、
 Anq''-はq’’価のアニオンを表し、
 q’’は1又は2を表し、
 p’’は電荷を中性に保つ係数を表す。)
(In the formula, R 225 is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, and a nitro group. , A sulfone group and a cyano group, and one or more hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group, aromatic group and arylalkyl group are independently hydroxylated, halogen atom, alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and carbon. It may be substituted with an aromatic group having 6 to 20 atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, a nitro group, a sulfone group or a cyano group.
R 226 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, or an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, and the alkyl group, the aromatic group, and the aryl. One or more hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group are independently hydroxyl groups, halogen atoms, alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, aromatic groups having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and aryls having 7 to 30 carbon atoms. May be substituted with alkyl, nitro, sulfone or cyano groups
R 227 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms in which the constituent methylene group may be substituted with a group represented by —O— or S−.
An q''- represents a q''valent anion and
q'' represents 1 or 2
p'' represents the coefficient that keeps the charge neutral. )
 上記一般式(12)及び(13)で表される化合物において、R223、R224及びR225で表されるハロゲン原子並びにR221、R222、R223、R224、R225、R226及びR227で表される基の水素原子の1つ又は2つ以上を置換する場合があるハロゲン原子と、R221、R222、R223、R224、R225、R226及びR227で表される炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基及びR221、R222、R223、R224、R225、R226及びR227で表される基の水素原子の1つ又は2つ以上を置換する場合がある炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基としては、上記「(1)光酸発生剤」の項に記載の一般式(5)中のR21等として用いられるハロゲン原子、アルキル基と同様とすることができる。
 R221、R222、R223、R224、R225、R226で表される炭素原子数6~20の芳香族基並びにR221、R222、R223、R224、R225、R226で表される基の水素原子の1つ又は2つ以上を置換する場合がある炭素原子数6~20の芳香族基としては、芳香環を有する基であればよく、上記「1.ピロメテン化合物」の項に記載の、一般式(I)中のR104等に用いられる、置換基を有していてもよいアリール基として挙げた基のうち、所定の炭素原子数を満たすものが挙げられる。上記芳香族基としては、具体的には、フェニル、ナフチル、アントラニルなどが挙げられる。
 R221、R222、R223、R224、R225、R226で表される炭素原子数7~30のアリールアルキル基並びにR221、R222、R223、R224、R225、R226で表される基の水素原子の1つ又は2つ以上を置換する場合がある炭素原子数7~30のアリールアルキル基としては、上記で説明した炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基中の1つ又は2つ以上の水素原子を、上記炭素原子数6~20の芳香族基で置換した基を使用できる。
In the compounds represented by the general formulas (12) and (13), the halogen atoms represented by R 223 , R 224 and R 225 and the halogen atoms represented by R 221 , R 222 , R 223 , R 224 , R 225 , R 226 and Represented by halogen atoms that may replace one or more of the hydrogen atoms of the group represented by R 227, and by R 221 , R 222 , R 223 , R 224 , R 225 , R 226 and R 227. When substituting one or more hydrogen atoms of an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms and a group represented by R 221 , R 222 , R 223 , R 224 , R 225 , R 226 and R 227. Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms which have the general formula described in the section "(1) photoacid generator" (5) a halogen atom used as R 21 or the like in a same alkyl group can do.
In R 221, R 222, R 223 , R 224, R 225, an aromatic group and R 221 6 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 226, R 222, R 223 , R 224, R 225, R 226 The aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms which may replace one or more of the hydrogen atoms of the represented group may be a group having an aromatic ring, and the above-mentioned "1. Pyromethene compound" may be used. Among the groups listed as the aryl groups which may have a substituent and which are used for R 104 and the like in the general formula (I) described in the above section, those satisfying a predetermined number of carbon atoms can be mentioned. Specific examples of the aromatic group include phenyl, naphthyl, anthranil and the like.
In R 221, R 222, R 223 , R 224, R 225, arylalkyl group and R 221 having 7 to 30 carbon atoms represented by R 226, R 222, R 223 , R 224, R 225, R 226 The arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms which may substitute one or more of the hydrogen atoms of the represented group is one of the alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms described above. Alternatively, a group in which two or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with the above aromatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms can be used.
 上記一般式(12)及び(13)中のp’Anq'-及びp’’Anq''-で表されるq’又はq’’価のアニオンとしては、メタンスルホン酸アニオン、ドデシルスルホン酸アニオン、ベンゼンスルホン酸アニオン、トルエンスルホン酸アニオン、トリフルオロメタンスルホン酸アニオン、ナフタレンスルホン酸アニオン、ジフェニルアミン-4-スルホン酸アニオン、2-アミノ-4-メチル-5-クロロベンゼンスルホン酸アニオン、2-アミノ-5-ニトロベンゼンスルホン酸アニオン、特開平10-235999号公報、特開平10-337959号公報、特開平11-102088号公報、特開2000-108510号公報、特開2000-168233号公報、特開2001-209969号公報、特開2001-322354号公報、特開2006-248180号公報、特開2006-297907号公報、特開平8-253705号公報、特表2004-503379号公報、特開2005-336150号公報、国際公開2006/28006号公報等に記載されたスルホン酸アニオン等の有機スルホン酸アニオンの他、塩化物イオン、臭化物イオン、ヨウ化物イオン、フッ化物イオン、塩素酸イオン、チオシアン酸イオン、過塩素酸イオン、ヘキサフルオロリン酸イオン、ヘキサフルオロアンチモン酸イオン、テトラフルオロホウ酸イオン、オクチルリン酸イオン、ドデシルリン酸イオン、オクタデシルリン酸イオン、フェニルリン酸イオン、ノニルフェニルリン酸イオン、トリス(ペンタフルオロメチル)トリフルオロリン酸イオン(FAPアニオン)2,2’-メチレンビス(4,6-ジ-t-ブチルフェニル)ホスホン酸イオン、テトラキス(ペンタフルオロフェニル)ホウ酸イオン、励起状態にある活性分子を脱励起させる(クエンチングさせる)機能を有するクエンチャー陰イオンやシクロペンタジエニル環にカルボキシル基やホスホン酸基、スルホン酸基等の陰イオン性基を有するフェロセン、ルテオセン等のメタロセン化合物陰イオン等が挙げられる。なかでも耐熱性が高い点から、ヘキサフルオロリン酸イオン、ヘキサフルオロアンチモン酸イオン、テトラキス(ペンタフルオロフェニル)ホウ酸イオンが好ましい。 Examples of the q'or q''valent anion represented by p'An q'- and p''An q''- in the above general formulas (12) and (13) include methanesulfonic acid anion and dodecylsulfone. Acid anion, benzenesulfonic acid anion, toluenesulfonic acid anion, trifluoromethanesulfonic acid anion, naphthalenesulfonic acid anion, diphenylamine-4-sulfonic acid anion, 2-amino-4-methyl-5-chlorobenzenesulfonic acid anion, 2-amino -5-Nitrobenzene Sulfonic Acid Anion, JP-A-10-235999, JP-A-10-337959, JP-A-11-102088, JP-A-2000-108510, JP-A-2000-168233, JP-A-2000-168 2001-2096969, 2001-322354, 2006-248180, 2006-297907, 8-253705, JP-A-2004-503379, 2005- In addition to organic sulfonic acid anions such as sulfonic acid anions described in 336150 and 2006/28006, chloride ions, bromide ions, iodide ions, fluoride ions, chlorates ions, and thiosocyanate ions. , Perchlorate ion, hexafluorophosphate ion, hexafluoroantimonate ion, tetrafluoroborate ion, octyl phosphate ion, dodecyl phosphate ion, octadecyl phosphate ion, phenyl phosphate ion, nonylphenyl phosphate ion, Tris (Pentafluoromethyl) Trifluorophosphate ion (FAP anion) 2,2'-methylenebis (4,6-di-t-butylphenyl) phosphonate ion, tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate ion, excited activity Quencher anion having a function of deexciting (quenching) a molecule or a metallocene compound anion such as ferrocene or luteosen having an anionic group such as a carboxyl group, a phosphonic acid group, or a sulfonic acid group on a cyclopentadienyl ring. Ions and the like can be mentioned. Of these, hexafluorophosphate ion, hexafluoroantimonate ion, and tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate ion are preferable because of their high heat resistance.
 上記熱酸発生剤が熱により酸を発生し、組成物を硬化させることができる温度の範囲は、特に限定されないが、好適な耐熱性を有する硬化物が得られる点や、プロセス中の熱安定性が良好である点で、50℃以上250℃以下が好ましく、100℃以上220℃以下がより好ましく、130℃以上200℃以下がなお好ましく、150℃以上180℃以下が更に好ましい。上記組成物の硬化物の形成が容易だからである。 The temperature range in which the thermal acid generator can generate an acid by heat and cure the composition is not particularly limited, but a cured product having suitable heat resistance can be obtained and thermal stability during the process is obtained. From the viewpoint of good properties, 50 ° C. or higher and 250 ° C. or lower is preferable, 100 ° C. or higher and 220 ° C. or lower is more preferable, 130 ° C. or higher and 200 ° C. or lower is still more preferable, and 150 ° C. or higher and 180 ° C. or lower is further preferable. This is because it is easy to form a cured product of the above composition.
 また、本発明の組成物に用いられる熱酸発生剤として好適に使用できる市販品としては、例えば、サンエイドSI-B2A、サンエイドSI-B3A、サンエイドSI-B3、サンエイドSI-B4、サンエイドSI-60、サンエイドSI-80、サンエイドSI-100、サンエイドSI-110、サンエイドSI-150(以上三新化学工業(株)製)、アデカオプトンCP-66、アデカオプトンCP-77(以上(株)ADEKA製)等が挙げられる。これらは1種単独或いは2種以上を組合せて用いることができる。 Examples of commercially available products that can be suitably used as the thermoacid generator used in the composition of the present invention include Sun Aid SI-B2A, Sun Aid SI-B3A, Sun Aid SI-B3, Sun Aid SI-B4, and Sun Aid SI-60. , Sun Aid SI-80, Sun Aid SI-100, Sun Aid SI-110, Sun Aid SI-150 (manufactured by Sanshin Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Adeka Opton CP-66, Adeka Opton CP-77 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), etc. Can be mentioned. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
4.その他の成分:溶剤
 上記組成物は、必要に応じて溶剤を含むことができる。
 上記溶剤は、常温(25℃)大気圧下で液状であるものであり、組成物中の各成分を分散又は溶解可能なものである。
 上記溶剤は、上記酸発生剤の作用により、上記カチオン重合性化合物と重合しないものである。
 したがって、常温(25℃)大気圧下で液状であっても、上記「2.カチオン重合性成分」に記載されるカチオン重合性化合物は、上記溶剤には含まれない。
 また、上記溶剤は、上記組成物の各成分を分散又は溶解するために用いられるものであるため、上記「1.ピロメテン化合物」に記載されるピロメテン化合物、「3.酸発生剤」に記載の酸発生剤等も、常温大気圧下で液状であっても、上記溶剤には含まれない。
4. Other Ingredients: Solvent The above composition may contain a solvent, if necessary.
The solvent is liquid at normal temperature (25 ° C.) and atmospheric pressure, and can disperse or dissolve each component in the composition.
The solvent does not polymerize with the cationically polymerizable compound due to the action of the acid generator.
Therefore, the cationically polymerizable compound described in the above "2. Cationic polymerizable component" is not included in the solvent even if it is liquid at normal temperature (25 ° C.) at atmospheric pressure.
Further, since the solvent is used for dispersing or dissolving each component of the composition, the pyrromethene compound described in "1. Pyrromethene compound" and "3. Acid generator" described above. Acid generators and the like are not included in the above solvents even if they are liquid at room temperature and atmospheric pressure.
 このような溶剤としては、水、有機溶剤のいずれも用いることができるが、有機溶剤を好ましく用いることができる。 As such a solvent, either water or an organic solvent can be used, but an organic solvent can be preferably used.
 有機溶剤としては、通常、25℃で液状であり、上記組成物を用いて硬化物を形成する際に乾燥により少なくとも一部を除去できるものが用いられる。上記有機溶剤としては、ケトン系溶剤、エーテル系溶剤、エステル系溶剤、アルコール系溶剤、エーテルエステル系溶剤、芳香族系溶剤、脂肪族炭化水素系溶剤、パラフィン系溶剤、ハロゲン化脂肪族炭化水素系溶剤、ハロゲン化芳香族炭化水素系溶剤、カルビトール系溶剤、アニリン、トリエチルアミン、ピリジン、酢酸、アセトニトリル、二硫化炭素、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、N-メチルピロリドン、ジメチルスルホキシド等が挙げられる。これらの溶剤は1種又は2種以上の混合溶剤として使用することができる。溶剤としては国際公開2017/098996号公報等に記載のものも使用することができる。 As the organic solvent, a solvent that is usually liquid at 25 ° C. and at least a part of which can be removed by drying when forming a cured product using the above composition is used. Examples of the organic solvent include ketone solvents, ether solvents, ester solvents, alcohol solvents, ether ester solvents, aromatic solvents, aliphatic hydrocarbon solvents, paraffin solvents, halogenated aliphatic hydrocarbons. Solvents, halogenated aromatic hydrocarbon solvents, carbitol solvents, aniline, triethylamine, pyridine, acetic acid, acetonitrile, carbon disulfide, N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, N-methylpyrrolidone, dimethyl Examples include sulfoxide and the like. These solvents can be used as one kind or a mixed solvent of two or more kinds. As the solvent, those described in International Publication No. 2017/098996 can also be used.
 ケトン系溶剤としては、ケトン構造を有し、エステル構造及びアルコール性水酸基を有しないものを用いることができ、メチルエチルケトン、メチルアミルケトン、ジエチルケトン、アセトン、メチルイソプロピルケトン、メチルイソブチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、2-ヘプタノン等が挙げられる。 As the ketone solvent, a solvent having a ketone structure and not having an ester structure and an alcoholic hydroxyl group can be used, and methyl ethyl ketone, methyl amyl ketone, diethyl ketone, acetone, methyl isopropyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone, 2 -Heptanone and the like can be mentioned.
 エーテル系溶剤としては、エチルエーテル、ジオキサン、テトラヒドロフラン、1,2-ジメトキシエタン、1,2-ジエトキシエタン、ジプロピレングリコールジメチルエーテル等が挙げられる。 Examples of the ether solvent include ethyl ether, dioxane, tetrahydrofuran, 1,2-dimethoxyethane, 1,2-diethoxyethane, dipropylene glycol dimethyl ether and the like.
 エステル系溶剤としては、酢酸メチル、酢酸エチル、酢酸-n-プロピル、酢酸イソプロピル、酢酸n-ブチル、酢酸シクロヘキシル、乳酸エチル、コハク酸ジメチル、テキサノール等が挙げられる。 Examples of the ester solvent include methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, n-propyl acetate, isopropyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, cyclohexyl acetate, ethyl lactate, dimethyl succinate, texanol and the like.
 セロソルブ系溶剤としては、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル等が挙げられる。 Examples of the cellosolve solvent include ethylene glycol monomethyl ether and ethylene glycol monoethyl ether.
 アルコール系溶剤としては、エステル構造を含まず、アルコール性水酸基を有するものであればよく、メタノール、エタノール、イソ-又はn-プロパノール、イソ-又はn-ブタノール、アミルアルコール、ジアセトンアルコール等が挙げられる。 The alcohol solvent may be any solvent which does not contain an ester structure and has an alcoholic hydroxyl group, and examples thereof include methanol, ethanol, iso- or n-propanol, iso- or n-butanol, amyl alcohol, and diacetone alcohol. Be done.
 エーテルエステル系溶剤としては、エステル構造及びエステル構造を構成する部位以外にエーテル構造を有するものを用いることができる。また、2以上のエステル構造を有するものもエーテルエステル系溶剤として用いることができる。
 上記エーテルエステル系溶剤としては、アルコール性水酸基を有しないものを用いることができ、エチレングリコールモノメチルアセテート、エチレングリコールモノエチルアセテート、プロピレングリコール-1-モノメチルエーテル-2-アセテート(PGMEA)、ジプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールジアセテート、3-メトキシブチルアセテート、エトキシエチルプロピオネート、3-メトキシブチルアセテート、シクロヘキサノールアセテート等が挙げられる。
As the ether ester solvent, a solvent having an ether structure other than the ester structure and the portion constituting the ester structure can be used. Further, those having two or more ester structures can also be used as the ether ester solvent.
As the ether ester solvent, a solvent having no alcoholic hydroxyl group can be used, and ethylene glycol monomethyl acetate, ethylene glycol monoethyl acetate, propylene glycol-1-monomethyl ether-2-acetate (PGMEA), and dipropylene glycol can be used. Examples thereof include monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol diacetate, 3-methoxybutyl acetate, ethoxyethyl propionate, 3-methoxybutyl acetate, cyclohexanol acetate and the like.
 芳香族系溶剤としては、ベンゼン、トルエン、キシレン等が挙げられる。脂肪族炭化水素系溶剤としては、ヘキサン、ヘプタン、オクタン、シクロヘキサン等が挙げられる。テルペン系炭化水素油としては、テレピン油、D-リモネン、ピネン等が挙げられる。パラフィン系溶剤としては、ミネラルスピリット、スワゾール#310(コスモ松山石油(株))、ソルベッソ#100(エクソン化学(株))等が挙げられる。ハロゲン化脂肪族炭化水素系溶剤としては、四塩化炭素、クロロホルム、トリクロロエチレン、塩化メチレン、1,2-ジクロロエタン等が挙げられる。ハロゲン化芳香族炭化水素系溶剤としては、クロロベンゼン等が挙げられる。 Examples of aromatic solvents include benzene, toluene, xylene and the like. Examples of the aliphatic hydrocarbon solvent include hexane, heptane, octane, cyclohexane and the like. Examples of the terpene-based hydrocarbon oil include turpentine oil, D-limonene, pinene and the like. Examples of the paraffin-based solvent include mineral spirit, Swazole # 310 (Cosmo Matsuyama Petroleum Co., Ltd.), Solbesso # 100 (Exxon Chemical Co., Ltd.) and the like. Examples of the halogenated aliphatic hydrocarbon solvent include carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, trichlorethylene, methylene chloride, 1,2-dichloroethane and the like. Examples of the halogenated aromatic hydrocarbon solvent include chlorobenzene and the like.
 有機溶剤の沸点としては塗膜の乾燥容易性や取扱性の点から、例えば60℃以上250℃以下であることが好ましく、80℃以上200℃以下であることがより好ましく、100℃以上180℃以下であることが好ましく、120℃以上170℃以下であることが好ましい。上記沸点が上述の範囲内であることで、保存時の揮発が少なく、上記組成物は、分散安定性に優れたものとなる。また、上記沸点であることで、上記組成物は、吐出部分に付着した場合に、異物の発生を抑制できるからである。また、硬化物形成時の乾燥工程(プリベーク工程)、加熱硬化工程(ポストベーク工程)等の加熱処理時に、有機溶剤を容易に除去でき、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を更に容易に得ることができるからである。 The boiling point of the organic solvent is preferably, for example, 60 ° C. or higher and 250 ° C. or lower, more preferably 80 ° C. or higher and 200 ° C. or lower, and 100 ° C. or higher and 180 ° C. The temperature is preferably 120 ° C. or higher and 170 ° C. or lower. When the boiling point is within the above range, the volatilization during storage is small, and the composition has excellent dispersion stability. Further, since the boiling point is the above, the composition can suppress the generation of foreign substances when it adheres to the discharge portion. Further, the organic solvent can be easily removed during the heat treatment such as the drying step (pre-baking step) and the heat curing step (post-baking step) at the time of forming the cured product, and the cured product having excellent light absorption can be obtained more easily. Because it can be done.
 上記有機溶剤の中でも、ケトン類、アルコール系溶剤、エーテルエステル系溶剤、芳香族系溶剤等が一般的であり、なかでも、アルコール系溶剤及びエーテルエステル系溶剤の少なくとも一方を含むことが好ましく、とりわけジアセトンアルコール、プロピレングリコール-1-モノメチルエーテル-2-アセテート(PGMEA)及びジプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールジアセテートから選ばれる少なくとも一種を含むことが好ましい。上記有機溶剤は、上記特定ピロメテン化合物の分散安定性が良好だからである。また、上記有機溶剤を含む組成物は、保存時の揮発が少なく、分散安定性に優れた組成物の形成が容易である。また、硬化物形成時の乾燥工程(プリベーク工程)、加熱硬化工程(ポストベーク工程)等の100℃以上の加熱処理時に、容易に除去でき、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を更に容易に得ることができるからである。 Among the above organic solvents, ketones, alcohol solvents, ether ester solvents, aromatic solvents and the like are common, and among them, it is preferable to contain at least one of an alcohol solvent and an ether ester solvent, in particular. It preferably contains at least one selected from diacetone alcohol, propylene glycol-1-monomethyl ether-2-acetate (PGMEA) and dipropylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol diacetate. This is because the organic solvent has good dispersion stability of the specific pyrromethene compound. In addition, the composition containing the organic solvent has less volatilization during storage, and it is easy to form a composition having excellent dispersion stability. Further, it can be easily removed during heat treatment of 100 ° C. or higher such as a drying step (pre-baking step) and a heat curing step (post-baking step) at the time of forming a cured product, and a cured product having excellent light absorption can be obtained more easily. Because it can be done.
 上記有機溶剤の含有量は、上記溶剤100質量部中に、50質量部以上であることが好ましく、なかでも、70質量部以上であることが好ましく、特に、90質量部以上であることが好ましい。上記含有量が上述の範囲であることで、上記組成物は、染料の分散安定性に優れたものとなるからである。したがって、上記組成物は、異物が少ない硬化物を形成容易となるからである。 The content of the organic solvent is preferably 50 parts by mass or more, particularly preferably 70 parts by mass or more, and particularly preferably 90 parts by mass or more in 100 parts by mass of the solvent. .. This is because when the content is in the above range, the composition is excellent in the dispersion stability of the dye. Therefore, the above composition facilitates the formation of a cured product having few foreign substances.
 上記溶剤のSP値としては、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を得られるものであればよいが、7以上12以下であることが好ましく、なかでも、8以上11以下であることが好ましく、特に、8.5以上10.5以下であることが好ましい。上記SP値が、上述の範囲であることで、上記特定ピロメテン化合物の分散安定性に優れる。その結果、分散安定性に優れた組成物の形成が容易となり、異物が少ない硬化物を形成容易となるとともに、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を得られるからである。
 なお、SP値は、Fedorsの方法により算出する。具体的には、SP値は、化合物の各原子または原子団の25℃における蒸発エネルギーΔe(cal)と、化合物を形成する各原子または原子団の25℃におけるモル容積ΔV(cm3)とから、下記の式により算出する。
SP値=(ΣΔe/ΣΔv)1/2
 なお、化合物が混合物である場合は、個々の成分のSP値を算出し、これらのSP値のそれぞれに対して各構成成分のモル分率を乗じたものを合算して算出する。
 溶剤のSP値は例えば、以下のとおりである。
ジアセトンアルコール:SP値 10.1
PGMEA:SP値 8.7
メチルエチルケトン:SP値 9
ジプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート:SP値 8.7
プロピレングリコールジアセテート:SP値 9.6
The SP value of the solvent may be any as long as it can obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption, but it is preferably 7 or more and 12 or less, and particularly preferably 8 or more and 11 or less. , 8.5 or more and 10.5 or less is preferable. When the SP value is in the above range, the dispersion stability of the specific pyrromethene compound is excellent. As a result, it becomes easy to form a composition having excellent dispersion stability, it becomes easy to form a cured product having few foreign substances, and a cured product having excellent light absorption can be obtained.
The SP value is calculated by the Fedors method. Specifically, the SP value is derived from the evaporation energy Δe (cal) of each atom or atomic group of the compound at 25 ° C. and the molar volume ΔV (cm 3 ) of each atom or atomic group forming the compound at 25 ° C. , Calculated by the following formula.
SP value = (ΣΔe / ΣΔv) 1/2
When the compound is a mixture, the SP values of the individual components are calculated, and each of these SP values is multiplied by the mole fraction of each component to be added up.
The SP value of the solvent is, for example, as follows.
Diacetone alcohol: SP value 10.1
PGMEA: SP value 8.7
Methyl ethyl ketone: SP value 9
Dipropylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate: SP value 8.7
Propylene glycol diacetate: SP value 9.6
 上記溶剤の含有量は、光吸収性に優れ且つ異物が少ない硬化物を製造可能なものであればよく、上記組成物100質量部中に、1質量部以上99質量部以下とすることができ、10質量部以上80質量部以下であることが好ましく、15質量部以上60質量部以下であることがより好ましく、20質量部以上55質量部以下であることが特に好ましい。上記含有量が上述の範囲であることで、上記組成物は、異物が少ない硬化物を形成容易となると共に、光吸収性に優れた硬化物の製造が一層容易となるからである。 The content of the solvent may be 1 part by mass or more and 99 parts by mass or less in 100 parts by mass of the composition as long as it can produce a cured product having excellent light absorption and few foreign substances. It is preferably 10 parts by mass or more and 80 parts by mass or less, more preferably 15 parts by mass or more and 60 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 20 parts by mass or more and 55 parts by mass or less. This is because when the content is in the above range, the composition facilitates the formation of a cured product having few foreign substances and further facilitates the production of a cured product having excellent light absorption.
 更に、溶剤がアルコール系溶剤及びエーテルエステル系溶剤の少なくとも一方を含む場合、溶剤中のアルコール系溶剤及びエーテルエステル系溶剤の合計の含有量は、それらの溶剤を用いることによる効果を高める点から、溶剤100質量部中、50質量部以上であることが好ましく、60質量部以上であることがより好ましく、70質量部以上であることが更に好ましく、80質量部以上であることが特に好ましく、90質量部以上であることが最も好ましく、100質量部であってもよい。上記組成物は、異物が少ない硬化物を形成容易となると共に、光吸収性に優れた硬化物の製造が一層容易となるからである。 Further, when the solvent contains at least one of an alcohol solvent and an ether ester solvent, the total content of the alcohol solvent and the ether ester solvent in the solvent enhances the effect of using those solvents. Of 100 parts by mass of the solvent, it is preferably 50 parts by mass or more, more preferably 60 parts by mass or more, further preferably 70 parts by mass or more, particularly preferably 80 parts by mass or more, and 90 parts by mass. It is most preferably parts by mass or more, and may be 100 parts by mass. This is because the above composition facilitates the formation of a cured product having few foreign substances and further facilitates the production of a cured product having excellent light absorption.
5.その他の成分:増感剤
 本発明の組成物は、増感剤を用いることができる。増感剤としては、例えば、アントラセン系化合物、ナフタレン系化合物、カルバゾール誘導体、ベンゾカルバゾール誘導体を好ましく用いることができ、なかでも、カルバゾール誘導体、ベンゾカルバゾール誘導体を好ましく用いることができ、特に、ベンゾカルバゾール誘導体を好ましく用いることができる。上記増感剤を用いることで、異物が少ない硬化物を形成容易となると共に、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を得るとの効果を阻害せず、硬化性等を向上できるからである。また、染料のブリードアウトを効果的に抑制でき、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を得るとの効果をより効果的に発揮できるからである。また、上記組成物は、耐透湿性等にもより優れたものとなるからである。
5. Other Ingredients: Sensitizer A sensitizer can be used in the composition of the present invention. As the sensitizer, for example, anthracene-based compounds, naphthalene-based compounds, carbazole derivatives, and benzocarbazole derivatives can be preferably used, and among them, carbazole derivatives and benzocarbazole derivatives can be preferably used, and in particular, benzocarbazole derivatives. Can be preferably used. This is because by using the sensitizer, it becomes easy to form a cured product with few foreign substances, and the effect of obtaining a cured product having excellent light absorption is not impaired, and the curability and the like can be improved. Further, the bleed-out of the dye can be effectively suppressed, and the effect of obtaining a cured product having excellent light absorption can be more effectively exhibited. In addition, the above composition is also more excellent in moisture permeation resistance and the like.
 上記アントラセン系化合物としては、アントラセン構造を有する化合物であればよく、例えば下記式(IIIa)で表されるものが挙げられる。 The anthracene-based compound may be any compound having an anthracene structure, and examples thereof include those represented by the following formula (IIIa).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
(式中、R201a及びR202aは、それぞれ独立に、炭素原子数1~6のアルキル基又は炭素原子数2~12のアルコキシアルキル基を表し、R203aは水素原子又は炭素原子数1~6のアルキル基を表す。) (In the formula, R 201a and R 202a independently represent an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms or an alkoxyalkyl group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, and R 203a is a hydrogen atom or 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Represents the alkyl group of.)
 R201a、R202a及びR203aで表される炭素原子数1~6のアルキル基としては、上記一般式(I)中のR101等に用いられる炭素原子数1~30のアルキル基のうち、所定の炭素原子数を満たすものを用いることができる。
 R201a及びR202aで表される炭素原子数2~12のアルコキシアルキル基としては、上記一般式(I-1)中のX1等に用いられる炭素原子数1~30のアルコキシ基により、水素原子が置換されたアルキル基のうち所定の炭素原子数のものを用いることができる。
The alkyl groups having 1 to 6 carbon atoms represented by R 201a , R 202a and R 203a are among the alkyl groups having 1 to 30 carbon atoms used in R 101 and the like in the above general formula (I). Those satisfying a predetermined number of carbon atoms can be used.
The alkoxyalkyl group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms represented by R 201a and R 202a is hydrogen due to the alkoxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms used in X 1 or the like in the above general formula (I-1). Among the alkyl groups in which the atoms are substituted, those having a predetermined number of carbon atoms can be used.
 上記ナフタレン系化合物としては、ナフタレン構造を有する化合物であればよく、例えば、下記式(IIIb)で表されるものが挙げられる。 The naphthalene-based compound may be any compound having a naphthalene structure, and examples thereof include those represented by the following formula (IIIb).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
(式中、R204a及びR205aは、それぞれ独立に、炭素原子数1~6のアルキル基を表す。) (In the formula, R 204a and R 205a each independently represent an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.)
 R204a及びR205aで表される炭素原子数1~6のアルキル基としては、上記一般式(I)中のR101等で表されるアルキル基として例示した基のうち、所定の炭素原子数を満たすものを用いることができる。 The alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms represented by R 204a and R 205a has a predetermined number of carbon atoms among the groups exemplified as the alkyl group represented by R 101 or the like in the above general formula (I). Anything that satisfies the above can be used.
 上記カルバゾール誘導体としては、カルバゾール構造を有する化合物であればよく、例えば、以下の一般式(VI)で表されるものが挙げられる。 The carbazole derivative may be any compound having a carbazole structure, and examples thereof include those represented by the following general formula (VI).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
(式中、R226aは水素原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基、ビニル基又は炭素原子数6~20のアリール基を表し、R227a、R228a、R229a、R230a、R231a、R232a、R233a及びR234aは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基、炭素原子数1~10のアルコキシ基、炭素原子数6~20のアリール基、シアノ基、水酸基、カルボキシル基を表す。) (In the formula, R 226a represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a vinyl group or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and represents R 227a , R 228a , R 229a , R 230a , R 231a , R 232a , R 233a and R 234a independently contain a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms. Represents a cyano group, a hydroxyl group, or a carboxyl group.)
 R226a、R227a、R228a、R229a、R230a、R231a、R232a、R233a及びR234aで表される炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基及び炭素原子数6~20のアリール基の例としては、上記一般式(I)中のR101等で表されるアルキル基及びR104等で表されるアリール基について例示したもののうち、所定の炭素原子数を満たすものを用いることができる。R227a、R228a、R229a、R230a、R231a、R232a、R233a及びR234aで表されるアルコキシ基としては式(5)のR21等で表されるアルコキシ基と同様のものを用いることができる。R227a、R228a、R229a、R230a、R231a、R232a、R233a及びR234aで表されるハロゲン原子としては、上記一般式(I)中のR101等の置換基として例示したハロゲン原子と同じものが挙げられる。 Of the alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms and the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms represented by R 226a , R 227a , R 228a , R 229a , R 230a , R 231a , R 232a , R 233a and R 234a. As an example, among those exemplified for the alkyl group represented by R 101 and the like and the aryl group represented by R 104 and the like in the above general formula (I), those satisfying a predetermined number of carbon atoms can be used. .. The alkoxy group represented by R 227a , R 228a , R 229a , R 230a , R 231a , R 232a , R 233a and R 234a is the same as the alkoxy group represented by R 21 or the like in the formula (5). Can be used. The halogen atoms represented by R 227a , R 228a , R 229a , R 230a , R 231a , R 232a , R 233a and R 234a are halogens exemplified as substituents such as R 101 in the above general formula (I). The same thing as an atom can be mentioned.
 本発明においては、R226aが、水素原子又は炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基であることが好ましく、水素原子であることが更に好ましい。上記組成物は、硬化性に優れたものとなるからである。
 本発明においては、R227a、R228a、R229a、R230a、R231a、R232a、R233a及びR234aが、水素原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基又は炭素原子数1~10のアルコキシ基であることが好ましく、そのような化合物のなかでもR228a、R229a、R230a、R231aのうち1以上がアルコキシ基であり、R227a、R232a、R233a及びR234aの少なくとも1以上がアルコキシ基であることが好ましく、とりわけ、R228a、R229a、R230a、R231aのうち1以上がアルコキシ基であり、R227a、R232a、R233a及びR234aの少なくとも1以上がアルコキシ基であり残りの基が水素原子であるものが好ましい。上記組成物は、硬化性に優れたものとなるからである。
In the present invention, R 226a is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably a hydrogen atom. This is because the above composition has excellent curability.
In the present invention, R 227a , R 228a , R 229a , R 230a , R 231a , R 232a , R 233a and R 234a are hydrogen atoms, alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or 1 to 10 carbon atoms. It is preferably an alkoxy group, and among such compounds, one or more of R 228a , R 229a , R 230a , and R 231a is an alkoxy group, and at least one of R 227a , R 232a , R 233a, and R 234a. The above are preferably alkoxy groups, and in particular, one or more of R 228a , R 229a , R 230a , and R 231a are alkoxy groups, and at least one or more of R 227a , R 232a , R 233a, and R 234a are alkoxy groups. It is preferable that the group is a group and the remaining group is a hydrogen atom. This is because the above composition has excellent curability.
 上記ベンゾカルバゾール誘導体としては、ベンゾカルバゾール構造を有するものであればよく、例えば、以下の一般式(VII-1)~(VII-3)で表されるものが挙げられる。
 本発明においては、なかでも、上記ベンゾカルバゾール誘導体が、上記一般式(VII-1)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。上記組成物は、硬化性に優れたものとなるからである。
The benzocarbazole derivative may be any derivative having a benzocarbazole structure, and examples thereof include those represented by the following general formulas (VII-1) to (VII-3).
In the present invention, the benzocarbazole derivative is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (VII-1). This is because the above composition has excellent curability.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
(式中、R235は水素原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基、ビニル基又は炭素原子数6~20のアリール基を表し、R236、R237、R238、R239、R240、R241、R242、R243、R244及びR245は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基、炭素原子数6~20のアリール基、シアノ基、水酸基、カルボキシル基を表す。) (In the formula, R 235 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a vinyl group or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and represents R 236 , R 237 , R 238 , R 239 , R 240 , R 241 and R 242 , R 243 , R 244 and R 245 independently have a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, a cyano group and a hydroxyl group. , Represents a carboxyl group.)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
(式中、R246は水素原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基、ビニル基又は炭素原子数6~20のアリール基を表し、R247、R248、R249、R250、R251、R252、R253、R254、R255及びR256は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基、炭素原子数6~20のアリール基、シアノ基、水酸基又はカルボキシル基を表す。) (In the formula, R 246 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a vinyl group or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and represents R 247 , R 248 , R 249 , R 250 , R 251 and R 252 , R 253 , R 254 , R 255 and R 256 independently have a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, a cyano group and a hydroxyl group, respectively. Or represents a carboxyl group.)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
(式中、R257は水素原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基、ビニル基又は炭素原子数6~20のアリール基を表し、R258、R259、R260、R261、R262、R263、R264、R265、R266及びR267は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基、炭素原子数6~20のアリール基、シアノ基、水酸基、カルボキシル基を表す。) (In the formula, R 257 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a vinyl group or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and R 258 , R 259 , R 260 , R 261 and R 262 , R 263 , R 264 , R 265 , R 266 and R 267 independently have a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, a cyano group and a hydroxyl group. , Represents a carboxyl group.)
 R235、R236、R237、R238、R239、R240、R241、R242、R243、R244、R245、R246、R247、R248、R249、R250、R251、R252、R253、R254、R255、R256、R257、R258、R259、R260、R261、R262、R263、R264、R265、R266及びR267(以下、R235等とも記載する)表される、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基、炭素原子数6~20のアリール基としては、上記一般式(I)中のR101等で表されるアルキル基及びR104等で表されるアリール基について例示したもののうち、所定の炭素原子数を満たすものを用いることができる。R235等で表されるハロゲン原子としては、上記一般式(I)中のR101等の置換基として例示したハロゲン原子と同じものが挙げられる。 R 235 , R 236 , R 237 , R 238 , R 239 , R 240 , R 241 , R 242 , R 243 , R 244 , R 245 , R 246 , R 247 , R 248 , R 249 , R 250 , R 251 , R 252 , R 253 , R 254 , R 255 , R 256 , R 257 , R 258 , R 259 , R 260 , R 261 , R 262 , R 263 , R 264 , R 265 , R 266 and R 267 (below) , R 235, etc.) The alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms and the aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms are alkyl represented by R 101 or the like in the above general formula (I). Among those exemplified for the group and the aryl group represented by R 104 or the like, those satisfying a predetermined number of carbon atoms can be used. Examples of the halogen atom represented by R 235 and the like include the same halogen atoms exemplified as substituents such as R 101 in the above general formula (I).
 本発明においては、式(VII-1)~(VII-3)で表されるベンゾカルバゾール誘導体の中でも、ベンゾカルバゾール環の窒素原子に結合する基であるR235、R246及びR257が、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基であることが好ましく、なかでも、炭素原子数3~10の分岐アルキル基であることが好ましい。上記組成物は、硬化性に優れたものとなるからである。
 本発明においては、上記R236、R237、R238、R239、R240、R241、R242、R243、R244、R245、R247、R248、R249、R250、R251、R252、R253、R254、R255、R256、R258、R259、R260、R261、R262、R263、R264、R265、R266及びR267が、水素原子、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基であることが好ましく、なかでも、水素原子であることが好ましい。上述の基が上述の基又は原子であることで、上記組成物は、硬化性に優れたものとなるからである。
In the present invention, among the benzocarbazole derivatives represented by the formulas (VII-1) to (VII-3), R 235 , R 246 and R 257 , which are groups bonded to the nitrogen atom of the benzocarbazole ring, are carbons. It is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 atoms, and more preferably a branched alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms. This is because the above composition has excellent curability.
In the present invention, the above R 236 , R 237 , R 238 , R 239 , R 240 , R 241 , R 242 , R 243 , R 244 , R 245 , R 247 , R 248 , R 249 , R 250 , R 251 , R 252 , R 253 , R 254 , R 255 , R 256 , R 258 , R 259 , R 260 , R 261 , R 262 , R 263 , R 264 , R 265 , R 266 and R 267 are hydrogen atoms, It is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably a hydrogen atom. This is because when the above-mentioned group is the above-mentioned group or atom, the above-mentioned composition has excellent curability.
 上記増感剤の含有量としては、カチオン重合性成分同士の重合を促進可能なものであればよく、例えば、単独又は複数種の合計で、上記組成物の固形分100質量部中に、0.01質量部以上6質量部以下とすることができ、なかでも、0.1質量部以上3質量部以下であることが好ましく、特に、0.5質量部以上2質量部以下であることが好ましい。上記組成物は、硬化性に優れたものとなるからである。 The content of the sensitizer may be any as long as it can promote the polymerization of cationically polymerizable components. For example, 0 in 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition, either alone or in total of a plurality of types. It can be 0.01 part by mass or more and 6 parts by mass or less, and more preferably 0.1 part by mass or more and 3 parts by mass or less, and particularly 0.5 parts by mass or more and 2 parts by mass or less. preferable. This is because the above composition has excellent curability.
 上記増感剤のカチオン重合性成分に対する使用割合は特に限定されず、本発明の目的を阻害しない範囲内で概ね通常の使用割合で使用すればよい。
 上記増感剤の含有量は、例えば、酸発生剤100質量部に対して、1質量部以上200質量部以下であることが好ましく、5質量部以上100質量部以下であることが好ましく、10質量部以上50質量部以下であることが好ましく、15質量部以上35質量部以下であることが好ましい。上記使用割合が上述の範囲であることで、硬化性に優れたものとなるからである。
The ratio of the sensitizer to the cationically polymerizable component is not particularly limited, and the sensitizer may be used at a generally normal ratio within a range that does not impair the object of the present invention.
The content of the sensitizer is, for example, preferably 1 part by mass or more and 200 parts by mass or less, and preferably 5 parts by mass or more and 100 parts by mass or less with respect to 100 parts by mass of the acid generator. It is preferably 5 parts by mass or more and 50 parts by mass or less, and preferably 15 parts by mass or more and 35 parts by mass or less. This is because when the usage ratio is within the above range, the curability is excellent.
6.その他の成分:式(I)に該当しない染料
 本発明の組成物は、上記特定ピロメテン化合物の他にその他の染料を含有していてもよい。そのような染料としては、顔料及び染料が挙げられ、染料であることが組成物の硬度や分散安定性の点で好ましい。染料としては、分散性の点から、上記式(I)に該当しないピロメテン系染料のほか、シアニン系染料、メロシアニン系染料、アゾ系染料、テトラアザポルフィリン系染料、キサンテン系染料、トリアリールメタン系染料等を好ましく挙げることができる。
 本発明においては特定ピロメテン化合物により青色光及び緑色光の重なりを低減した上で、更に、緑色光及び赤色光の重なりを低減し、色純度を向上する光学フィルタに用いることが容易となる観点から、本発明の組成物が、上記特定ピロメテン化合物に加えて、550nm以上610nm以下に最大吸収波長を有する染料を含むことが好ましい。なかでも、550nm以上610nm以下に最大吸収波長を有する染料として、テトラアザポルフィリン系染料を含むことが好ましい。これらの染料の組合せは、凝集等を生じることが少なく、450nm以上550nm未満の吸収と、550nm以上610nm以下の吸収とを両立容易だからである。
6. Other Ingredients: Dyes Not Corresponding to Formula (I) The composition of the present invention may contain other dyes in addition to the above-mentioned specific pyrromethene compound. Examples of such dyes include pigments and dyes, and dyes are preferable in terms of hardness and dispersion stability of the composition. As dyes, in addition to pyrromethene dyes that do not correspond to the above formula (I) from the viewpoint of dispersibility, cyanine dyes, merocyanine dyes, azo dyes, tetraazaporphyrin dyes, xanthene dyes, and triarylmethane dyes. Dyes and the like can be preferably mentioned.
In the present invention, from the viewpoint that the specific pyrromethene compound reduces the overlap of blue light and green light, and further reduces the overlap of green light and red light, making it easy to use in an optical filter for improving color purity. The composition of the present invention preferably contains, in addition to the above-mentioned specific pyrromethene compound, a dye having a maximum absorption wavelength of 550 nm or more and 610 nm or less. Among them, it is preferable to include a tetraazaporphyrin dye as a dye having a maximum absorption wavelength of 550 nm or more and 610 nm or less. This is because the combination of these dyes is less likely to cause aggregation and the like, and it is easy to achieve both absorption of 450 nm or more and less than 550 nm and absorption of 550 nm or more and 610 nm or less.
 上記テトラアザポルフィリン系染料は、ポルフィリン構造を有し、かつ所望の波長範囲の光を吸収可能なものであればよい。
 このようなテトラアザポルフィリン系染料としては、例えば、特開2018-081218号公報等に記載の金属含有ポルフィリン化合物、国際公開2017/010076号公報に記載のアザポルフィリン系染料等を用いることができる。
 本発明においては、なかでも、上記テトラアザポルフィリン系染料が下記一般式(II)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。
 上記テトラアザポルフィリン系染料が、上記一般式(II)で表される化合物であることにより、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を得ることができるとの効果をより効果的に発揮できるからである。
The tetraazaporphyrin dye may have a porphyrin structure and can absorb light in a desired wavelength range.
As such a tetraazaporphyrin dye, for example, a metal-containing porphyrin compound described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-081218, an azaporphyrin dye described in International Publication No. 2017/010076, and the like can be used.
In the present invention, the tetraazaporphyrin dye is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (II).
This is because when the tetraazaporphyrin dye is a compound represented by the general formula (II), the effect of being able to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption can be more effectively exhibited. ..
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
(式中、R301a、R302a、R303a、R304a、R305a、R306a、R307a及びR308aは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、アミノ基、置換基を有している場合がある炭素原子数1~30のアルキル基、置換基を有している場合がある炭素原子数1~30のアルコキシ基、置換基を有している場合がある炭素原子数6~30のアリール基、置換基を有している場合がある炭素原子数6~30のアリールオキシ基又は置換基を有している場合がある炭素原子数2~30のヘテロアリール基を表し、
 R301aとR302a、R303aとR304a、R305aとR306a及びR307aとR308aは、互いに連結してピロール環の炭素原子を含む脂環構造を形成していてもよく、
 R301a、R302a、R303a、R304a、R305a、R306a、R307a及びR308aは同時に水素原子とはならず、
 Mは、2個の水素原子、2個の1価の金属原子、2価の金属原子、又は3価若しくは4価の金属の化合物を表す。)
(In the formula, R 301a , R 302a , R 303a , R 304a , R 305a , R 306a , R 307a and R 308a each independently have a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an amino group and a substituent. There may be an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and a substituent may have 6 to 6 carbon atoms. Represents an aryloxy group having 30 aryl groups and a substituent and an aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms or a heteroaryl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
R 301a and R 302a , R 303a and R 304a , R 305a and R 306a, and R 307a and R 308a may be linked to each other to form an alicyclic structure containing a carbon atom of a pyrrole ring.
R 301a , R 302a , R 303a , R 304a , R 305a , R 306a , R 307a and R 308a do not become hydrogen atoms at the same time.
M represents two hydrogen atoms, two monovalent metal atoms, a divalent metal atom, or a compound of a trivalent or tetravalent metal. )
 上記R301a~R308 aは、同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。
 例えば、R301aとR302a、R303aとR304a、R305aとR306a及びR307aとR308aは、それぞれ同一の基であってもよく、それぞれ異なる種類の基であってもよい。
The above R 301a to R 308 a may be the same or different.
For example, R 301a and R 302a , R 303a and R 304a , R 305a and R 306a, and R 307a and R 308a may be the same group or different types of groups.
 R301a、R302a、R303a、R304a、R305a、R306a、R307a及びR308aに用いられるハロゲン原子、アミノ基としては、上記「1.ピロメテン化合物」の項に記載の式(I)中のR101の水素原子を置換する置換基として挙げたハロゲン原子、アミノ基と同様の基を用いることができる。 The halogen atom and amino group used in R 301a , R 302a , R 303a , R 304a , R 305a , R 306a , R 307a and R 308a are the formula (I) described in the above section "1. Pyromethene compound". A group similar to the halogen atom and amino group mentioned as the substituent for substituting the hydrogen atom of R 101 in the group can be used.
 上記R301a~R308 aで用いられる炭素原子数1~30のアルキル基としては置換又は無置換の炭素原子数1~30のアルキル基を用いることができる。換言すると、上記R301a~R308 aは、炭素原子数1~30のアルキル基中の水素原子が置換基で置換された基、すなわち、置換基を有する炭素原子数1~30のアルキル基であってもよい。
 上記R301a~R308 aで表される無置換の炭素原子数1~30のアルキル基、すなわち、置換基を有しない炭素原子数1~30のアルキル基としては、例えば、上記「1.ピロメテン化合物」の項に記載の、一般式(I)中のR101に用いられる、直鎖又は分岐のアルキル基と同様の基が挙げられる。
 上記R301a~R308 aで用いられる炭素原子数1~30のアルキル基は、炭素原子数1~12のアルキル基であることが好ましく、特に、炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基であることが好ましく、なかでも特に、炭素原子数1~8のアルキル基であることが好ましく、なかでも特に、炭素原子数2~6のアルキル基であることが好ましく、なかでも特に、炭素原子数2~5のアルキル基であることが好ましい。所望の波長範囲に、より急峻な吸収ピークを有する硬化物を得ることができるからである。
 上記R301a~R308 aで表される置換基を有する炭素原子数1~30のアルキル基中の水素原子を置換する置換基としては、エチレン性不飽和基、ハロゲン原子、アシル基、アシルオキシ基、置換アミノ基、スルホンアミド基、スルホニル基、カルボキシル基、シアノ基、スルホ基、水酸基、ニトロ基、メルカプト基、イミド基、カルバモイル基、スルホンアミド基、ホスホン酸基、リン酸基又はカルボキシル基、スルホ基、ホスホン酸基、リン酸基の塩が挙げられる。上記置換基は、後述するアルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリール基等であってもよい。
 すなわち、上記R301a~R308aで表される、置換基を有する炭素原子数1~30のアルキル基としては、例えば、アラルキル基、直鎖、分岐又は環状のハロゲノアルキル基、直鎖、分岐又は環状のアルコキシアルキル基、直鎖、分岐又は環状のアルコキシアルコキシアルキル基、アリールオキシアルキル基、アラルキルオキシアルキル基、直鎖、分岐又は環状のハロゲノアルコキシアルキル基等も挙げることができる。
As the alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms used in R 301a to R 308 a , a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms can be used. In other words, the above R 301a to R 308 a are groups in which a hydrogen atom in an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms is substituted with a substituent, that is, an alkyl group having a substituent and having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. There may be.
Examples of the unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms represented by R 301a to R 308 a , that is, the alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms having no substituent include the above “1. Pyromethene”. Examples thereof include groups similar to the linear or branched alkyl groups used in R 101 in the general formula (I) described in the section "Compounds".
The alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms used in R 301a to R 308 a is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and in particular, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Is preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms is particularly preferable, and an alkyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms is particularly preferable, and an alkyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms is particularly preferable. It is preferably an alkyl group of 5. This is because a cured product having a steeper absorption peak can be obtained in a desired wavelength range.
Examples of the substituent that replaces the hydrogen atom in the alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms having the substituent represented by R 301a to R 308 a include an ethylenically unsaturated group, a halogen atom, an acyl group and an acyloxy group. , Substituted amino group, sulfonamide group, sulfonyl group, carboxyl group, cyano group, sulfo group, hydroxyl group, nitro group, mercapto group, imide group, carbamoyl group, sulfonamide group, phosphonic acid group, phosphate group or carboxyl group, Examples thereof include salts of a sulfo group, a phosphonic acid group and a phosphoric acid group. The substituent may be an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryl group or the like, which will be described later.
That is, examples of the alkyl group having a substituent and having 1 to 30 carbon atoms represented by R 301a to R 308a include an aralkyl group, a linear, branched or cyclic halogenoalkyl group, a linear, branched or Cyclic alkoxyalkyl groups, linear, branched or cyclic alkoxyalkylalkyl groups, aryloxyalkyl groups, aralkyloxyalkyl groups, linear, branched or cyclic halogenoalkylalkyl groups and the like can also be mentioned.
 上記のアラルキル基としては、ベンジル基、α-メチルベンジル基、α-エチルベンジル基、α,α-ジメチルベンジル基、α-フェニルベンジル基、α,α-ジフェニルベンジル基、フェネチル基、α-メチルフェネチル基などを挙げることができる。 Examples of the above-mentioned aralkyl group include benzyl group, α-methylbenzyl group, α-ethylbenzyl group, α, α-dimethylbenzyl group, α-phenylbenzyl group, α, α-diphenylbenzyl group, phenethyl group and α-methyl. A phenyl group and the like can be mentioned.
 上記の直鎖、分岐又は環状のハロゲノアルキル基としては、フルオロメチル基、3-フルオロプロピル基、6-フルオロヘキシル基などを挙げることができる。 Examples of the above-mentioned linear, branched or cyclic halogenoalkyl group include a fluoromethyl group, a 3-fluoropropyl group, a 6-fluorohexyl group and the like.
 上記の直鎖、分岐又は環状のアルコキシアルキル基としては、メトキシメチル基、エトキシメチル基、n-ブトキシメチル基などを挙げることができる。 Examples of the above-mentioned linear, branched or cyclic alkoxyalkyl group include a methoxymethyl group, an ethoxymethyl group, and an n-butoxymethyl group.
 上記の直鎖、分岐又は環状のアルコキシアルコキシアルキル基としては、(2-メトキシエトキシ)メチル基、(2-エトキシエトキシ)メチル基などを挙げることができる。 Examples of the above-mentioned linear, branched or cyclic alkoxyalkoxyalkyl group include a (2-methoxyethoxy) methyl group and a (2-ethoxyethoxy) methyl group.
 上記アリールオキシアルキル基としては、フェニルオキシメチル基、4-メチルフェニルオキシメチル基、3-メチルフェニルオキシメチル基などを挙げることができる。 Examples of the aryloxyalkyl group include a phenyloxymethyl group, a 4-methylphenyloxymethyl group, and a 3-methylphenyloxymethyl group.
 上記アラルキルオキシアルキル基としては、ベンジルオキシメチル基、フェネチルオキシメチル基などを挙げることができる。 Examples of the aralkyloxyalkyl group include a benzyloxymethyl group and a phenethyloxymethyl group.
 上記の直鎖、分岐又は環状のハロゲノアルコキシアルキル基としては、フルオロメチルオキシメチル基などの直鎖、分岐又は環状のハロゲノアルコキシアルキル基などを挙げることができる。 Examples of the above-mentioned linear, branched or cyclic halogenoalkoxyalkyl group include a linear, branched or cyclic halogenoalkoxyalkyl group such as a fluoromethyloxymethyl group.
 上記R301a~R308 aに用いられる炭素原子数1~30のアルコキシ基としては、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、シクロアルキルアルキル基の結合箇所側末端に、-O-が結合した炭素原子数1~30の基を用いることができる。
 このようなアルコキシ基については、上記一般式(I-1)中のX1に用いられるものと同様とすることができる。上記アルコキシ基としては、具体的には、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、n-プロポキシ基、イソプロポキシ基、n-ブトキシ基等を挙げることができる。
As the alkoxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms used in the above R 301a to R 308 a , the number of carbon atoms 1 in which —O— is bonded to the end of the alkyl group, the cycloalkyl group, and the cycloalkylalkyl group on the bonding site side. Up to 30 groups can be used.
Such an alkoxy group can be the same as that used for X 1 in the above general formula (I-1). Specific examples of the alkoxy group include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, an n-propoxy group, an isopropoxy group, an n-butoxy group and the like.
 上記R301a~R308 aで表される、置換基を有する炭素原子数1~30のアルコキシ基としては、アルコキシ基中の水素原子の1つ又は2つ以上が置換基により置換されているものが挙げられる。
 上記水素原子を置換する置換基としては、上記R301a~R308 aで表されるアルキル基中の水素原子を置換する置換基として挙げたもの等を挙げることができる。
 置換基を有する炭素原子数1~30のアルコキシ基としては、より具体的には、アラルキルオキシ基、直鎖、分岐又は環状のハロゲノアルコキシ基等を挙げることができる。
As the alkoxy group having a substituent and having 1 to 30 carbon atoms represented by R 301a to R 308 a , one or two or more hydrogen atoms in the alkoxy group are substituted with the substituent. Can be mentioned.
Examples of the substituent substituting the hydrogen atom include those listed as the substituent substituting the hydrogen atom in the alkyl groups represented by R 301a to R 308 a.
More specific examples of the alkoxy group having a substituent and having 1 to 30 carbon atoms include an aralkyloxy group, a linear, branched or cyclic halogenoalkoxy group.
 上記アラルキルオキシ基としては、ベンジルオキシ基、α-メチルベンジルオキシ基、α-エチルベンジルオキシ基等を挙げることができる。 Examples of the aralkyloxy group include a benzyloxy group, an α-methylbenzyloxy group, an α-ethylbenzyloxy group and the like.
 上記の直鎖、分岐又は環状のハロゲノアルコキシ基としては、フルオロメチルオキシ基、3-フルオロプロピルオキシ基等を挙げることができる。 Examples of the linear, branched or cyclic halogenoalkoxy group include a fluoromethyloxy group and a 3-fluoropropyloxy group.
 R301a、R302a、R303a、R304a、R305a、R306a、R307a及びR308aに用いられる炭素原子数6~30のアリール基としては、上記「1.ピロメテン化合物」の項に記載の式(I)中のR104で表されるアリール基と同様の基を用いることができる。
 上記R301a~R308 aで表される炭素原子数6~30のアリール基としては、炭素原子数6~20のアリール基であることが好ましく、特に、炭素原子数6~16のアリール基であることが好ましく、なかでも特に、炭素原子数6~12のアリール基であることが好ましく、なかでも特に、炭素原子数6~10のアリール基であることが好ましい。所望の波長範囲に、より急峻な吸収ピークを有する硬化物を得ることができるからである。 上記置換基を有する炭素原子数6~30のアリール基としては、アリール基中の水素原子の1つ又は2つ以上が置換基に置換されているものが挙げられる。
 上記水素原子を置換する置換基としては、R301a~R308 aで表されるアルキル基の水素原子を置換する置換基として挙げたもの等を挙げることができる。
The aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms used in R 301a , R 302a , R 303a , R 304a , R 305a , R 306a , R 307a and R 308a is described in the above section "1. Pyrromethene compound". A group similar to the aryl group represented by R 104 in the formula (I) can be used.
The aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms represented by R 301a to R 308 a is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and particularly an aryl group having 6 to 16 carbon atoms. It is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. This is because a cured product having a steeper absorption peak can be obtained in a desired wavelength range. Examples of the aryl group having a substituent and having 6 to 30 carbon atoms include those in which one or two or more hydrogen atoms in the aryl group are substituted with a substituent.
Examples of the substituent substituting the hydrogen atom include those listed as the substituent substituting the hydrogen atom of the alkyl group represented by R 301a to R 308 a.
 上記炭素原子数6~30のアリール基、すなわち、置換基を有しない炭素原子数6~30のアリール基、及び上記置換基を有する炭素原子数6~30のアリール基としては、例えば、フェニル基、2-メチルフェニル基、3-メチルフェニル基、4-メチルフェニル基、3-エチルフェニル基、2-フルオロフェニル基、3-フルオロフェニル基等を挙げることができる。 Examples of the aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, that is, the aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms having no substituent and the aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms having the substituent include, for example, a phenyl group. , 2-Methylphenyl group, 3-Methylphenyl group, 4-Methylphenyl group, 3-Ethylphenyl group, 2-Fluorophenyl group, 3-Fluorophenyl group and the like.
 上記R301a~R308 aで表される炭素原子数6~30のアリールオキシ基としては、上記R301a~R308 aに用いられるアルコキシ基中のアルキル基が、アリール基で置き換わった基が挙げられる。
 上記R301a~R308 aで表される炭素原子数6~30のアリールオキシ基としては、例えば、フェノキシ基、2-メチルフェニルオキシ基等を挙げることができる。
 上記R301a~R308 aで表されるアリールオキシ基としては、炭素原子数6~20のアリールオキシ基であることが好ましく、炭素原子数6~16のアリールオキシ基であることが好ましい。所望の波長範囲に、より急峻な吸収ピークを有する硬化物を得ることができるからである。
 上記R301a~R308aで表される置換基を有する炭素原子数6~30のアリールオキシ基としては、アリールオキシ基中の水素原子の1つ又は2つ以上が置換基に置換されているものが挙げられる。上記水素原子を置換する置換基としては、上記R301a~R308 aで表されるアルキル基の水素原子を置換する置換基として挙げたもの等を挙げることができる。
The aryloxy groups of R 301a ~ R 308 6 to 30 carbon atoms represented by a, the alkyl group in the alkoxy group used in the above R 301a ~ R 308 a is, include groups replaced with an aryl group Be done.
Examples of the aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms represented by R 301a to R 308 a include a phenoxy group and a 2-methylphenyloxy group.
The aryloxy group represented by R 301a to R 308 a is preferably an aryloxy group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and preferably an aryloxy group having 6 to 16 carbon atoms. This is because a cured product having a steeper absorption peak can be obtained in a desired wavelength range.
As the aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms having a substituent represented by R 301a to R 308a , one or two or more hydrogen atoms in the aryloxy group are substituted with the substituent. Can be mentioned. Examples of the substituent substituting the hydrogen atom include those listed as the substituent substituting the hydrogen atom of the alkyl group represented by R 301a to R 308 a.
 上記R301a~R308 aで表される置換基を有する炭素原子数6~30のアリールオキシ基としては、2-メトキシフェニルオキシ基、4-イソプロポキシフェニルオキシ基等も挙げることができる。 Examples of the aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms having the substituent represented by R 301a to R 308 a include a 2-methoxyphenyloxy group and a 4-isopropoxyphenyloxy group.
 上記R301a~R308 aで表される置換基を有する炭素原子数6~30のアリールオキシ基としては、2-フルオロフェニルオキシ基、3-クロロフェニルオキシ基等も挙げることができる。 Examples of the aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms having the substituent represented by R 301a to R 308 a include a 2-fluorophenyloxy group and a 3-chlorophenyloxy group.
 更に、上記R301a~R308aで表される置換基を有する炭素原子数6~30のアリールオキシ基としては、3-クロロ-4-メチルフェニルオキシ基、2-フェニルフェニルオキシ基等も挙げることができる。 Further, examples of the aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms having the substituent represented by R 301a to R 308a include 3-chloro-4-methylphenyloxy group and 2-phenylphenyloxy group. Can be done.
 上記R301a~R308 aで表される炭素原子数2~30のヘテロアリール基としては、例えば、ヘテロ原子として、窒素原子、酸素原子、又は硫黄原子を少なくとも1つ以上含む芳香族ヘテロ環から水素原子を1つ除いた基が挙げられる。 上記R301a~R308 aで表される置換基を有する炭素原子数2~30のヘテロアリール基としては、ヘテロアリール基中の水素原子の1つ又は2つ以上が置換基に置換されているものが挙げられる。上記水素原子を置換する置換基としては、上記R301~R308で表されるアルキル基の水素原子を置換する置換基として挙げたもの等を挙げることができる。 The heteroaryl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms represented by R 301a to R 308 a is, for example, from an aromatic heterocycle containing at least one nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, or sulfur atom as a hetero atom. Examples thereof include a group excluding one hydrogen atom. As the heteroaryl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms having a substituent represented by R 301a to R 308 a , one or two or more hydrogen atoms in the heteroaryl group are substituted with the substituent. Things can be mentioned. Examples of the substituent substituting the hydrogen atom include those listed as the substituent substituting the hydrogen atom of the alkyl group represented by R 301 to R 308.
 上記R301a~R308 aで表される炭素原子数2~30のヘテロアリール基、すなわち、置換基を有しない炭素原子数6~30のヘテロアリール基、及び置換基を有する炭素原子数2~30のヘテロアリール基としては、例えば、フラニル基、ピロリル基、3-ピロリノ基、ピラゾリル基、イミダゾリル基等を挙げることができる。 Heteroaryl groups having 2 to 30 carbon atoms represented by R 301a to R 308 a , that is, heteroaryl groups having 6 to 30 carbon atoms having no substituents, and 2 to 2 carbon atoms having substituents. Examples of the heteroaryl group of 30 include a furanyl group, a pyrrolyl group, a 3-pyrrolino group, a pyrazolyl group, an imidazolyl group and the like.
 上記R301aとR302a、R303aとR304a、R305aとR306a又はR307aとR308aが互いに連結して形成する脂環構造としては、R301a等が結合しているピロール環の炭素原子を含んで形成された、炭素原子数3~20の脂環式炭化水素基を挙げることができ、例えば、シクロヘキサン、メチルシクロヘキサン、ジメチルシクロヘキサン、t-ブチルシクロヘキサン、シアノシクロヘキサン、ジクロロシクロヘキサン等の脂環構造を挙げることができる。 The alicyclic structure formed by connecting R 301a and R 302a , R 303a and R 304a , R 305a and R 306a or R 307a and R 308a with each other is a carbon atom of a pyrrole ring to which R 301a or the like is bonded. Examples thereof include alicyclic hydrocarbon groups having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, which are formed containing, for example, alicyclics such as cyclohexane, methylcyclohexane, dimethylcyclohexane, t-butylcyclohexane, cyanocyclohexane, and dichlorocyclohexane. The structure can be mentioned.
 本発明においては、上記R301a~R308aは、水素原子、置換基を有しない若しくは置換基を有する炭素原子数1~30のアルキル基、置換基を有しない若しくは置換基を有する炭素原子数1~30のアルコキシ基、又は置換基を有しない若しくは置換基を有する炭素原子数6~30のアリール基であることが好ましい。
 R301aとR302a、R303aとR304a、R305aとR306a及びR307aとR308aの組合せとしては、所望の波長の光を吸収可能なものであればどのような組合せでもよいが、具体的には、(i)水素原子とアルキル基との組合せ、(ii)アルキル基とアルコキシ基との組合せ、(iii)アルキル基とアリール基との組合せ等であることが好ましく、中でも(iii)であることが最も好ましい。所望の波長範囲に急峻な吸収ピークを有する硬化物を得ることができるからである。
 また、R301a、R303a、R305a及びR307aは、同一の基であってもよく、異なる基であってもよいが、同一の基であることが好ましい。所望の波長範囲に、より急峻な吸収ピークを有する硬化物を得ることができるからである。
 更に、R302a、R304a、R306a及びR308aは、同一の基であってもよく、異なる基であってもよいが、同一の基であることが好ましい。所望の波長範囲に、より急峻な吸収ピークを有する硬化物を得ることができるからである。
 上記(iii)の組合せとしては、置換基を有しない若しくは置換基を有する炭素原子数1~30のアルキル基と、置換基を有しない若しくは置換基を有する炭素原子数6~30のアリール基との組合せが好ましく、置換基を有しない炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基と、置換基を有する炭素原子数6~12のアリール基との組合せがより好ましく、特に、置換基を有しない炭素原子数2~5のアルキル基と、置換基を有する炭素原子数6のアリール基との組合せがより好ましい。
 アリール基の水素原子の1つ又は2つ以上を置換する置換基としては、ハロゲン原子であることが好ましく、中でも、フッ素原子であることが好ましい。また、アリール基の水素原子の1つが置換基により置換されていることが好ましい。
 本発明においては、R301a、R303a、R305a及びR307aが、水素原子の1つ又は2つ以上がハロゲン原子により置換されたフェニル基であり、かつ、R302a、R304a、R306a及びR308aが、イソプロピル基、イソブチル基、sec-ブチル基、tert-ブチル基、イソペンチル基、ネオペンチル基、tert-ペンチル基、1,2-ジメチルプロピル基、1-メチルブチル基、2-メチルブチル基等の置換基を有しない炭素原子数3~5の分岐のアルキル基であることが特に好ましく、R301a、R303a、R305a及びR307aが、2-フルオロフェニル基、3-フルオロフェニル基、4-フルオロフェニル基等のフッ素原子で水素原子の1つが置換されたフェニル基であり、かつ、R302a、R304a、R306a及びR308aが、イソプロピル基、イソブチル基、sec-ブチル基、tert-ブチル基、イソペンチル基、ネオペンチル基、tert-ペンチル基、1,2-ジメチルプロピル基、1-メチルブチル基、2-メチルブチル基等の置換基を有しない炭素原子数3~5の分岐のアルキル基であることが最も好ましい。所望の波長範囲に、より急峻な吸収ピークを有する硬化物を得ることができるからである。
 上記R301a、R303a、R305a及びR307aが上述の官能基であることで、上記組成物は、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を得ることが容易だからである。また、特定ピロメテン化合物と組合せた場合には、450nm以上550nm未満の波長領域の光吸収性に優れると共に、550nm以上610nm未満の波長領域の光吸収性にも優れた硬化物を得ることが容易だからである。
In the present invention, the above R 301a to R 308a are hydrogen atoms, alkyl groups having 1 to 30 carbon atoms having no substituent or having a substituent, and 1 carbon atom having no substituent or having a substituent. It is preferably an alkoxy group of about 30 or an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms which does not have a substituent or has a substituent.
The combination of R 301a and R 302a , R 303a and R 304a , R 305a and R 306a, and R 307a and R 308a may be any combination as long as it can absorb light of a desired wavelength. Specifically, (i) a combination of a hydrogen atom and an alkyl group, (ii) a combination of an alkyl group and an alkoxy group, (iii) a combination of an alkyl group and an aryl group, and the like are preferable, and among them, (iii). Is most preferable. This is because a cured product having a steep absorption peak in a desired wavelength range can be obtained.
Further, R 301a , R 303a , R 305a and R 307a may be the same group or different groups, but are preferably the same group. This is because a cured product having a steeper absorption peak can be obtained in a desired wavelength range.
Further, R 302a , R 304a , R 306a and R 308a may be the same group or different groups, but are preferably the same group. This is because a cured product having a steeper absorption peak can be obtained in a desired wavelength range.
The combination of the above (iii) includes an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms having no or having a substituent and an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms having no or having a substituent. Is preferable, and a combination of an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms having no substituent and an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms having a substituent is more preferable, and in particular, a carbon atom having no substituent. A combination of an alkyl group having a number of 2 to 5 and an aryl group having a substituent and having 6 carbon atoms is more preferable.
The substituent that replaces one or more of the hydrogen atoms of the aryl group is preferably a halogen atom, and more preferably a fluorine atom. Further, it is preferable that one of the hydrogen atoms of the aryl group is substituted with a substituent.
In the present invention, R 301a , R 303a , R 305a and R 307a are phenyl groups in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with halogen atoms, and R 302a , R 304a , R 306a and R 308a is an isopropyl group, an isobutyl group, a sec-butyl group, a tert-butyl group, an isopentyl group, a neopentyl group, a tert-pentyl group, a 1,2-dimethylpropyl group, a 1-methylbutyl group, a 2-methylbutyl group, etc. It is particularly preferable that it is a branched alkyl group having 3 to 5 carbon atoms having no substituent, and R 301a , R 303a , R 305a and R 307a are 2-fluorophenyl group, 3-fluorophenyl group, 4-. It is a phenyl group in which one of the hydrogen atoms is substituted with a fluorine atom such as a fluorophenyl group, and R 302a , R 304a , R 306a and R 308a are an isopropyl group, an isobutyl group, a sec-butyl group and a tert-butyl. It is a branched alkyl group having 3 to 5 carbon atoms that does not have a substituent such as a group, an isopentyl group, a neopentyl group, a tert-pentyl group, a 1,2-dimethylpropyl group, a 1-methylbutyl group, or a 2-methylbutyl group. Is most preferable. This is because a cured product having a steeper absorption peak can be obtained in a desired wavelength range.
This is because the above-mentioned functional groups of R 301a , R 303a , R 305a and R 307a make it easy to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption. Further, when combined with the specific pyrromethene compound, it is easy to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption in the wavelength region of 450 nm or more and less than 550 nm and also excellent in light absorption in the wavelength region of 550 nm or more and less than 610 nm. Is.
 上記Mで表される2価の金属原子としては、例えば、周期律表第3族~第15族に属する金属原子が挙げられる。具体的には、Cu、Zn、Fe、Co、Ni、Ru、Pb、Rh、Pd、Pt、Mn、Sn、Pb等を挙げることができる。
 Mで表される1価の金属原子としては、例えば、Na、K、Liなどを挙げることができる。
 また、Mで表される3価若しくは4価の金属の化合物としては、例えば、周期律表第3族~第15族に属する3価又は4価の金属の、ハロゲン化物、水酸化物及び酸化物等が挙げられる。上記金属の化合物としては、金属化合物として2価のものを用いることができ、具体的には、AlCl、AlOH、InCl、FeCl、MnOH、SiCl2、SnCl2、GeCl2、Si(OH)2、Si(OCH32、Si(OPh)2、Si(OSiCH32、Sn(OH)2、Ge(OH)2、VO、TiO等を挙げることができる。
 上記Mは、Cu、Zn、Co、Ni、Pb、Pd、Pt、Mn、VO、TiOであることが好ましく、特に、Cu、Co、Ni、Pd、VOであることが好ましい。所望の波長範囲に、より急峻な吸収ピークを有する硬化物を得ることができるからである。
 上記Mが上述の金属原子又は金属化合物であることで、上記組成物は、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を得ることが容易だからである。また、特定ピロメテン化合物と組合せた場合には、450nm以上550nm未満の波長領域の光吸収性に優れると共に、550nm以上610nm以下の波長領域の光吸収性にも優れた硬化物を得ることが容易だからである。
Examples of the divalent metal atom represented by M include metal atoms belonging to groups 3 to 15 of the periodic table. Specifically, Cu, Zn, Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Pb, Rh, Pd, Pt, Mn, Sn, Pb and the like can be mentioned.
Examples of the monovalent metal atom represented by M include Na, K, Li and the like.
Examples of the compound of the trivalent or tetravalent metal represented by M include halides, hydroxides and oxidations of trivalent or tetravalent metals belonging to Groups 3 to 15 of the Periodic Table. Things etc. can be mentioned. As the metal compound, a divalent metal compound can be used. Specifically, AlCl, AlOH, InCl, FeCl, MnOH, SiCl 2 , SnCl 2 , GeCl 2 , Si (OH) 2 , and so on. Examples thereof include Si (OCH 3 ) 2 , Si (OPh) 2 , Si (OSiCH 3 ) 2 , Sn (OH) 2 , Ge (OH) 2 , VO, and TiO.
The M is preferably Cu, Zn, Co, Ni, Pb, Pd, Pt, Mn, VO, TiO, and particularly preferably Cu, Co, Ni, Pd, VO. This is because a cured product having a steeper absorption peak can be obtained in a desired wavelength range.
This is because when the M is the metal atom or the metal compound, it is easy to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption in the composition. Further, when combined with a specific pyrromethene compound, it is easy to obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption in the wavelength region of 450 nm or more and less than 550 nm and also excellent in light absorption in the wavelength region of 550 nm or more and 610 nm or less. Is.
 上記一般式(II)で表される、テトラアザポルフィリン系染料化合物としては、より具体的には、特開2017-68221号公報に記載された一般式(1)の具体例と同様のものを挙げることができる。 The tetraazaporphyrin dye compound represented by the general formula (II) is more specifically the same as the specific example of the general formula (1) described in JP-A-2017-68221. Can be mentioned.
 上記テトラアザポルフィリン系染料化合物の製造方法としては、公知の方法を用いることができ、例えば、J.Gen. Chem. USSR vol.47, 1954-1958 (1977)、特開2012-121821号公報等に記載されている方法に準じた製造方法を挙げることができる。 As a method for producing the tetraazaporphyrin dye compound, a known method can be used. For example, J.Gen. Chem. USSR vol.47, 1954-1958 (1977), JP2012-121821A, etc. A manufacturing method according to the method described in the above can be mentioned.
 上記テトラアザポルフィリン系染料化合物の市販品としては、例えば、PD-311S、PD-320、NC-35、SNC-8(以上、山本化成株式会社)、FDG-004、FDG-007(以上、山田化学工業株式会社)等を挙げることができる。 Commercially available products of the tetraazaporphyrin dye compound include, for example, PD-311S, PD-320, NC-35, SNC-8 (Yamamoto Kasei Co., Ltd.), FDG-004, FDG-007 (Yamada). Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and the like.
 上記テトラアザポルフィリン系染料の含有量としては、染料100質量部中に20質量部以上であることが好ましく、なかでも、30質量部以上80質量部以下であることが好ましく、特に、40質量部以上70質量部以下であることが好ましく、なかでも特に45質量部以上65質量部以下であることが好ましい。特定ピロメテン化合物の耐光性を向上させる効果があるからである。 The content of the tetraazaporphyrin dye is preferably 20 parts by mass or more in 100 parts by mass of the dye, and more preferably 30 parts by mass or more and 80 parts by mass or less, and particularly 40 parts by mass. It is preferably 70 parts by mass or more, and particularly preferably 45 parts by mass or more and 65 parts by mass or less. This is because it has the effect of improving the light resistance of the specific pyrromethene compound.
 上記テトラアザポルフィリン系染料の含有量としては、組成物の固形分100質量部中に、0.01質量部以上であることが好ましく、なかでも、0.01質量部以上8質量部以下であることが好ましく、特に、0.1質量部以上5質量部以下なかでも特に、0.1質量部以上3質量部以下であることが好ましい。特定の波長のみを効率よくカットする必要があるからである。 The content of the tetraazaporphyrin dye is preferably 0.01 part by mass or more, and more than 0.01 part by mass and 8 part by mass or less in 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition. It is preferably 0.1 part by mass or more and 5 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 0.1 part by mass or more and 3 parts by mass or less. This is because it is necessary to efficiently cut only specific wavelengths.
 上記テトラアザポルフィリン系染料の含有量としては、組成物100質量部中に、0.001質量部以上であることが好ましく、なかでも、0.01質量部以上6.4質量部以下であることが好ましく、特に、0.05質量部以上4質量部以下であることが好ましく、なかでも特に、0.1質量部以上2.4質量部以下であることが好ましい。 The content of the tetraazaporphyrin dye is preferably 0.001 part by mass or more, and particularly 0.01 part by mass or more and 6.4 parts by mass or less in 100 parts by mass of the composition. Is preferable, and in particular, it is preferably 0.05 parts by mass or more and 4 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 0.1 parts by mass or more and 2.4 parts by mass or less.
 異物が少なく光吸収性に優れた硬化物を製造容易な点から、上記テトラアザポルフィリン系染料が特定ピロメテン化合物と併用されるか否かに関わらず、上記特定ピロメテン化合物を含むピロメテン系染料及びテトラアザポルフィリン系染料の合計の含有量は、染料全体の100質量部中に30質量部以上であることが好ましく、なかでも、50質量部以上であることが好ましく、特に、80質量部以上であることが好ましく、特に、90質量部以上であることが好ましく、なかでも特に、95質量部以上であることが好ましく、なかでも特に、100質量部、すなわち、染料が、上記ピロメテン系染料であるか、又は上記ピロメテン系染料及びテトラアザポルフィリン系染料であることが好ましい。 Regardless of whether or not the tetraazaporphyrin dye is used in combination with the specific pyrromethene compound, the pyrromethene dye and tetra containing the specific pyrromethene compound can be easily produced because there are few foreign substances and the cured product has excellent light absorption. The total content of the azaporphyrin dye is preferably 30 parts by mass or more, particularly preferably 50 parts by mass or more, and particularly 80 parts by mass or more in 100 parts by mass of the entire dye. It is preferable that the amount is 90 parts by mass or more, particularly preferably 95 parts by mass or more, and particularly 100 parts by mass, that is, whether the dye is the pyrromethene dye. , Or the above-mentioned pyrromethene dye and tetraazaporphyrin dye are preferable.
 本発明の組成物は特定ピロメテン化合物以外のピロメテン化合物を含有してもよい。異物が少なく、光吸収性に優れた硬化物が得られるとの効果を高める点から本発明の組成物における特定ピロメテン化合物以外のピロメテン化合物の量は、特定ピロメテン化合物の量100質量部に対して、100質量部以下であることが好ましく、50質量部以下であることがより好ましく、30質量部以下であることが特に好ましく、10質量部以下であることが最も好ましい。 The composition of the present invention may contain a pyrromethene compound other than the specific pyrromethene compound. The amount of the pyrromethene compound other than the specific pyrromethene compound in the composition of the present invention is based on 100 parts by mass of the specific pyrromethene compound from the viewpoint of enhancing the effect of obtaining a cured product having few foreign substances and excellent light absorption. , 100 parts by mass or less, more preferably 50 parts by mass or less, particularly preferably 30 parts by mass or less, and most preferably 10 parts by mass or less.
7.その他の成分:カチオン重合性成分以外の樹脂成分
 上記組成物は、樹脂成分として上記カチオン重合性成分を含むものであるが、必要に応じて、上記カチオン重合性成分以外の樹脂成分(以下、その他の樹脂成分と称する場合がある。)を含むことができる。
 上記その他の樹脂成分としては、重縮合可能な化合物及びその重縮合物等を挙げることができる。
 上記重縮合可能な化合物としては、ラジカル重合性化合物を挙げることができる。また、後述する重縮合物を構成するモノマー成分も挙げることができる。
7. Other components: Resin components other than the cationically polymerizable component The above composition contains the above-mentioned cationically polymerizable component as a resin component, but if necessary, a resin component other than the above-mentioned cationically polymerizable component (hereinafter, other resin). It may be referred to as a component).
Examples of the other resin component include a compound capable of polycondensation and a polycondensate thereof.
Examples of the compound capable of polycondensation include a radically polymerizable compound. In addition, the monomer components constituting the polycondensate product described later can also be mentioned.
 上記ラジカル重合性化合物は、ラジカル重合性基を有するものである。
 上記ラジカル重合性基としては、ラジカルにより重合可能なものであればよく、例えば、アクリロイル基、メタクリロイル基、ビニル基等のエチレン性不飽和基等を挙げることができる。
 上記ラジカル重合性化合物は、ラジカル重合性基を1以上有するものとすることができ、ラジカル重合性基を1つ有する単官能化合物、ラジカル重合性基を2以上有する多官能化合物を用いることができる。
The radically polymerizable compound has a radically polymerizable group.
The radically polymerizable group may be any radically polymerizable group, and examples thereof include ethylenically unsaturated groups such as an acryloyl group, a methacryloyl group, and a vinyl group.
The radically polymerizable compound may have one or more radically polymerizable groups, and a monofunctional compound having one radically polymerizable group and a polyfunctional compound having two or more radically polymerizable groups can be used. ..
 上記ラジカル重合性化合物としては、酸価を有する化合物、酸価を有しない化合物等を用いることができる。
 上記酸価を有する化合物としては、例えば、メタクリル酸、アクリル酸等のカルボキシル基等を有するアクリレート化合物、メタクリレート化合物等を挙げることができる。
 上記酸価を有しない化合物としては、ウレタンアクリレート樹脂、ウレタンメタクリレート樹脂、エポキシアクリレート樹脂、エポキシメタクリレート樹脂、アクリル酸-2-ヒドロキシエチル、メタクリル酸-2-ヒドロキシエチル等のカルボキシル基等を有しないアクリレート化合物、メタクリレート化合物を挙げることができる。
 上記ラジカル重合性化合物は、単独で又は2種以上を混合して使用することができる。例えば、ラジカル重合性化合物は、エチレン性不飽和基を有し、酸価を有する化合物及びエチレン性不飽和基を有し、酸価を有しない化合物を組合せて使用することができる。
 ラジカル重合性化合物は、2種以上を混合して使用する場合には、それらを予め共重合して共重合体として使用してもよい。
 このようなラジカル重合性化合物等としては、より具体的には、特開2016-176009号公報に記載されるラジカル重合性化合物等を挙げることができる。
As the radically polymerizable compound, a compound having an acid value, a compound having no acid value, or the like can be used.
Examples of the compound having an acid value include an acrylate compound having a carboxyl group such as methacrylic acid and acrylic acid, and a methacrylate compound.
Examples of the compound having no acid value include acrylates having no carboxyl group such as urethane acrylate resin, urethane methacrylate resin, epoxy acrylate resin, epoxy methacrylate resin, 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate, and -2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate. Examples thereof include compounds and methacrylate compounds.
The radically polymerizable compound can be used alone or in combination of two or more. For example, the radically polymerizable compound can be used in combination with a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group and having an acid value and a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group and having no acid value.
When two or more kinds of radically polymerizable compounds are mixed and used, they may be copolymerized in advance and used as a copolymer.
More specific examples of such radically polymerizable compounds include radically polymerizable compounds described in JP-A-2016-17609.
 本発明においては、異物が少なく、かつ、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を形成可能となる観点は、上記ラジカル重合性化合物の含有量が少ないことが好ましい。
 上記ラジカル重合性化合物の含有量は、上記組成物の固形分100質量部中に、10質量部以下であることが好ましく、なかでも、5質量部以下であることが好ましく、特に、1質量部以下であることが好ましく、なかでも特に、0.5質量部以下であることが好ましく、なかでも特に0質量部、すなわち、ラジカル重合性化合物を含まないことが好ましい。
In the present invention, it is preferable that the content of the radically polymerizable compound is small from the viewpoint that a cured product having a small amount of foreign matter and excellent light absorption can be formed.
The content of the radically polymerizable compound is preferably 10 parts by mass or less, particularly preferably 5 parts by mass or less, and particularly 1 part by mass in 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition. It is preferably less than or equal to, particularly preferably 0.5 parts by mass or less, and particularly preferably 0 parts by mass, that is, it does not contain a radically polymerizable compound.
 上記重縮合物としては、2以上の繰り返し単位を含むオリゴマー及びポリマーとすることができる。
 上記重縮合物としては、例えば、ポリオレフィン系樹脂、スチレン系樹脂、ポリエステル系樹脂、ポリエーテル系樹脂、ポリカーボネート系樹脂、ポリアミド系樹脂、含ハロゲン樹脂等の熱可塑性樹脂を挙げることができる。
 このような重縮合物としては、例えば、国際公開2017/150662号公報に熱可塑性樹脂として記載されているものと同様とすることができる。
The polycondensate can be an oligomer or a polymer containing two or more repeating units.
Examples of the polycondensate include thermoplastic resins such as polyolefin resins, styrene resins, polyester resins, polyether resins, polycarbonate resins, polyamide resins, and halogen-containing resins.
Such a polycondensate can be, for example, the same as that described as a thermoplastic resin in WO 2017/150662.
8.その他の添加剤
 上記その他の成分としては、各種添加剤を挙げることができる。
 このような各種添加剤としては、国際公開2017/098996号公報等に記載のものを挙げることができる。
 例えば、本発明の組成物では、シリコン系界面活性剤を含有することができる。シリコン系界面活性剤としては、東レダウコーニングシリコーン社のSHシリーズ、SDシリーズ、STシリーズ、ビックケミー・ジャパン(株)社のBYKシリーズ、信越シリコーン社のKPシリーズ、日本油脂社のディスフォームシリーズ、東芝シリコーン社のTSFシリーズなどが挙げられるがこれらに限定されない。具体的には、特開2019-091034号公報、再表2018/062408号公報、再表2015/129783号公報に記載のものが挙げられる。シリコン系界面活性剤の量は、その添加による効果を高める点等から例えば、組成物100質量部中、0.001~5質量部であることが好ましく、0.01~3質量部であることがより好ましく、0.02~1.5質量部であることが特に好ましい。またシリコン系界面活性剤の量は、シリコン系界面活性剤による効果を高める点等から例えば、組成物の固形分100質量部中、0.003~7質量部であることが好ましく、0.02~5質量部であることがより好ましく、0.03~3質量部であることが特に好ましい。
8. Other Additives Examples of the other components include various additives.
Examples of such various additives include those described in International Publication No. 2017/098996.
For example, the composition of the present invention can contain a silicon-based surfactant. Silicon-based surfactants include SH series, SD series, ST series from Toray Dow Corning Silicone, BYK series from Big Chemie Japan Co., Ltd., KP series from Shinetsu Silicone, Disform series from Nippon Oil & Fats Co., Ltd., Toshiba. Examples include, but are not limited to, Silicone's TSF series. Specific examples thereof include those described in JP-A-2019-091034, Re-Table 2018/062408, and Re-Table 2015/129783. The amount of the silicon-based surfactant is preferably 0.001 to 5 parts by mass, and 0.01 to 3 parts by mass, for example, out of 100 parts by mass of the composition, from the viewpoint of enhancing the effect of the addition thereof. Is more preferable, and 0.02 to 1.5 parts by mass is particularly preferable. The amount of the silicon-based surfactant is preferably 0.003 to 7 parts by mass, preferably 0.02, based on 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition, for example, from the viewpoint of enhancing the effect of the silicon-based surfactant. It is more preferably to 5 parts by mass, and particularly preferably 0.03 to 3 parts by mass.
 例えば、本発明の組成物は酸化防止剤を含有できる。酸化防止剤としては、フェノール系酸化防止剤、リン系酸化防止剤、チオエーテル系酸化防止剤が挙げられ、特に限定されるものではないが、国際公開2017/098996号公報、特開2019-116523号公報、特開2017-149852号公報に記載の者が挙げられる。酸化防止剤の量は、酸化防止剤による効果を高める点等から例えば、組成物100質量部中、0.01~10質量部であることが好ましく、0.05~5質量部であることがより好ましく、0.1~3質量部であることが特に好ましい。また酸化防止剤の量は、酸化防止剤による効果を高める点等から例えば、組成物の固形分100質量部中、0.02~10質量部であることが好ましく、0.1~5質量部であることがより好ましく、0.2~3質量部であることが特に好ましい。 For example, the composition of the present invention can contain an antioxidant. Examples of the antioxidant include phenolic antioxidants, phosphorus-based antioxidants, and thioether-based antioxidants, and are not particularly limited, but International Publication No. 2017/098996, JP-A-2019-116523. Examples thereof include those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-149852. The amount of the antioxidant is preferably 0.01 to 10 parts by mass, preferably 0.05 to 5 parts by mass, out of 100 parts by mass of the composition, for example, from the viewpoint of enhancing the effect of the antioxidant. It is more preferably 0.1 to 3 parts by mass, and particularly preferably 0.1 to 3 parts by mass. The amount of the antioxidant is preferably 0.02 to 10 parts by mass, preferably 0.1 to 5 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition, for example, from the viewpoint of enhancing the effect of the antioxidant. Is more preferable, and 0.2 to 3 parts by mass is particularly preferable.
9.その他
 上記組成物は、例えば、全染料の含有量が、上記組成物の固形分100質量部中に、0.01質量部以上10質量部以下であり、上記カチオン重合性成分の含有量が、上記組成物の固形分100質量部中に、50質量部以上であり、上記酸発生剤の含有量が、上記組成物の固形分100質量部中に、0.01質量部以上10質量部以下であるものとすることができる。上記各成分の含有量が上述の組合せであることで、上記組成物は、光吸収性に優れた硬化物を容易に得ることができる。ここで、全染料の含有量とは、上記特定ピロメテン化合物及び必要に応じて添加される式(I)に該当しない染料の合計の含有量を示す。
9. Others In the above composition, for example, the content of the total dye is 0.01 part by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less in 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition, and the content of the cationically polymerizable component is 50 parts by mass or more in 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition, and the content of the acid generator is 0.01 parts by mass or more and 10 parts by mass or less in 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition. Can be assumed to be. When the content of each of the above components is the above-mentioned combination, the above-mentioned composition can easily obtain a cured product having excellent light absorption. Here, the content of all dyes indicates the total content of the above-mentioned specific pyrromethene compound and dyes added as needed that do not correspond to the formula (I).
 上記組成物の製造方法としては、上記各成分を所望量含む組成物を形成可能な方法であれば問題はなく、公知の混合手段を用いる方法を挙げることができる。 As a method for producing the above composition, there is no problem as long as it is a method capable of forming a composition containing each of the above components in a desired amount, and a method using a known mixing means can be mentioned.
 本発明の組成物の具体的な用途としては、光学フィルタ、塗料、コーティング剤、ライニング剤、接着剤、印刷版、絶縁ワニス、絶縁シート、積層板、プリント基板、半導体装置用・LEDパッケージ用・液晶注入口用・有機エレクトロルミネッセンス(EL)用・光素子用・電気絶縁用・電子部品用・分離膜用等の封止剤、成形材料、パテ、ガラス繊維含浸剤、目止め剤、半導体用・太陽電池用等のパッシベーション膜、層間絶縁膜、保護膜、プリント基板、或いはカラーテレビ、PCモニタ、携帯情報端末、CCDイメージセンサのカラーフィルタ、プラズマ表示パネル用の電極材料、印刷インク、歯科用組成物、光造形用樹脂、液状及び乾燥膜の双方、微小機械部品、ガラス繊維ケーブルコーティング、ホログラフィ記録用材料の各種の用途を挙げることができる。 Specific applications of the composition of the present invention include optical filters, paints, coating agents, lining agents, adhesives, printing plates, insulating varnishes, insulating sheets, laminated boards, printed circuit boards, semiconductor devices, LED packages, and the like. For liquid crystal inlets, organic electroluminescence (EL), optical elements, electrical insulation, electronic components, separation films, etc., sealants, molding materials, putties, glass fiber impregnants, sealants, semiconductors, etc.・ Passion film for solar cells, interlayer insulation film, protective film, printed circuit board, color TV, PC monitor, mobile information terminal, color filter for CCD image sensor, electrode material for plasma display panel, printing ink, dental Various uses can be mentioned for compositions, photoforming resins, both liquid and dry films, micromechanical components, glass fiber cable coatings, and holographic recording materials.
 上記光学フィルタとしては、光学フィルタを透過する光のスペクトル形状の変化が要求されるものとすることができ、例えば、液晶表示装置(LCD)、プラズマディスプレイパネル(PDP)、エレクトロルミネッセンスディスプレイ(ELD)、陰極管表示装置(CRT)、CCDイメージセンサ、CMOSセンサ、蛍光表示管、電界放射型ディスプレイ等の画像表示装置用、分析装置用、半導体装置製造用、天文観測用、光通信用、眼鏡レンズ、窓等の用途に用いることができる。 The optical filter may be required to change the spectral shape of the light transmitted through the optical filter. For example, a liquid crystal display (LCD), a plasma display panel (PDP), an electroluminescence display (ELD). , Cathode ray tube display (CRT), CCD image sensor, CMOS sensor, fluorescent display tube, for image display devices such as electric field radiation type display, for analyzer, for semiconductor device manufacturing, for astronomical observation, for optical communication, spectacle lens , Can be used for applications such as windows.
 本発明においては、上記組成物が、光学フィルタ形成用であることが好ましく、なかでも、画像表示装置の光学フィルタ形成用であることが好ましく、特に、画像表示装置の色調整フィルタ形成用であることが好ましい。
 ここで、色調整フィルタは、各色の光を調整するものをあげることができる。色調整フィルタとしては、より具体的には、光学フィルタとして用いられる、R(赤)、G(緑)、B(青)及びその他の色の画素が配置されたカラーフィルタを透過した光の色をさらに調整するために、カラーフィルタと平面視上重なるように配置されるもの、各色のエレクトロルミネッセンス素子等の各色の発光体から照射された光の色をさらに調整するために、各色の発光体と平面視上重なるように配置されるもの等が挙げられる。
 上記用途であることで、光吸収性に優れた光学フィルタを製造可能であるとの効果をより効果的に発揮できるからである。
 上記用途は、なかでも、上記特定ピロメテン化合物が、450nm以上550nm未満に最大吸収波長を有する染料である場合には、青色光及び緑色光の発光光を有する画像表示装置の色調整フィルタ用であることが好ましく、なかでも特に、平面視上青色の画素及び緑色の画素と重なり、青色光及び緑色光の発光光の両者が透過するように配置される画像表示装置の色調整フィルタ用であることが好ましい。
 上記用途は、青色の画素又は緑色の画素と重なるように配置される画像表示装置の色調製用フィルタ形成用であることも好ましい。
 上記用途であることで、所望の波長範囲の光吸収性に優れた光学フィルタを製造可能であるとの効果をより効果的に発揮できるからである。
 また、上記組成物の用途としては、フレキシブル性が要求される部材の形成用途も挙げることができる。
 具体的には、上記組成物は、フレキシブル性を有する画像表示装置用の光学フィルタ形成等に好ましく用いることができる。
In the present invention, the composition is preferably for forming an optical filter, particularly preferably for forming an optical filter for an image display device, and particularly for forming a color adjusting filter for an image display device. Is preferable.
Here, the color adjustment filter may be one that adjusts the light of each color. More specifically, as the color adjustment filter, the color of light transmitted through a color filter in which pixels of R (red), G (green), B (blue) and other colors used as an optical filter are arranged. In order to further adjust the color of the light emitted from the light emitters of each color, such as those arranged so as to overlap with the color filter in plan view, and the electroluminescence element of each color, the light emitters of each color. And the ones arranged so as to overlap each other in a plan view.
This is because the above-mentioned application can more effectively exert the effect that an optical filter having excellent light absorption can be manufactured.
The above application is particularly for a color adjustment filter of an image display device having blue light and green light emission light when the specific pyrromethene compound is a dye having a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more and less than 550 nm. It is preferable, and in particular, it is for a color adjustment filter of an image display device which overlaps with blue pixels and green pixels in a plan view and is arranged so that both blue light and green light emission light are transmitted. Is preferable.
It is also preferable that the above application is for forming a filter for color adjustment of an image display device arranged so as to overlap with a blue pixel or a green pixel.
This is because the above-mentioned application can more effectively exert the effect that an optical filter having excellent light absorption in a desired wavelength range can be manufactured.
Further, as an application of the above composition, an application for forming a member requiring flexibility can also be mentioned.
Specifically, the above composition can be preferably used for forming an optical filter for an image display device having flexibility.
B.硬化物
 次に、本発明の硬化物について説明する。
 本発明の硬化物は、上述の組成物の硬化物であることを特徴とするものである。
B. Cured product Next, the cured product of the present invention will be described.
The cured product of the present invention is characterized by being a cured product of the above-mentioned composition.
 本発明によれば、上記硬化物は、上述の組成物を硬化させたものであることで、例えば、異物が少なく、光吸収性に優れた光学フィルタ等として使用できる。 According to the present invention, the cured product is a cured product of the above composition, and thus can be used as, for example, an optical filter having few foreign substances and excellent light absorption.
 本発明の硬化物は、上述の組成物を用いるものである。
 以下、本発明の硬化物について詳細に説明する。
 なお、上記組成物については、上記「A.組成物」の項に記載の内容と同様とすることができる。
The cured product of the present invention uses the above-mentioned composition.
Hereinafter, the cured product of the present invention will be described in detail.
The composition may be the same as the content described in the section "A. Composition".
 上記硬化物は、通常、カチオン重合性成分の重合物を含むものである。 The cured product usually contains a polymer of a cationically polymerizable component.
 上記硬化物の平面視形状、厚み等については、上記硬化物の用途等に応じて適宜設定することができる。
 上記厚みとしては、例えば、0.05μm以上300μm以下等とすることができる。
The plan-view shape, thickness, and the like of the cured product can be appropriately set according to the intended use of the cured product.
The thickness can be, for example, 0.05 μm or more and 300 μm or less.
 上記硬化物の製造方法としては、上記組成物の硬化物を所望の形状となるように形成できる方法であれば特に限定されるものではない。
 このような製造方法としては、例えば、後述する「D.硬化物の製造方法」の項に記載の内容と同様とすることができるため、ここでの説明は省略する。
The method for producing the cured product is not particularly limited as long as the cured product of the composition can be formed into a desired shape.
As such a manufacturing method, for example, the same as the content described in the section "D. Manufacturing method of cured product" described later can be applied, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.
 上記硬化物の用途等については、上記「A.組成物」の項に記載の内容と同様とすることができる。 The uses of the cured product and the like can be the same as those described in the section "A. Composition" above.
C.光学フィルタ
 次に、本発明の光学フィルタについて説明する。
 本発明の光学フィルタは、上述の硬化物を含む光吸収層を有することを特徴とするものである。
C. Optical filter Next, the optical filter of the present invention will be described.
The optical filter of the present invention is characterized by having a light absorption layer containing the above-mentioned cured product.
 本発明によれば、上記光吸収層が上述の硬化物を含むことにより、高精細、かつ、画像表示装置の色再現性に優れたものとなる。 According to the present invention, the light absorbing layer contains the cured product described above, so that the light absorbing layer has high definition and excellent color reproducibility of the image display device.
 本発明の光学フィルタは、上記光吸収層を有するものである。
 以下、本発明の光学フィルタに含まれる光吸収層について詳細に説明する。
The optical filter of the present invention has the above-mentioned light absorption layer.
Hereinafter, the light absorption layer included in the optical filter of the present invention will be described in detail.
1.光吸収層
 上記光吸収層は、上述の硬化物を含むものである。
 上記光吸収層に含まれる上記硬化物の含有量は、通常、光吸収層100質量部中に、100質量部である。すなわち、上記光吸収層は、上記硬化物からなるものとすることができる。
 上記硬化物については、上記「B.硬化物」の項に記載の内容と同様とすることができる。
1. 1. Light Absorption Layer The light absorption layer contains the above-mentioned cured product.
The content of the cured product contained in the light absorption layer is usually 100 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of the light absorption layer. That is, the light absorption layer can be made of the cured product.
The cured product may be the same as the content described in the section “B. Cured product”.
 上記光吸収層の平面視形状、面積及び厚み等の形状については、光学フィルタの用途等に応じて適宜設定することができる。
 上記光吸収層の形成方法としては、所望の形状、厚みの光吸収層を形成可能なものであればよく、公知の塗膜の形成方法を用いることができる。上記形成方法としては、例えば、後述する「D.硬化物の製造方法」の項に記載の内容と同様とすることができる。
The shape, area, thickness, and the like of the light absorption layer in a plan view can be appropriately set according to the application of the optical filter and the like.
As the method for forming the light absorption layer, any known method for forming a coating film can be used as long as it can form a light absorption layer having a desired shape and thickness. The forming method can be, for example, the same as that described in the section “D. Method for producing a cured product” described later.
2.光学フィルタ
 上記光学フィルタは、上記光吸収層のみを含むものであってもよく、上記光吸収層以外のその他の層を含むものであってもよい。
 上記その他の層としては、透明支持体、下塗り層、反射防止層、ハードコート層、潤滑層、粘着剤層等を挙げることができる。
 このような各層の内容及びその形成方法等については、光学フィルタに一般的に用いられるものとすることができ、例えば、特開2011-144280号公報、国際公開第2016/158639号等に記載の内容と同様とすることができる。
 上記光吸収層は、例えば、上記透明支持体及び任意の各層の間を接着する接着層等として用いられるものであっても構わない。
 また、その際には、上記光学フィルタは、接着層としての光吸収層の表面に、易密着したポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム等の公知のセパレータフィルムを設けることもできる。
2. 2. Optical filter The optical filter may include only the light absorption layer, or may include other layers other than the light absorption layer.
Examples of the other layers include a transparent support, an undercoat layer, an antireflection layer, a hard coat layer, a lubricating layer, and an adhesive layer.
The contents of each layer and the method for forming the layers can be generally used for optical filters, and are described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-144280, International Publication No. 2016/158369, and the like. It can be the same as the content.
The light absorption layer may be used, for example, as an adhesive layer for adhering between the transparent support and any of the layers.
In that case, the optical filter may be provided with a known separator film such as a polyethylene terephthalate film that is easily adhered to the surface of the light absorption layer as an adhesive layer.
 上記光学フィルタは、画像表示装置用として用いる場合、通常ディスプレイの前面に配置することができる。例えば、光学フィルタをディスプレイの表面に直接貼り付けても問題はなく、ディスプレイの前に前面板や電磁波シールドが設けられている場合は、前面板又は電磁波シールドの表側(外側)又は裏側(ディスプレイ側)に光学フィルタを貼り付けても構わない。
 上記光学フィルタは、例えば、画像表示装置に含まれる各部材、例えば、カラーフィルタ、偏光板等の光学部材として用いられるものであっても構わない。
 また、上記光学フィルタは、上記画像表示装置に含まれる各部材に直接積層されるものであっても構わない。
When the optical filter is used for an image display device, the optical filter can usually be arranged in front of a display. For example, there is no problem even if the optical filter is directly attached to the surface of the display, and if a front plate or an electromagnetic wave shield is provided in front of the display, the front side (outside) or the back side (display side) of the front plate or the electromagnetic wave shield is provided. ) May be pasted with an optical filter.
The optical filter may be used as an optical member of each member included in an image display device, for example, a color filter, a polarizing plate, or the like.
Further, the optical filter may be directly laminated on each member included in the image display device.
D.硬化物の製造方法
 次に、本発明の硬化物の製造方法について説明する。
 本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、上述の組成物を硬化する工程を含むことを特徴とするものである。
D. Method for producing a cured product Next, a method for producing a cured product of the present invention will be described.
The method for producing a cured product of the present invention is characterized by including a step of curing the above-mentioned composition.
 本発明によれば、上記硬化物の製造方法は、上記組成物を硬化させるものであるため、例えば、高精細、かつ、光吸収性に優れた光学フィルタ等として使用可能な硬化物を得ることができる。 According to the present invention, since the method for producing the cured product is to cure the composition, for example, a cured product that can be used as an optical filter having high definition and excellent light absorption can be obtained. Can be done.
 本発明の硬化物の製造方法は、上記硬化する工程を含むものである。
 以下、本発明の硬化物の製造方法の各工程について詳細に説明する。
 なお、上記組成物は、上記「A.組成物」の項に記載の内容と同様とすることができるので、ここでの説明は省略する。
The method for producing a cured product of the present invention includes the above-mentioned curing step.
Hereinafter, each step of the method for producing a cured product of the present invention will be described in detail.
Since the composition can be the same as the content described in the section "A. Composition", the description thereof is omitted here.
1.硬化する工程
 上記硬化する工程は、上述の組成物を硬化する工程である。
 上記組成物の硬化方法としては、上記カチオン重合性成分同士を重合可能な方法であればよい。
 組成物の塗膜に対してエネルギー線を照射する方法、組成物の塗膜を加熱する方法等が挙げられる。このような重合する方法は、上記組成物が酸発生剤を含む場合には、その酸発生剤の種類に応じて決定することが好ましい。具体的には、組成物が酸発生剤として光酸発生剤を含む場合には、エネルギー線を照射する方法を好ましく用いることができ、組成物が酸発生剤として熱酸発生剤を含む場合には、加熱する方法を好ましく用いることができる。上記カチオン重合性成分の重合が容易だからである。
1. 1. Curing Step The curing step is a step of curing the above-mentioned composition.
The curing method of the composition may be any method as long as the cationically polymerizable components can be polymerized with each other.
Examples thereof include a method of irradiating the coating film of the composition with energy rays, a method of heating the coating film of the composition, and the like. When the composition contains an acid generator, such a polymerization method is preferably determined according to the type of the acid generator. Specifically, when the composition contains a photoacid generator as an acid generator, a method of irradiating energy rays can be preferably used, and when the composition contains a thermoacid generator as an acid generator. Can preferably use a heating method. This is because the polymerization of the cationically polymerizable component is easy.
 本工程において、カチオン重合性成分の重合に用いられるエネルギー線の光源としては、超高圧水銀ランプ、高圧水銀ランプ、中圧水銀ランプ、低圧水銀ランプ、水銀蒸気アーク灯、キセノンアーク灯、カーボンアーク灯、メタルハライドランプ、蛍光灯、タングステンランプ、エキシマーランプ、殺菌灯、発光ダイオード、CRT光源等から得られる2000オングストローム~7000オングストロームの波長を有する電磁波エネルギーや電子線、X線、放射線等の高エネルギー線を利用することができる。好ましくは、波長300~450nmの光を発光する超高圧水銀ランプ、水銀蒸気アーク灯、カーボンアーク灯、キセノンアーク灯、発光ダイオード等が用いられる。カチオン重合性成分の重合が容易だからである。 In this step, the light source of the energy ray used for the polymerization of the cationically polymerizable component is an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, a high pressure mercury lamp, a medium pressure mercury lamp, a low pressure mercury lamp, a mercury steam arc lamp, a xenon arc lamp, and a carbon arc lamp. , Metal halide lamps, fluorescent lamps, tungsten lamps, excimer lamps, germicidal lamps, light emitting diodes, CRT light sources, etc. It can be used. Preferably, an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp, a mercury vapor arc lamp, a carbon arc lamp, a xenon arc lamp, a light emitting diode, or the like that emits light having a wavelength of 300 to 450 nm is used. This is because the polymerization of the cationically polymerizable component is easy.
 エネルギー線の照射量に特に制限はなく、組成物の組成によって適宜決定することができる。上記照射量は、組成物中の成分の劣化防止の観点から、照射量は100mJ/cm2~2000mJ/cm2が好ましい。 The irradiation amount of the energy ray is not particularly limited and can be appropriately determined depending on the composition of the composition. The dose, from the viewpoint of preventing deterioration of the components in the composition, the amount of irradiation 100mJ / cm 2 ~ 2000mJ / cm 2 is preferred.
 本工程における組成物の塗膜を加熱する方法としては、ホットプレート等の熱板や、大気オーブン、イナートガスオーブン、真空オーブン、熱風循環式オーブン等を用いる方法が挙げられる。
 塗膜を加熱する際の加熱温度としては、特に限定されないが、カチオン重合性成分の重合容易の観点から、70℃以上200℃以下であることが好ましく、90℃以上150℃以下であることが好ましい。
 塗膜を加熱する際の加熱時間としては、特に限定されないが、生産性向上の点から、1~60分が好ましく、1~30分がより好ましい。
Examples of the method for heating the coating film of the composition in this step include a method using a hot plate such as a hot plate, an air oven, an inert gas oven, a vacuum oven, a hot air circulation oven and the like.
The heating temperature when heating the coating film is not particularly limited, but is preferably 70 ° C. or higher and 200 ° C. or lower, and 90 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower, from the viewpoint of easy polymerization of the cationically polymerizable component. preferable.
The heating time when heating the coating film is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 60 minutes, more preferably 1 to 30 minutes from the viewpoint of improving productivity.
 本工程において、上記硬化方法が、エネルギー線を照射する方法及び加熱する方法を併用する方法であることが好ましく、より具体的には、エネルギー線を照射する方法及び加熱する方法をこの順で行うことが好ましい。カチオン重合性成分の重合を効率的に進めることができるからである。 In this step, it is preferable that the curing method is a method in which a method of irradiating energy rays and a method of heating are used in combination, and more specifically, a method of irradiating energy rays and a method of heating are performed in this order. Is preferable. This is because the polymerization of the cationically polymerizable component can be efficiently promoted.
2.その他の工程
 上記製造方法は、必要に応じてその他の工程を有するものであっても構わない。
 このような工程としては、組成物を硬化する工程の前に、上記組成物を塗布する工程等を挙げることができる。
 組成物を塗布する方法としては、スピンコーター、ロールコーター、バーコーター、ダイコーター、カーテンコーター、各種の印刷、浸漬等の公知の方法を用いることができる。
 上記基材としては、硬化物の用途等に応じて適宜設定することができ、ソーダガラス、石英ガラス、半導体基板、金属、紙、プラスチック等を含むものを挙げることができる。
 また、上記硬化物は、基材上で形成された後、基材から剥離して用いても、基材から他の被着体に転写して用いても構わない。
2. 2. Other Steps The above-mentioned manufacturing method may have other steps as required.
Examples of such a step include a step of applying the above composition before the step of curing the composition.
As a method for applying the composition, known methods such as a spin coater, a roll coater, a bar coater, a die coater, a curtain coater, various types of printing, and immersion can be used.
The base material can be appropriately set according to the intended use of the cured product, and examples thereof include soda glass, quartz glass, semiconductor substrates, metals, paper, plastics, and the like.
Further, the cured product may be formed on the base material and then peeled off from the base material, or may be transferred from the base material to another adherend and used.
3.硬化物
 本発明の製造方法により製造される硬化物及び用途等については、上記「C.硬化物」の項に記載の内容と同様とすることができる。
3. 3. Cured product The cured product produced by the production method of the present invention, its use, and the like can be the same as those described in the above section "C. Cured product".
 本発明は、上記実施形態に限定されるものではない。上記実施形態は、例示であり、本発明の請求の範囲に記載された技術的思想と実質的に同一な構成を有し、同様な作用効果を奏するものは、いかなるものであっても本発明の技術的範囲に包含される。 The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment. The above-described embodiment is an example, and any one having substantially the same configuration as the technical idea described in the claims of the present invention and exhibiting the same effect and effect is the present invention. It is included in the technical scope of.
 以下、実施例等を挙げて本発明を更に詳細に説明するが、本発明はこれらの実施例に限定されるものではない。 Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in more detail with reference to Examples and the like, but the present invention is not limited to these Examples.
[製造例1]
 反応フラスコ中で、2,4-ジメチル-3-(3-メチルブトキシカルボニル)ピロール、オルトギ酸エチル、トリフルオロ酢酸を、塩化メチレン中で反応させて得た3,3’,5,5’-テトラメチル-4,4’-ビス(3-メチルブトキシカルボニル)ジピロメテンを、メタノール中で、酢酸コバルト四水和物、トリエチルアミンと反応させ、下記式(C-1)で表される構造を有する、2量体の特定ピロメテン化合物を得た。質量分析にて目的物の分子量であることを確認した。
[製造例2]
 反応フラスコ中、塩化メチレン中で、ベンズアルデヒド、2,4-ジメチル-3-n-ブトキシカルボニルピロール、トリフルオロ酢酸、DDQを反応させて得た反応物を、塩化メチレンに溶解し、トリエチルアミン、三フッ化ホウ素ジエチルエーテルと反応させて、下記式(C-2)で表される構造を有する、2量体の特定ピロメテン化合物を得た。質量分析にて目的物の分子量であることを確認した。
[製造例3]
 反応フラスコ中、塩化メチレン中で、ベンズアルデヒド、2,4-ジメチル-3-n-ブトキシカルボニルピロール、トリフルオロ酢酸、2,3-ジクロロ-5,6-ジシアノ-p-ベンゾキノン(DDQ)を反応させて得た反応物を、メタノール中で、酢酸コバルト四水和物、トリエチルアミンと反応させ、式(C-3)で表される構造を有する、2量体の特定ピロメテン化合物を得た。質量分析にて目的物の分子量であることを確認した。
[製造例4]
 化合物C-1の合成における酢酸コバルト四水和物を、酢酸亜鉛二水和物に変更した以外は製造例1と同様の手順で、下記式(C-4)で表される構造を有する、2量体の特定ピロメテン化合物を得た。質量分析にて目的物の分子量であることを確認した。
[製造例5]
 特開2006-189751号公報に記載のジピロメテン系化合物の製造方法により、下記式(C-5)で表される化合物(ピロメテン系染料)を得た。質量分析にて目的物の分子量であることを確認した。
[Manufacturing Example 1]
3,3', 5,5'- obtained by reacting 2,4-dimethyl-3- (3-methylbutoxycarbonyl) pyrrole, ethyl orthostate, and trifluoroacetic acid in methylene chloride in a reaction flask. Tetramethyl-4,4'-bis (3-methylbutoxycarbonyl) dipyrromethene is reacted with cobalt acetate tetrahydrate and triethylamine in methanol to have a structure represented by the following formula (C-1). A dimer specific pyromethene compound was obtained. It was confirmed by mass spectrometry that it was the molecular weight of the target product.
[Manufacturing Example 2]
The reaction product obtained by reacting benzaldehyde, 2,4-dimethyl-3-n-butoxycarbonylpyrrole, trifluoroacetic acid, and DDQ in reaction flask and methylene chloride was dissolved in methylene chloride, and triethylamine and trifluoride were added. By reacting with boron trifluoride diethyl ether, a dimer specific pyrromethene compound having a structure represented by the following formula (C-2) was obtained. It was confirmed by mass spectrometry that it was the molecular weight of the target product.
[Manufacturing Example 3]
React benzaldehyde, 2,4-dimethyl-3-n-butoxycarbonylpyrrole, trifluoroacetic acid, 2,3-dichloro-5,6-dicyano-p-benzoquinone (DDQ) in reaction flasks and methylene chloride. The resulting reaction product was reacted with cobalt acetate tetrahydrate and triethylamine in methanol to obtain a dimeric specific pyrromethene compound having a structure represented by the formula (C-3). It was confirmed by mass spectrometry that it was the molecular weight of the target product.
[Manufacturing Example 4]
It has a structure represented by the following formula (C-4) in the same procedure as in Production Example 1 except that the cobalt acetate tetrahydrate in the synthesis of compound C-1 is changed to zinc acetate dimer. A dimer of the specific pyrromethene compound was obtained. It was confirmed by mass spectrometry that it was the molecular weight of the target product.
[Manufacturing Example 5]
A compound represented by the following formula (C-5) (pyrromethene dye) was obtained by the method for producing a dipyrromethene compound described in JP-A-2006-189751. It was confirmed by mass spectrometry that it was the molecular weight of the target product.
[製造例6]
 特開2006-189751号公報に記載のアザポルフィリン系化合物の製造方法により、下記式(C-6)で表される化合物を得た。
[Manufacturing Example 6]
A compound represented by the following formula (C-6) was obtained by the method for producing an azaporphyrin-based compound described in JP-A-2006-189751.
[実施例1~16及び比較例1~4]
 下記表3及び表4に記載の配合に従って、カチオン重合性成分、酸発生剤、染料、ラジカル重合性化合物、光ラジカル開始剤、溶剤及び添加剤を配合した後、配合物を5μmのメンブレンフィルタを通し、不溶解分を除去して組成物を得た。
 また、各成分は以下の材料を用いた。
 なお、表中の配合量は、各成分の質量部を表すものである。
[Examples 1 to 16 and Comparative Examples 1 to 4]
After blending the cationically polymerizable component, acid generator, dye, radically polymerizable compound, photoradical initiator, solvent and additive according to the formulations shown in Tables 3 and 4 below, the formulation is applied to a 5 μm membrane filter. The composition was obtained by passing through and removing the insoluble matter.
In addition, the following materials were used for each component.
The blending amount in the table represents the mass part of each component.
 各成分は以下の化学式の材料を用いた。
A1-1:下記式(A1-1)で表される化合物(脂肪族エポキシ化合物、低分子量化合物)である。
A1-2:下記式(A1-2)で表される化合物(脂肪族エポキシ化合物、エポキシ当量は300、低分子量化合物)である。
A1-3:下記式(A1-3)で表される化合物(芳香族エポキシ化合物、低分子量化合物)である。
A1-4:下記式(A1-4)で表される化合物(JER社製#1004、芳香族エポキシ化合物、エポキシ当量 875-975、数平均分子量Mn1650、高分子量化合物)である。
A1-5:下記式(A1-5)で表される化合物(脂肪族エポキシ化合物、低分子量化合物)である。
A1-6:下記式(A1-6)で表される化合物(ダイセル社セロキサイド2021P、脂環式エポキシ化合物、低分子量化合物)である。
A1-7:ダイセル社EHPE-3150(2,2-ビス(ヒドロキシメチル)-1-ブタノールの1,2-エポキシ-4-(2-オキシラニル)シクロヘキサン付加物、脂肪族エポキシ化合物、高分子量化合物)である。
A1-8:東亞合成社のOXT-211(オキセタン化合物、低分子量化合物)である。
A2-1:東亞合成社DPHA(ラジカル重合性化合物)である。
A2-2:新中村化学社A-200(ラジカル重合性化合物)である。
A3-1:住友化学社スミペックスPMMA(重縮合物)である。
B1-1:下記式(B1-1)で表される化合物(光酸発生剤)のPC(炭酸プロピレン)50質量%溶液である。
B1-2:下記式(B1-2)で表される化合物(光酸発生剤)のPC(炭酸プロピレン)50質量%溶液である。
B1-3:下記式(B1-3)で表される化合物(光酸発生剤)のPC(炭酸プロピレン)50質量%溶液である。
B1-4:下記式(B1-4)で表される化合物(光酸発生剤)のPC(炭酸プロピレン)50質量%溶液である。
B1-5:下記式(B1-5)で表される化合物(光酸発生剤)を用いた。
B2-1:BASF社のIrg-907(ラジカル重合開始剤)である。
B2-2:BASF社のOXE-01(ラジカル重合開始剤)である。
C-1:下記式(C-1)で表される化合物(特定ピロメテン化合物、最大吸収波長は493nm(クロロホルム中))である。
C-2:下記式(C-2)で表される化合物(特定ピロメテン化合物、最大吸収波長は499nm(クロロホルム中)である。
C-3: 下記式(C-3)で表される化合物(特定ピロメテン化合物、最大吸収波長は498nm(クロロホルム中)である。
C-4: 下記式(C-4)で表される化合物(特定ピロメテン化合物、最大吸収波長は490nm(クロロホルム中))である。
C-5: 下記式C-5)で表される化合物(ピロメテン系染料、最大吸収波長は496nm(クロロホルム中))である。
C-6: 下記式C-6)で表される化合物(テトラアザポルフィリン系染料、最大吸収波長は594nm(クロロホルム中))である。
D-1:東レダウコーニング社のSH-29PPaint aditive(界面活性剤)である。
D-2:ビックケミー社のBYK-333(界面活性剤)である。
D-3:下記式(D-3)で表される化合物(酸化防止剤)である。
D-4:下記式(D-4)で表される化合物(酸化防止剤)である。
D-5:下記式(D-5)で表される化合物(増感剤、ベンゾカルバゾール誘導体)
D-6:下記式(D-6)で表される化合物(増感剤、カルバゾール誘導体)
E-1:メチルエチルケトン(溶剤、ケトン系溶剤)である。
E-2:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(溶剤、PGMEA、エーテルエステル系溶剤)である。
E-3:ジアセトンアルコール(溶剤、アルコール系溶剤)である。
E-4:ジプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(溶剤、エーテルエステル系溶剤)である。
E-5:プロピレングリコールジアセテート(溶剤、エーテルエステル系溶剤)である。
For each component, materials having the following chemical formulas were used.
A1-11: A compound represented by the following formula (A1-1) (aliphatic epoxy compound, low molecular weight compound).
A1-2: A compound represented by the following formula (A1-2) (aliphatic epoxy compound, epoxy equivalent: 300, low molecular weight compound).
A1-3: A compound represented by the following formula (A1-3) (aromatic epoxy compound, low molecular weight compound).
A1-4: A compound represented by the following formula (A1-4) (JER # 1004, aromatic epoxy compound, epoxy equivalent 875-975, number average molecular weight Mn1650, high molecular weight compound).
A1-5: A compound represented by the following formula (A1-5) (aliphatic epoxy compound, low molecular weight compound).
A1-6: A compound represented by the following formula (A1-6) (Daicel's celloxide 2021P, alicyclic epoxy compound, low molecular weight compound).
A1-7: Daicel EHPE-3150 (1,2-epoxy-4- (2-oxylanyl) cyclohexane adduct of 2,2-bis (hydroxymethyl) -1-butanol, aliphatic epoxy compound, high molecular weight compound) Is.
A1-8: OXT-211 (oxetane compound, low molecular weight compound) manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
A2-1: Toagosei DPHA (radical polymerizable compound).
A2-2: Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. A-200 (radical polymerizable compound).
A3-1: Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd. Sumipex PMMA (polycondensate).
B1-1: A 50% by mass solution of PC (propylene carbonate) of a compound (photoacid generator) represented by the following formula (B1-1).
B1-2: A 50% by mass solution of PC (propylene carbonate) of a compound (photoacid generator) represented by the following formula (B1-2).
B1-3: A 50% by mass solution of PC (propylene carbonate) of a compound (photoacid generator) represented by the following formula (B1-3).
B1-4: A 50% by mass solution of PC (propylene carbonate) of a compound (photoacid generator) represented by the following formula (B1-4).
B1-5: A compound (photoacid generator) represented by the following formula (B1-5) was used.
B2-1: Irg-907 (radical polymerization initiator) manufactured by BASF.
B2-2: OXE-01 (radical polymerization initiator) manufactured by BASF.
C-1: A compound represented by the following formula (C-1) (specific pyrromethene compound, maximum absorption wavelength is 493 nm (in chloroform)).
C-2: A compound represented by the following formula (C-2) (specific pyrromethene compound, maximum absorption wavelength is 499 nm (in chloroform).
C-3: A compound represented by the following formula (C-3) (specific pyrromethene compound, maximum absorption wavelength is 498 nm (in chloroform).
C-4: A compound represented by the following formula (C-4) (specific pyrromethene compound, maximum absorption wavelength is 490 nm (in chloroform)).
C-5: A compound represented by the following formula C-5) (pyrromethene dye, maximum absorption wavelength is 496 nm (in chloroform)).
C-6: A compound represented by the following formula C-6) (tetraazaporphyrin dye, maximum absorption wavelength is 594 nm (in chloroform)).
D-1: SH-29P Paint additive (surfactant) manufactured by Toray Dow Corning.
D-2: BYK-333 (surfactant) manufactured by Big Chemie.
D-3: A compound (antioxidant) represented by the following formula (D-3).
D-4: A compound (antioxidant) represented by the following formula (D-4).
D-5: Compound represented by the following formula (D-5) (sensitizer, benzocarbazole derivative)
D-6: Compound represented by the following formula (D-6) (sensitizer, carbazole derivative)
E-1: Methyl ethyl ketone (solvent, ketone solvent).
E-2: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (solvent, PGMEA, ether ester solvent).
E-3: Diacetone alcohol (solvent, alcohol-based solvent).
E-4: Dipropylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (solvent, ether ester solvent).
E-5: Propylene glycol diacetate (solvent, ether ester solvent).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000037
[評価]
 各種の測定については、以下の方法に従って行った。
[Evaluation]
Various measurements were performed according to the following methods.
評価1.異物評価(組成物中の分散安定性)
 表3及び表4中の実施例1~4、11~14、16及び比較例4の各成分を混合して30分後にろ過をせずに製膜した。
 得られた膜を光学顕微鏡で観察し、最大長さが50μm以上の異物の数を1cm×1cmの範囲で確認し、下記基準で評価した。結果を表5に示す。
 なお、ここでいう最大長さは、膜を平面視したときにおける異物の像を横断する最大の線分の長さを指す。
 また、製膜条件は、10cm×10cmの表面洗浄ガラス(基板)上に、上記組成物をスピンコート法で塗布した。塗布条件は、回転数1500rpmで10秒の条件とした。次いで、ホットプレートで80℃3分間加熱処理して、溶剤を乾燥除去して、異物評価用のサンプルを作製した。
○:異物数が5カウント以下
△:異物数が5カウント超20カウント未満
×:異物数が20カウント以上
 なお、異物の数が少ないほど、光学フィルタとして好ましい。
Evaluation 1. Foreign matter evaluation (dispersion stability in composition)
Each component of Examples 1 to 4, 11 to 14, 16 and Comparative Example 4 in Tables 3 and 4 was mixed, and after 30 minutes, a film was formed without filtration.
The obtained film was observed with an optical microscope, and the number of foreign substances having a maximum length of 50 μm or more was confirmed in the range of 1 cm × 1 cm, and evaluated according to the following criteria. The results are shown in Table 5.
The maximum length referred to here refers to the length of the maximum line segment that crosses the image of the foreign matter when the film is viewed in a plan view.
Further, under the film forming conditions, the above composition was applied by a spin coating method on a surface cleaning glass (substrate) of 10 cm × 10 cm. The coating conditions were 10 seconds at a rotation speed of 1500 rpm. Next, the solvent was dried and removed by heat treatment at 80 ° C. for 3 minutes on a hot plate to prepare a sample for evaluating foreign substances.
◯: The number of foreign substances is 5 counts or less Δ: The number of foreign substances is more than 5 counts and less than 20 counts ×: The number of foreign substances is 20 counts or more The smaller the number of foreign substances is, the more preferable the optical filter is.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000038
評価2-1.組成物及びその硬化物の最小透過率及び最大吸収波長
 実施例及び比較例の組成物を用いて、以下の方法により硬化前の評価用サンプルと硬化後の評価用サンプルを準備し、日本分光製可視紫外吸光度計V-670を用いて、透過スペクトルを測定し、380nm以上780nm以下の範囲における最小透過率とその時の波長(最大吸収波長)を得た。結果を下記表6及び表7に示す。
 なお、比較例3については、硬化性組成物ではないため、硬化前の評価用サンプルの測定結果のみ示す。
 また、染料として2種類以上の染料を含む場合には、波長が最も短い最大吸収波長を示す染料についての最大吸収波長を示した。例えば、化合物C-1及び化合物C-6の2種類の染料を含む実施例16では、最大吸収波長が短い化合物C-1に基づいて得られる最大吸収波長を表に示した。
 本発明においては、評価2-2で示す、硬化前後の最小透過率の差が小さいほど、すなわち、硬化前後で透過率変化が小さいほど、光の吸収性に優れると判断できる。
Evaluation 2-1. Minimum transmittance and maximum absorption wavelength of the composition and its cured product Using the compositions of Examples and Comparative Examples, an evaluation sample before curing and an evaluation sample after curing were prepared by the following methods, and manufactured by Nippon Spectroscopy. The transmittance spectrum was measured using a visible ultraviolet absorptiometer V-670 to obtain the minimum transmittance in the range of 380 nm or more and 780 nm or less and the wavelength at that time (maximum absorption wavelength). The results are shown in Tables 6 and 7 below.
Since Comparative Example 3 is not a curable composition, only the measurement results of the evaluation sample before curing are shown.
When two or more kinds of dyes are contained as the dye, the maximum absorption wavelength of the dye showing the maximum absorption wavelength having the shortest wavelength is shown. For example, in Example 16 containing two dyes, Compound C-1 and Compound C-6, the maximum absorption wavelength obtained based on Compound C-1, which has a short maximum absorption wavelength, is shown in the table.
In the present invention, it can be determined that the smaller the difference in the minimum transmittance before and after curing, that is, the smaller the change in transmittance before and after curing, the better the light absorption shown in Evaluation 2-2.
(硬化前の評価用サンプルの作製方法)
(1)上記組成物を、基材(東洋紡製PETフィルムA9300、100μm)に、バーコート法で塗布した。
 塗膜の厚みは、以下の硬化前の評価用サンプルの最大吸収波長での透過率が3-7%程度となるように調整した。
(2)次いで、オーブンにて塗膜を、80℃、5分間の条件で乾燥処理して溶剤を除去し、硬化前の評価用サンプルを得た。
(Method of preparing evaluation sample before curing)
(1) The above composition was applied to a base material (PET film A9300 manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd., 100 μm) by a bar coating method.
The thickness of the coating film was adjusted so that the transmittance of the following evaluation sample before curing at the maximum absorption wavelength was about 3-7%.
(2) Next, the coating film was dried in an oven at 80 ° C. for 5 minutes to remove the solvent, and an evaluation sample before curing was obtained.
(硬化後の評価用サンプルの作製方法)
(1)硬化前の評価用サンプルに対して、実施例及び比較例毎に以下の硬化処理を行い、硬化後の評価用サンプルを得た。
(3-1)実施例1~16及び比較例1及び2では、乾燥処理後の塗膜に対して高圧水銀ランプを用いて紫外線を1500mJ/cm2照射して硬化処理を行い、評価用サンプルを得た。
(3-2)比較例3では、評価用サンプルは作成しなかった。
(Method of preparing a sample for evaluation after curing)
(1) The evaluation sample before curing was subjected to the following curing treatment for each of Examples and Comparative Examples to obtain an evaluation sample after curing.
(3-1) In Examples 1 to 16 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2, the coating film after the drying treatment was cured by irradiating the coating film with ultraviolet rays at 1500 mJ / cm 2 using a high-pressure mercury lamp, and the sample for evaluation was evaluated. Got
(3-2) In Comparative Example 3, no evaluation sample was prepared.
評価2-2.硬化物の最小透過率と組成物の最小透過率との差の絶対値
 実施例1~16及び比較例1及び2において、評価2-1で得た硬化前の評価用サンプルと硬化後の評価用サンプルの最小透過率から両者の差を求めた。硬化前後の最小透過率の差が小さいほど、すなわち、硬化前後で透過率変化が小さいほど、光の吸収性に優れると判断できる。
Evaluation 2-2. Absolute value of the difference between the minimum transmittance of the cured product and the minimum transmittance of the composition In Examples 1 to 16 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2, the evaluation sample before curing and the evaluation after curing obtained in Evaluation 2-1. The difference between the two was calculated from the minimum transmittance of the sample for use. It can be judged that the smaller the difference in the minimum transmittance before and after curing, that is, the smaller the change in transmittance before and after curing, the better the light absorption.
評価3.カール性
 上記「評価2-1」と同様の方法で作製した硬化後の評価用サンプルを10cm角に切り取り、まず左側半分(5cm分)をガラス板で押さえ、そり上がった右側の2角のそれぞれの高さを測定し、次に右側半分(5cm分)をガラス板で押さえ、そり上がった左側の2角のそれぞれの高さを測定し、4つの測定値の平均(単位:mm)をカール性とした。なお、比較例3では、オーブンにて乾燥処理後の塗膜に対して、100℃、20分の加熱処理を行って評価用サンプルを得て同様の評価を行った。目視で反り返りがあるかを評価し、以下の基準で評価した。結果を下記表6及び表7に示す。
○:4隅の平均が10mm未満
×:4隅の平均が10mm以上
 なお、反りの高さ(4つの測定値の平均)が低いほど硬化物は、カールが少なく、カール性に優れることを示す。
Evaluation 3. Curling property A sample for evaluation after curing prepared by the same method as the above "evaluation 2-1" is cut into 10 cm squares, the left half (5 cm) is first pressed with a glass plate, and each of the two corners on the right side is raised. Then measure the height of the right half (5 cm) with a glass plate, measure the height of each of the two corners on the left side that has risen, and curl the average (unit: mm) of the four measured values. I made it sex. In Comparative Example 3, the coating film dried in an oven was heat-treated at 100 ° C. for 20 minutes to obtain an evaluation sample, and the same evaluation was performed. It was evaluated visually whether there was warpage, and evaluated according to the following criteria. The results are shown in Tables 6 and 7 below.
◯: The average of the four corners is less than 10 mm ×: The average of the four corners is 10 mm or more The lower the warp height (average of the four measured values), the less curl the cured product has and the better the curl property. ..
評価4.可撓性
 上記「評価2-1」と同様の方法で作製した硬化後の評価用サンプルを10cm角に切り取り、直径10mmの金属棒に巻き付けてクラックが入らないかどうかを目視にて以下の基準で評価した。結果を下記表6及び表7に示す。
○:クラック無し
×:クラック有り
 なお、クラックが少ないほど、硬化物は、可撓性に優れることを示す。
Evaluation 4. Flexibility A cured sample prepared by the same method as in "Evaluation 2-1" above is cut into 10 cm squares, wrapped around a metal rod with a diameter of 10 mm, and visually checked for cracks based on the following criteria. Evaluated in. The results are shown in Tables 6 and 7 below.
◯: No cracks ×: With cracks The fewer cracks there are, the more flexible the cured product is.
評価5.耐溶剤性
 上記「評価2-1」と同様の方法で作製した硬化後の評価用サンプルの、上記組成物の硬化膜に、エタノールを染み込ませた綿棒を擦り付け、20往復後の染料の色移りを目視で観察し、以下の基準で評価した。結果を下記表6及び表7に示す。
○:色移り無し
×:色移り有り
 なお、色移りが少ないほど、硬化物は、経時的な色変化が少ない点で優れることを示す。
Evaluation 5. Solvent resistance A cotton swab impregnated with ethanol is rubbed against the cured film of the composition of the evaluated sample after curing prepared by the same method as in "Evaluation 2-1", and the color transfer of the dye after 20 reciprocations. Was visually observed and evaluated according to the following criteria. The results are shown in Tables 6 and 7 below.
◯: No color transfer ×: With color transfer The less the color transfer, the better the cured product is in that the color change with time is small.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000040
 異物評価(評価1)の評価より、本発明の組成物は、分散安定性が良好であり、異物の少ない硬化膜の形成が容易であることが確認できた。
 表6及び表7の評価2-1の結果より、実施例の組成物は、450nm以上550nm未満に最大吸収波長を有することが確認できた。また評価2-1及び評価2-2から、実施例の組成物は、比較例の組成物と比較して、硬化前後で透過率変化が少なく、450nm以上550nm未満の波長領域の光吸収性に優れた硬化物が得られることが確認できた。従って、本発明の組成物は、特定波長の光を吸収して、色純度を高めること、例えば、青色発光及び緑色発光の色純度を高めることが可能であり、画像表示装置の色再現性に優れた光学フィルタに特に有用であることが確認できた。
From the evaluation of the foreign matter evaluation (evaluation 1), it was confirmed that the composition of the present invention had good dispersion stability and was easy to form a cured film with few foreign substances.
From the results of evaluation 2-1 in Tables 6 and 7, it was confirmed that the composition of the example had a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more and less than 550 nm. Further, from Evaluation 2-1 and Evaluation 2-2, the composition of the example had less change in transmittance before and after curing as compared with the composition of the comparative example, and had light absorption in the wavelength region of 450 nm or more and less than 550 nm. It was confirmed that an excellent cured product could be obtained. Therefore, the composition of the present invention can absorb light of a specific wavelength to increase the color purity, for example, increase the color purity of blue light emission and green light emission, and improve the color reproducibility of the image display device. It was confirmed that it is particularly useful for an excellent optical filter.
 カール性評価(評価3)から、本発明の組成物は、硬化収縮が少なく、密着性等に優れたものとなることが確認できた。
 可撓性評価(評価4)から、本発明の組成物は、可撓性が良好であり、例えば、フレキシブル性を有する画像表示装置に用いられる光学フィルタ等に特に有用であることが確認できた。
 耐溶剤性(評価5)の評価より、本発明の組成物は、カチオン重合性成分を含むことで、三次元架橋された塗膜を形成でき、染料の保持性能等の耐久性に優れた硬化物を得られることが確認できた。
From the curl property evaluation (evaluation 3), it was confirmed that the composition of the present invention has little curing shrinkage and is excellent in adhesion and the like.
From the flexibility evaluation (evaluation 4), it was confirmed that the composition of the present invention has good flexibility and is particularly useful for, for example, an optical filter used in an image display device having flexibility. ..
From the evaluation of solvent resistance (evaluation 5), the composition of the present invention can form a three-dimensionally crosslinked coating film by containing a cationically polymerizable component, and can be cured with excellent durability such as dye retention performance. I was able to confirm that I could get things.

Claims (11)

  1.  下記一般式(I)で表される化合物が金属原子又は金属化合物に配位したピロメテン化合物と、
     カチオン重合性成分と、
     酸発生剤と、
     を有する組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

    (式中、R101、R102、R103、R105、R106及びR107は、各々独立に、置換基を有していてもよい直鎖若しくは分岐鎖のアルキル基を表し、
     R104は、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい直鎖若しくは分岐鎖のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。)
    The compound represented by the following general formula (I) is a pyrromethene compound coordinated to a metal atom or a metal compound, and
    With cationically polymerizable components,
    Acid generator and
    Composition having.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

    (In the formula, R 101 , R 102 , R 103 , R 105 , R 106 and R 107 each independently represent a linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent.
    R 104 represents a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent. )
  2.  前記ピロメテン化合物が、下記一般式(I-1)で表される化合物又は下記一般式(I-2)で表される化合物である、請求項1に記載の組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

    (式中、R201、R202、R203、R205、R206及びR207は、各々独立に、置換基を有していてもよい直鎖若しくは分岐鎖のアルキル基を表し、
     R204は、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい直鎖若しくは分岐鎖のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。
     X1及びX2は、各々独立に、ヒドロキシ基、ハロゲン原子、置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアルコキシ基を表す。)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

    (式中、R301、R302、R303、R305、R306及びR307並びにR401、R402、R403、R405、R406及びR407は、各々独立に、置換基を有していてもよい直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基を表し、
     R304及びR404は、各々独立に、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい直鎖若しくは分岐鎖のアルキル基又は置換基を有していてもよいアリール基を表す。
     M3は、Zn、Mg、Si、Sn、Rh、Pt、Pd、Mo、Mn、Pb、Cu、Ni、Co、Fe、Al、In、Fe、Ti、Sn、Si、Ge、B、又はVを表す。)
    The composition according to claim 1, wherein the pyrromethene compound is a compound represented by the following general formula (I-1) or a compound represented by the following general formula (I-2).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

    (In the formula, R 201 , R 202 , R 203 , R 205 , R 206 and R 207 each independently represent a linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent.
    R 204 represents a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.
    Each of X 1 and X 2 may independently have a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, a phenyl group which may have a substituent, or a substituent. Represents an alkoxy group. )
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

    (In the formula, R 301 , R 302 , R 303 , R 305 , R 306 and R 307 and R 401 , R 402 , R 403 , R 405 , R 406 and R 407 each independently have a substituent. Represents a linear or branched alkyl group that may be
    R 304 and R 404 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.
    M 3 is Zn, Mg, Si, Sn, Rh, Pt, Pd, Mo, Mn, Pb, Cu, Ni, Co, Fe, Al, In, Fe, Ti, Sn, Si, Ge, B, or V. Represents. )
  3.  前記ピロメテン化合物が、前記一般式(I-2)で表される化合物である、請求項2に記載の組成物。 The composition according to claim 2, wherein the pyrromethene compound is a compound represented by the general formula (I-2).
  4.  R301、R303、R305及びR307、並びに、R401、R403、R405及びR407が、それぞれ独立に、炭素原子数1~20の置換基を有していてもよい直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基であり、R302及びR306並びにR402及びR406が、それぞれ独立に、炭素原子数1~20の置換基を有していてもよい直鎖又は分岐鎖のアルキル基であり、
     R304及びR404が、水素原子であり、
     M3がZn、Cu、Ni又はCoである、請求項2又は3に記載の組成物。
    R 301 , R 303 , R 305 and R 307 , and R 401 , R 403 , R 405 and R 407 may each independently have a substituent having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. It is an alkyl group of a branched chain, and R 302 and R 306 and R 402 and R 406 are linear or branched alkyl groups which may independently have a substituent having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, respectively. Yes,
    R 304 and R 404 are hydrogen atoms,
    The composition according to claim 2 or 3, wherein M 3 is Zn, Cu, Ni or Co.
  5.  前記カチオン重合性成分が、脂環式エポキシ化合物及び脂肪族エポキシ化合物の少なくとも一方を含む、請求項1ないし4のいずれかに記載の組成物。 The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the cationically polymerizable component contains at least one of an alicyclic epoxy compound and an aliphatic epoxy compound.
  6.  前記カチオン重合性成分の含有量が、前記組成物の固形分100質量部中に、50質量部以上であり、
     前記脂環式エポキシ化合物及び前記脂肪族エポキシ化合物の合計の含有量が、前記カチオン重合性成分100質量部中に、50質量部以上である、請求項5に記載の組成物。
    The content of the cationically polymerizable component is 50 parts by mass or more in 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the composition.
    The composition according to claim 5, wherein the total content of the alicyclic epoxy compound and the aliphatic epoxy compound is 50 parts by mass or more in 100 parts by mass of the cationically polymerizable component.
  7.  前記組成物が、溶剤を含み、
     前記溶剤が、アルコール系溶剤及びエーテルエステル系溶剤の少なくとも一方を含む請求項1ないし6のいずれかに記載の組成物。
    The composition contains a solvent and
    The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the solvent contains at least one of an alcohol solvent and an ether ester solvent.
  8.  前記組成物が、光学フィルタ形成用である請求項1ないし7のいずれかに記載の組成物。 The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the composition is for forming an optical filter.
  9.  請求項1ないし8のいずれかに記載の組成物の硬化物。 A cured product of the composition according to any one of claims 1 to 8.
  10.  請求項1ないし8のいずれかに記載の組成物の硬化物を含む光吸収層を有する光学フィルタ。 An optical filter having a light absorption layer containing a cured product of the composition according to any one of claims 1 to 8.
  11.  請求項1ないし8のいずれかに記載の組成物を硬化する工程を有する、硬化物の製造方法。 A method for producing a cured product, which comprises a step of curing the composition according to any one of claims 1 to 8.
PCT/JP2020/030321 2019-09-04 2020-08-07 Composition, cured product, optical filter, and method for producing cured product WO2021044802A1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202080048106.2A CN114072474B (en) 2019-09-04 2020-08-07 Composition, cured product, optical filter, and method for producing cured product
JP2021543666A JPWO2021044802A1 (en) 2019-09-04 2020-08-07
KR1020217041670A KR20220059442A (en) 2019-09-04 2020-08-07 Composition, cured product, optical filter, and method for preparing cured product

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2019160799 2019-09-04
JP2019-160799 2019-09-04

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021044802A1 true WO2021044802A1 (en) 2021-03-11

Family

ID=74852033

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2020/030321 WO2021044802A1 (en) 2019-09-04 2020-08-07 Composition, cured product, optical filter, and method for producing cured product

Country Status (5)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2021044802A1 (en)
KR (1) KR20220059442A (en)
CN (1) CN114072474B (en)
TW (1) TW202115195A (en)
WO (1) WO2021044802A1 (en)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2021038176A (en) * 2019-09-04 2021-03-11 山田化学工業株式会社 Boron complex compound and optical filter
JP7173394B1 (en) 2022-01-07 2022-11-16 凸版印刷株式会社 Optical film, composition for forming colored layer, dipyrromethene cobalt complex, and display device
WO2023233864A1 (en) * 2022-05-30 2023-12-07 凸版印刷株式会社 Optical film, composition for colored layer formation, dipyrromethene cobalt complex, and display device
JP7424594B2 (en) 2020-03-04 2024-01-30 エルジー・ケム・リミテッド Optical film-forming composition, optical film, and display device containing the same

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP7452664B2 (en) * 2020-03-04 2024-03-19 エルジー・ケム・リミテッド Compounds and optical films containing them

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2003057436A (en) * 2001-08-20 2003-02-26 Mitsui Chemicals Inc Optical filter
JP2006079012A (en) * 2004-09-13 2006-03-23 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Blue color filter and liquid crystal display using the same
JP2006079011A (en) * 2004-09-13 2006-03-23 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Color filter structure and liquid crystal display
JP2010209202A (en) * 2009-03-10 2010-09-24 Fujifilm Corp Ink composition and inkjet recording method
WO2013172145A1 (en) * 2012-05-15 2013-11-21 株式会社Adeka Photocurable resin composition
WO2016190283A1 (en) * 2015-05-26 2016-12-01 東レ株式会社 Pyrromethene-boron complex, color-changing composition, color-changing film, light source unit including same, display, and lighting
WO2019138953A1 (en) * 2018-01-09 2019-07-18 株式会社Adeka Composition, cured substance, optical filter, and method for manufacturing cured substance

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI466882B (en) * 2009-09-29 2015-01-01 Fujifilm Corp Colorant multimer, colored curable composition, color filter and method for producing the same
JP6086885B2 (en) 2013-09-30 2017-03-01 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device and compound

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2003057436A (en) * 2001-08-20 2003-02-26 Mitsui Chemicals Inc Optical filter
JP2006079012A (en) * 2004-09-13 2006-03-23 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Blue color filter and liquid crystal display using the same
JP2006079011A (en) * 2004-09-13 2006-03-23 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Color filter structure and liquid crystal display
JP2010209202A (en) * 2009-03-10 2010-09-24 Fujifilm Corp Ink composition and inkjet recording method
WO2013172145A1 (en) * 2012-05-15 2013-11-21 株式会社Adeka Photocurable resin composition
WO2016190283A1 (en) * 2015-05-26 2016-12-01 東レ株式会社 Pyrromethene-boron complex, color-changing composition, color-changing film, light source unit including same, display, and lighting
WO2019138953A1 (en) * 2018-01-09 2019-07-18 株式会社Adeka Composition, cured substance, optical filter, and method for manufacturing cured substance

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2021038176A (en) * 2019-09-04 2021-03-11 山田化学工業株式会社 Boron complex compound and optical filter
JP7288633B2 (en) 2019-09-04 2023-06-08 山田化学工業株式会社 Boron complex compound and optical filter
JP7424594B2 (en) 2020-03-04 2024-01-30 エルジー・ケム・リミテッド Optical film-forming composition, optical film, and display device containing the same
JP7173394B1 (en) 2022-01-07 2022-11-16 凸版印刷株式会社 Optical film, composition for forming colored layer, dipyrromethene cobalt complex, and display device
JP2023101372A (en) * 2022-01-07 2023-07-20 凸版印刷株式会社 Optical film, colored layer formation composition, dipyrromethene cobalt complex, and display device
WO2023233864A1 (en) * 2022-05-30 2023-12-07 凸版印刷株式会社 Optical film, composition for colored layer formation, dipyrromethene cobalt complex, and display device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW202115195A (en) 2021-04-16
KR20220059442A (en) 2022-05-10
CN114072474B (en) 2023-04-28
CN114072474A (en) 2022-02-18
JPWO2021044802A1 (en) 2021-03-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN114072474B (en) Composition, cured product, optical filter, and method for producing cured product
CN107922745B (en) Thermosetting resin composition
TWI700337B (en) Hardening composition
KR20130069574A (en) Curable composition
CN111315828B (en) Composition, cured product, optical filter, and method for producing cured product
WO2013172145A1 (en) Photocurable resin composition
TWI820164B (en) Composition, hardened material, optical filter and method of manufacturing hardened material
JP7374567B2 (en) Composition, cured product, optical filter, and method for producing cured product
WO2021044801A1 (en) Composition, cured product, optical filter, and method for producing cured product
JP2014149514A (en) Laminating resin composition and application thereof
TW201946981A (en) Color material dispersion liquid, composition, film, optical filter, and display device
TWI841775B (en) Composition, cured product, optical filter and method for producing cured product
CN114222773B (en) Composition, cured product, optical filter, and method for producing cured product
CN115279831B (en) Composition, cured product, and method for producing cured product
TW202222727A (en) Method for producing colored layer, agent, and layered body

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20860014

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021543666

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20860014

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1